Panasonic of North America GA-120-COLR Connected Color Radio User Manual 00 Introduction 1 6

Panasonic Corporation of North America Connected Color Radio 00 Introduction 1 6

Contents

user manual 1

Black plate (1,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20122012 Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual MIn Brief ........................ 1-1Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17eAssist Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22Performance andMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25Keys, Doors, andWindows .................... 2-1Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Roof..........................2-21Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1Additional StorageFeatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-25Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-40Universal Remote System . . . . 5-46Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26Rear Seat Infotainment . . . . . . . 7-47Phone........................7-57Trademarks and LicenseAgreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-81Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-15Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-29Drive Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Black plate (2,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20122012 Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual MRide Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-36Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40Object Detection Systems . . . . 9-42Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-49Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-60Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-3Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-90Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-94Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-98Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3Special ApplicationServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9Additional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . 11-14Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-17Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-17Vehicle Data Recordingand Privacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1OnStar Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1OnStar Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2OnStar AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5Index ..................... i-1
Black plate (3,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Introduction iiiThe names, logos, emblems,slogans, vehicle model names, andvehicle body designs appearing inthis manual including, but not limitedto, GM, the GM logo, BUICK, theBUICK Emblem, and LACROSSEare trademarks and/or servicemarks of General Motors LLC, itssubsidiaries, affiliates, or licensors.This manual describes features thatmay or may not be on your specificvehicle either because they areoptions that you did not purchase ordue to changes subsequent to theprinting of this owner manual.Please refer to the purchasedocumentation relating to yourspecific vehicle to confirm each ofthe features found on your vehicle.For vehicles first sold in Canada,substitute the name “GeneralMotors of Canada Limited”forBuick Motor Division wherever itappears in this manual.Keep this manual in the vehicle forquick reference.Canadian Vehicle OwnersPropriétaires CanadiensA French language copy of thismanual can be obtained from yourdealer or from:On peut obtenir un exemplaire dece guide en français auprès duconcessionnaire ou à l'adressesuivante:Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 482071-800-551-4123Numéro de poste 6438 de languefrançaisewww.helminc.comLitho in U.S.A.Part No. 20867287 A First Printing ©2011 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Black plate (4,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012iv IntroductionUsing this ManualTo quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle, use the Index in theback of the manual. It is analphabetical list of what is in themanual and the page number whereit can be found.Danger, Warnings, andCautionsWarning messages found on vehiclelabels and in this manual describehazards and what to do to avoid orreduce them.Danger indicates a hazard with ahigh level of risk which will result inserious injury or death.Warning or Caution indicates ahazard that could result in injuryor death.{WARNINGThese mean there is somethingthat could hurt you or otherpeople.Notice: This means there issomething that could result inproperty or vehicle damage. Thiswould not be covered by thevehicle's warranty.A circle with a slash through itis a safety symbol which means“Do Not,” “Do not do this,”or“Do not let this happen.”SymbolsThe vehicle has components andlabels that use symbols instead oftext. Symbols are shown along withthe text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specificcomponent, control, message,gauge, or indicator.M:This symbol is shown whenyou need to see your owner manualfor additional instructions orinformation.*:This symbol is shown whenyou need to see a service manualfor additional instructions orinformation.
Black plate (5,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Introduction vVehicle Symbol ChartHere are some additional symbolsthat may be found on the vehicleand what they mean. For moreinformation on the symbol, refer tothe Index.9:Airbag Readiness Light#:Air Conditioning!:Antilock Brake System (ABS)%:Audio Steering Wheel Controlsor OnStar®$:Brake System Warning Light":Charging SystemI:Cruise ControlB:Engine Coolant TemperatureO:Exterior Lamps#:Fog Lamps.:Fuel Gauge+:Fuses3:Headlamp High/Low-BeamChangerj:LATCH System ChildRestraints*:Malfunction Indicator Lamp::Oil Pressure}:Power/:Remote Vehicle Start>:Safety Belt Reminders7:Tire Pressure Monitord:Traction Control/Stabilitrak®M:Windshield Washer Fluid
Black plate (6,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012vi Introduction2NOTES
Black plate (1,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012In Brief 1-1In BriefInstrument PanelInstrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Initial Drive InformationInitial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-4Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8Heated and VentilatedSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . 1-9Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10Steering WheelAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-13Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16Vehicle FeaturesRadio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-18Bluetooth®................... 1-18Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-19Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . 1-21Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 1-21Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21Universal Remote System . . . 1-21Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22eAssist FeatureseAssist®Overview . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22High Voltage SafetyInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23Driver Efficiency Gauge . . . . . . 1-23Automatic Engine Start/StopFeature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24Regenerative Braking . . . . . . . . 1-24Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24Service ...................... 1-25Performance and MaintenanceTraction ControlSystem (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25StabiliTrak®System . . . . . . . . . 1-25Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-26Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-26Driving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27Roadside AssistanceProgram .................... 1-27OnStar®..................... 1-28
Black plate (2,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20121-2 In BriefInstrument Panel
Black plate (3,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012In Brief 1-3A. Air Vents on page 8‑9.B. Head-Up Display (HUD) onpage 5‑29 (If Equipped).C. Turn and Lane‐Change Lever.See Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals on page 6‑4.Driver Information CenterButtons. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑25.D. Instrument Cluster on page 5‑9.Driver Information CenterDisplay. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑25.E. Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑3.F. Infotainment Display Screen.G. Infotainment on page 7‑2.H. Exterior Lamp Controls onpage 6‑2.Fog Lamps on page 6‑5(If Equipped).Instrument Panel IlluminationControl on page 6‑6.I. Front Storage on page 4‑2.J. Data Link Connector (DLC)(Out of View). See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 5‑16.K. Cruise Control on page 9‑40.L. Steering Wheel Adjustment onpage 5‑2.M. Horn on page 5‑3.N. Steering Wheel Controls onpage 5‑2(If Equipped).O. Ignition Positions (Key Access)on page 9‑16 or IgnitionPositions (Keyless Access) onpage 9‑18.P. Heated and Ventilated FrontSeats on page 3‑10(If Equipped).Q. Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8‑1(If Equipped).Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8‑4(If Equipped).R. Power Door Locks onpage 2‑11.Hazard Warning Flashers onpage 6‑4.Passenger Sensing System onpage 3‑27.S. Parking Brake on page 9‑34.T. Shift Lever Position Indicator.See Automatic Transmission onpage 9‑29.U. Shift Lever. See Shifting IntoPark on page 9‑25.V. Traction Control System (TCS)on page 9‑36.StabiliTrak®System onpage 9‑37 (If Equipped).Ultrasonic Parking Assist onpage 9‑42.Rear Window Sunshade onpage 2‑20 (If Equipped).
Black plate (4,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20121-4 In BriefInitial DriveInformationThis section provides a briefoverview about some of theimportant features that may or maynot be on your specific vehicle.For more detailed information, referto each of the features which can befound later in this owner manual.Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemThe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter will work up to 20 m(65 ft) away from the vehicle. Onvehicles with remote start thedistance will be greater.Press the button to extend the key.The key can be used for all locks.This key is also used for theignition, if the vehicle does not havepushbutton start.K:Press to unlock the driver dooror all doors.Q:Press to lock all doors.Lock and unlock feedback can bepersonalized.V:Press and hold to openthe trunk.7:Press and release one time tolocate the vehicle. Press and holdfor at least two seconds to soundthe panic alarm. Press again tocancel the panic alarm.See Keys on page 2‑2and RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2‑3.Remote Vehicle StartFor vehicles with this feature, theengine can be started from outsidethe vehicle.Starting the Vehicle1. Aim the RKE transmitter at thevehicle.2. Press and release Q.3. Immediately after completingStep 2, press and hold /untilthe turn signal lamps flash, or forabout two seconds if the vehicleis not in view.
Black plate (5,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012In Brief 1-5When the engine starts, the parkinglamps will turn on and remain on aslong as the engine is running. Thedoors will be locked and the climatecontrol system may come on.The engine will continue to run for10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a10-minute time extension. Remotestart can be extended only once.Canceling a Remote StartTo cancel a remote start, do one ofthe following:.Aim the RKE transmitter at thevehicle and press and hold /until the parking lamps turn off..Turn on the hazard warningflashers..Turn the vehicle on and then off.See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2‑8.Door LocksTo lock or unlock the doors:.From inside the vehicle, use thedoor lock knob or the powerdoor lock controls, pull once onthe door handle to unlock it, anda second time to open it..From outside, use the key,or press Qor Kon the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.See Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation onpage 2‑3.See Door Locks on page 2‑10.Power Door LocksK:Press to unlock the doors.Q:Press to lock the doors.See Power Door Locks onpage 2‑11.
Black plate (6,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20121-6 In BriefTrunk ReleaseThe trunk may be opened bypressing Von the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter orthe touch pad located on the rear ofthe trunk above the license plate.See Trunk on page 2‑12 for moreinformation.WindowsPress the switch to lower thewindow. Pull the switch up toraise it.For more information, see PowerWindows on page 2‑19.Seat AdjustmentManual SeatsA. Seatback Recline LeverB. Height Adjustment SwitchC. Seat Position HandleTo adjust the seat position:1. Pull the handle (C) under thefront of the seat cushion.2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release the handle.3. Try to move the seat back andforth to be sure it is locked inplace.Press and hold the top or bottom ofthe switch (B) to raise or lower theseat. Release the switch when thedesired height is reached.To raise or recline the seatback, usethe lever (A) on the outboard side ofthe seat.See Seat Adjustment on page 3‑4and Reclining Seatbacks onpage 3‑6for more information.
Black plate (7,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012In Brief 1-7Power SeatsTo adjust the seat:.Move the seat forward orrearward by moving thehorizontal control forward orrearward..Raise or lower the front or rearpart of the seat cushion bymoving the front or rear of thehorizontal control up or down..Raise or lower the entire seat bymoving the control up or down.See Power Seat Adjustment onpage 3‑5.Power Reclining SeatbacksTo raise or recline the seatback, tiltthe top of the vertical controlforward or rearward. See RecliningSeatbacks on page 3‑6.Lumbar AdjustmentTo adjust the lumbar support,if available:.Press and hold the front or rearof the control to increase ordecrease lumbar support..Press and hold the top or bottomof the control to raise or lowerlumbar support.See Lumbar Adjustment onpage 3‑5.
Black plate (8,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20121-8 In BriefMemory FeaturesOn vehicles with the memoryfeature, the “1”and “2”buttons onthe outboard side of the driver seatare used to manually save andrecall the driver seat and outsidemirror positions. These manuallystored positions are referred to asButton Memory positions.The vehicle will also automaticallysave driver seat and outside mirrorpositions to the current driverRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter when the ignition isplaced in OFF. These automaticallystored positions are referred to asRKE Memory positions.Storing Button Memory PositionsTo save positions into ButtonMemory:1. Adjust the driver seat, seatbackrecliner, and both outside mirrorsto the desired driving positions.2. Press and hold MEM (Memory)and “1”at the same time until abeep sounds.3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for asecond driver using “2.”To recall the manually savedButton Memory positions, press andhold “1”or “2.”The driver seat andoutside mirrors move to thepositions stored to those buttonswhen pressed. Releasing “1”or “2”before the stored positions arereached stops the recall.To automatically recall RKE Memorypositions, unlock the driver doorwith the RKE transmitter, and openthe driver door. On vehicles withKeyless Access, opening the driverdoor when an RKE transmitter ispresent will activate the RKEMemory recall. If the driver door isalready open, pressing the RKEtransmitter Kbutton will alsoactivate the RKE Memory recall.The driver seat and outside mirrorswill move to the previously savedRKE Memory positions.See Memory Seats on page 3‑7formore information.
Black plate (9,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012In Brief 1-9Easy Exit Driver SeatThis feature moves the seatrearward allowing the driver moreroom to exit the vehicle.To activate, place the ignition inOFF and open the driver door. If thedriver door is already open, placingthe ignition in OFF will activate theeasy exit driver seat.This feature is turned on or off usingthe vehicle personalization menu.See “Driver Seat Easy Exit”underVehicle Personalization onpage 5‑40 for more information.Heated and VentilatedSeatsHeated and Ventilated SeatButtons Shown, Heated SeatButtons SimilarIf available, the buttons are on theclimate control panel. To operate,the ignition must be on.Press Lto heat the seat cushionand seatback or {, if equipped, toventilate the seat.Press the button once for thehighest setting. With each press ofthe button, the seat will change tothe next lower setting, and then tothe off setting. The lights indicatethree for the highest setting andone for the lowest.For more information, see Heatedand Ventilated Front Seats onpage 3‑10.Head RestraintAdjustmentDo not drive until the head restraintsfor all occupants are installed andadjusted properly.To achieve a comfortable seatingposition, change the seatbackrecline angle as little as necessarywhile keeping the seat and the headrestraint height in the properposition.For more information see HeadRestraints on page 3‑2and SeatAdjustment on page 3‑4.
Black plate (10,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20121-10 In BriefSafety BeltsRefer to the following sections forimportant information on how to usesafety belts properly:.Safety Belts on page 3‑13..How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly on page 3‑14..Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3‑15..Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 3‑42.Passenger SensingSystemThe passenger sensing systemturns off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag undercertain conditions. No other airbagis affected by the passengersensing system.The passenger airbag statusindicator will be visible on theinstrument panel when the vehicle isstarted. See Passenger SensingSystem on page 3‑27 for importantinformation.Mirror AdjustmentExteriorTo adjust the mirrors:1. Turn the control knob to theL (left) or R (right) selecting thedriver or passenger mirror.2. Push the control knob to the left,right, up, or down to adjust themirror.
Black plate (11,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012In Brief 1-11Vehicles with the memory featurecan store a preferred mirror position.See “Memory Seats”under PowerSeat Adjustment on page 3‑5formore information.See Power Mirrors on page 2‑16.Manual Foldaway MirrorsThese mirrors can be folded inwardto prevent damage when goingthrough an automatic car wash.To fold, pull the mirror toward thevehicle. Push the mirror outward toreturn it to the original position.See Folding Mirrors on page 2‑16.Automatic Dimming FeatureThe vehicle may have an automaticdimming driver outside mirror.Automatic dimming reduces theglare of the headlamps behind you.See Power Mirrors on page 2‑16.InteriorAdjust this mirror for a clear view ofthe area behind the vehicle. Holdthe mirror in the center to move itup, down, or side to side. To reduceheadlamp glare from behind, pushthe tab forward for daytime and pullit for nighttime use.Vehicles with OnStar®have threecontrol buttons at the bottom of themirror. See your dealer for moreinformation on the system and howto subscribe to OnStar. See OnStarOverview on page 14‑1.See Manual Rearview Mirror onpage 2‑17.Steering WheelAdjustmentTo adjust the steering wheel:1. Pull the lever (A) down.2. Move the steering wheel upor down.3. Pull or push the steering wheelcloser or away from you.4. Pull the lever (A) up to lock thesteering wheel in place.Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.
Black plate (12,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20121-12 In BriefInterior LightingDome LampsThe interior lamps control located inthe overhead console controls boththe front and rear interior lamps.(:Turns the lamps off.H:Turns the lamps on when anydoor is opened.':Keeps the lamps on allthe time.Reading LampsThere are front and rear readinglamps.The front reading lamps are locatedin the overhead console.#or $:Press to turn each lampon or off.The rear reading lamps are locatedin the headliner.For more information, see:.Instrument Panel IlluminationControl on page 6‑6..Dome Lamps on page 6‑6.Exterior LightingThe exterior lamp control is locatedon the instrument panel on theoutboard side of the steering wheel.
Black plate (13,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012In Brief 1-13Turn the control to the followingpositions:O:Turns off the exterior lamps.The knob returns to the AUTOposition after it is released. Turn tooff again to reactivate theAUTO mode.AUTO: Automatically turns theexterior lamps on and off,depending on outside lighting.;:Turns on the parking lamps,together with the sidemarker lamps,taillamps, license plate lamps, andinstrument panel lights.2:Turns on the headlamps,together with the parking lamps,sidemarker lamps, taillamps,license plate lamps, and instrumentpanel lights.For more information, see:.Exterior Lamp Controls onpage 6‑2..Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)on page 6‑3..Fog Lamps on page 6‑5.Windshield Wiper/WasherThe windshield wiper lever is on theright side of the steering column.With the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, movethe windshield wiper lever toselect the wiper speed.2: Use for fast wipes.1: Use for slow wipes.3:Turn the band up for morefrequent wipes or down for lessfrequent wipes.9:Use to turn the windshieldwipers off.3:Briefly move the wiper leverdown for a single wipe or hold downfor several wipes.Windshield WasherPull the windshield wiper lever tospray windshield washer fluid andactivate the wipers.See Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑3.
Black plate (14,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20121-14 In BriefClimate ControlsThe heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled withthese systems.Automatic Climate Control SystemA. PowerB. Temperature ControlC. Fan ControlD. Air Delivery Mode ControlE. RecirculationF. AUTO (Automatic Operation)G. DefrostH. Air ConditioningI. Rear Window Defogger
Black plate (15,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012In Brief 1-15Dual Automatic Climate Control System for Non‐eAssist VehiclesA. PowerB. Driver Temperature ControlC. DefrostD. Fan ControlE. Air Delivery Mode ControlF. Recirculation/AutomaticRecirculationG. Passenger Temperature ControlH. AUTO (Automatic Operation)I. Rear Window DefoggerJ. Heated Steering WheelK. Air ConditioningL. ZONE
Black plate (16,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20121-16 In BriefDual Automatic Climate Control System for eAssist VehiclesA. PowerB. Driver Temperature ControlC. DefrostD. Fan ControlE. Air Delivery Mode ControlF. Recirculation/AutomaticRecirculationG. Passenger Temperature ControlH. AUTO (Automatic Operation)I. Rear Window DefoggerJ. Eco Air ConditioningK. Comfort Air ConditioningL. ZONESee Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8‑1(If Equipped) orDual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8‑4(If Equipped).TransmissionAutomatic TransmissionDriver Shift Control (DSC)Driver Shift Control (DSC) allowsshifting an automatic transmissionsimilar to a manual transmission.DSC can be enabled through theshift lever. See Manual Mode onpage 9‑31.
Black plate (17,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012In Brief 1-17Vehicle FeaturesRadio(s)VOL/O:Press to turn the systemon and off. Turn to increase ordecrease the volume.SOURCE: Press to choosebetween FM, AM, or XM™,if equipped.Menu Knob: Turn to select radiostations.g:Press to seek the previousstation or track.l:Press to seek the next stationor track.Buttons 1‐6: Press to save andselect favorite stations.INFO: Press to show availableinformation about the current stationor track.See Overview (Radio with CD) onpage 7‑4or Overview (Radio withCD/DVD and MEM) on page 7‑6orOverview (Radio with CD andTouchscreen) on page 7‑8for moreinformation about these and otherradio features.Storing a Favorite StationStations from all bands can bestored in the favorite lists in anyorder. Up to six stations can bestored in each favorite page and thenumber of available favorite pagescan be set.To store the station to a position inthe list, press the correspondingnumeric button 1 to 6 until a beepis heard.See “Storing a Station as aFavorite”in AM-FM Radio (Radiowith CD/DVD/MEM) on page 7‑17 orAM-FM Radio (Radio with CD andTouchscreen) on page 7‑19Setting the ClockAdjusting the Time1. Press the CONFIG button andselect Time and Date.2. Press + or ‐to increase ordecrease hour and minute.3. To save the time and return tothe Time Settings menu, pressthe /BACK button at any timeor press SELECT after adjustingthe minutes.Setting the 12/24 Hour Format1. Press the CONFIG button andselect Time and Date.2. Press the 12/24 Hour button.See Clock (With Date Display) onpage 5‑5or Clock (Without DateDisplay) on page 5‑6or Clock(Color Radio) on page 5‑6
Black plate (18,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20121-18 In BriefSatellite RadioVehicles with an XM™satellite radiotuner and a valid XM satellite radiosubscription can receive XMprogramming.XM Satellite Radio ServiceXM is a satellite radio service basedin the 48 contiguous United Statesand 10 Canadian provinces. XMsatellite radio has a wide variety ofprogramming and commercial-freemusic, coast to coast, and indigital-quality sound. A fee isrequired to receive the XM service.For more information refer to:.www.xmradio.com or call1-800-929-2100 (U.S.)..www.xmradio.ca or call1-877-438-9677 (Canada).For more information, see SatelliteRadio on page 7‑23.Portable Audio DevicesSome vehicles have a 3.5 mm(1/8 in) auxiliary input and aUSB port located in the centerconsole. External devices suchas iPods®, laptop computers,MP3 players, CD changers, andUSB storage devices may beconnected, depending on theaudio system.For more information, see AuxiliaryDevices (Radio with CD) onpage 7‑38 or Auxiliary Devices(Radio with CD/DVD and MEM) onpage 7‑41 or Auxiliary Devices(Radio with CD and Touchscreen)on page 7‑44.Bluetooth®The Bluetooth system allows userswith a Bluetooth-enabled cell phoneto make and receive hands-freecalls using the vehicle audiosystem, microphone, and controls.The Bluetooth-enabled cell phonemust be paired with the in-vehicleBluetooth system before it can beused in the vehicle. Not all phoneswill support all functions.See Bluetooth (Overview) onpage 7‑57 or Bluetooth(Infotainment Controls) onpage 7‑59 or Bluetooth (VoiceRecognition) on page 7‑64 orBluetooth (UHP Mexico Only) onpage 7‑70.
Black plate (19,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012In Brief 1-19Steering Wheel ControlsFor vehicles with audio steeringwheel controls, some audio controlscan be adjusted at the steeringwheel.b/g:Press to interact with theavailable Bluetooth, OnStar,or navigation system.$/i:Press to silence thevehicle speakers only. Press againto turn the sound on. For vehicleswith OnStar or Bluetooth systems,press to reject an incoming call,or to end a current call._SRC ^:Turn _or ^to select aradio band or audio source.Turn _or ^to select the next orprevious favorite radio station, CD,or MP3 track.Press SRC to change betweenradio and CD or DVD.+x−:Press + to increase or −todecrease the volume.For more information, see SteeringWheel Controls on page 5‑2.Cruise Control5:Press to turn the cruise controlsystem on and off.*:Press to disengage cruisecontrol without erasing the setspeed from memory.
Black plate (20,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20121-20 In BriefRES/+: Move the thumbwheel up tomake the vehicle resume to apreviously set speed or toaccelerate.SET/−:Move the thumbwheeldown toward SET/- to set a speedand activate cruise control, or tomake the vehicle decelerate.See Cruise Control on page 9‑40.Navigation SystemIf the vehicle has a navigationsystem, there is a separatenavigation system manual thatincludes information on theradio, audio players, andnavigation system.The navigation system providesdetailed maps of most majorfreeways and roads. After adestination has been set, thesystem provides turn-by-turninstructions for reaching thedestination. In addition, the systemcan help locate a variety of points ofinterest (POIs), such as banks,airports, restaurants, and more.See the navigation system manualfor more information.Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The DIC display is located in thecenter of the instrument panelcluster. It shows the status of manyvehicle systems. The controls forthe DIC are located on the turnsignal lever.A. SET/CLR: Press to set orclear the menu item when it isdisplayed.B. w x:Use the thumbwheel toscroll through the items ineach menu.C. MENU: Press to display theTrip/Fuel menu and the VehicleInformation menu. This button isalso used to return to or exit thelast screen displayed onthe DIC.For more information, see DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑25.
Black plate (21,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012In Brief 1-21Vehicle PersonalizationSome vehicle features can beprogrammed by using the audiosystem controls. These featuresinclude:.Climate and Air Quality.Comfort and Convenience.Collision/Detection Systems.Language.Lighting.Power Door Locks.Remote Lock/Unlock.Return to Factory SettingsSee Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑40.Ultrasonic Parking AssistIf available, Ultrasonic Rear ParkingAssist (URPA) uses sensors on therear bumper to detect objects whileparking the vehicle. It operates atspeeds less than 8 km/h (5 mph).URPA uses audible beeps toprovide distance and systeminformation.Keep the sensors on the vehicle'srear bumper clean to ensure properoperation.See Ultrasonic Parking Assist onpage 9‑42 for more information.Power OutletsThe accessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone or MP3 player.There are two accessory poweroutlets. One is located under thearmrest inside the center consolestorage and the other is on the rearof the center floor console.Remove the cover to access andreplace when not in use.See Power Outlets on page 5‑6.Universal Remote SystemThis system provides a way toreplace up to three remote controltransmitters used to activatedevices such as garage dooropeners, security systems, andhome automation devices.Read the instructions completelybefore attempting to program theUniversal Remote System. Becauseof the steps involved, it may behelpful to have another personavailable to assist you withprogramming the Universal RemoteSystem.See Universal Remote System onpage 5‑46.
Black plate (22,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20121-22 In BriefSunroofOn vehicles with a sunroof, theswitches are located on theoverhead console.The ignition must be in ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY, or in RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). SeeRetained Accessory Power (RAP)on page 9‑25.Vent: Press the rear of theswitch (B) to the first detent to ventthe sunroof. Press the front of theswitch (A) to the second detent toclose the sunroof.Express-open/Express-close:To express-open the sunroof, fullypress and release the rear of theswitch (B). To express-close, fullypress and release the front of theswitch (A). To stop the sunroofpartway, press either switch asecond time.The sunshade opens automaticallywith the sunroof.To express-open the sunshade, fullypress and release the rear of theswitch (C). To stop the sunshadepartway, press the switch a secondtime. To express-close, fully pressand release the front of theswitch (D). To stop the sunshadepartway, press the switch asecond time.See Sunroof on page 2‑21.eAssist FeatureseAssist®OverviewIf the vehicle has eAssist, there areseveral additional features whichcontribute to increased efficiency.Vehicles with eAssist have anautomatic engine start/stop feature.This feature saves fuel by shuttingthe engine off when the vehicle isstopped. When the engine shuts offautomatically, all the accessorieswill continue to operate normally.In very hot or cold conditions,the engine will only shut offautomatically part of the time. SeeStarting the Engine on page 9‑20.There are two air conditioningsettings available. The comfortsetting maximizes cabin comfort.The eco setting maximizes theefficiency allowing more frequent,and longer engine stops than thecomfort setting. See Dual AutomaticClimate Control System onpage 8‑4.
Black plate (23,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012In Brief 1-23This vehicle has a Hill Start Assist(HSA) feature, which may be usefulwhen the vehicle is stopped on agrade. See Hill Start Assist (HSA)on page 9‑36.Vehicles with eAssist have a slightlydifferent instrument cluster, whichincludes an efficiency gauge, andan AUTO STOP indicator on thetachometer. See Instrument Clusteron page 5‑9. There is also aPower Flow Gauge in the DriverInformation Center (DIC). SeeDriver Information Center (DIC) onpage 5‑25.The eAssist system uses a highvoltage battery, which is cooled withair drawn from the vehicle interior.The cold air intake for the battery islocated behind the rear seat, on thefiller panel. Do not cover the intake.See Battery on page 10‑25.High Voltage SafetyInformationeAssist vehicles have a standard12-volt battery and a high voltagebattery. Only a trained servicetechnician with the properknowledge and tools should inspect,test, or replace the high voltagebattery. See your dealer if the highvoltage battery needs service.The negative 12-volt battery cableand the high voltage cable in theengine compartment are clearlylabeled. In emergency situations,first responders can cut thosecables to disable the high voltagebattery system.Driver Efficiency GaugeThis gauge assists the driver inoperating the vehicle moreefficiently and will vary based ondriver input.See Driver Efficiency Gauge onpage 5‑12 for more information.
Black plate (24,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20121-24 In BriefAutomatic Engine Start/Stop FeatureVehicles with eAssist have anautomatic engine start/stop feature.After the engine is started and hasreached operating temperature, theauto stop feature may cause theengine to turn off when the brakepedal is applied and the vehiclecomes to a complete stop. Whenthe brake pedal is released, or theaccelerator pedal is applied, theengine will restart. The engine willcontinue to run until the nextauto stop.To restart the engine during the autostop, release the brake pedal orpress the accelerator pedal. Theengine starts immediately. Thevehicle continues to run until thenext stop.AUTO STOP on the tachometersignifies that the engine is in autostop mode. See Tachometer onpage 5‑11 for more information.A chime will sound when the driverdoor is opened while in auto stopmode. Remember to shift to P (Park)and turn the ignition to LOCK/OFFbefore exiting the vehicle.See Starting the Engine onpage 9‑20.Regenerative BrakingRegenerative braking takes some ofthe energy from the moving vehicleand turns it into electrical energy.This energy is then stored in thevehicle's high voltage batterysystem, contributing to increasedfuel efficiency.The system works whenever theaccelerator pedal is released, andincreases the energy captured asmore brake pedal is applied.BatteryeAssist vehicles have a standard12-volt battery and a high voltagebattery. When a new standard12-volt battery is needed, see yourdealer for one that has thereplacement number shown on theoriginal battery's label. Only atrained service technician with theproper knowledge and tools shouldinspect, test, or replace the highvoltage battery. See your dealer ifthe high voltage battery needsservice. See Battery on page 10‑25.
Black plate (25,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012In Brief 1-25ServiceNever try to do your own service oneAssist components. You can beinjured and the vehicle can bedamaged if you try to do your ownservice work. Service and repair ofthese high voltage componentsshould only be performed by atrained service technician with theproper knowledge and tools. SeeDoing Your Own Service Work onpage 10‑4.Performance andMaintenanceTraction ControlSystem (TCS)The traction control system limitswheel spin. The system turns onautomatically every time the vehicleis started..To turn off traction control,press and release the TractionControl System (TCS)/StabiliTrak button located on theconsole to the right of the shiftlever. iilluminates and theappropriate DIC message isdisplayed. See Ride ControlSystem Messages on page 5‑37..Press and release the TCS/StabiliTrak button again to turnon traction control.For more information, see TractionControl System (TCS) onpage 9‑36.StabiliTrak®SystemThe StabliTrak system assists withdirectional control of the vehicle indifficult driving conditions. Thesystem turns on automatically everytime the vehicle is started..To turn off both TCS andStabiliTrak, press and hold theTCS/StabiliTrak button, locatedon the console to the right ofthe shift lever, until iand gilluminate and the appropriateDIC message is displayed. SeeRide Control System Messageson page 5‑37..Press and release the TCS/StabiliTrak button to turn on bothsystems.For more information, seeStabiliTrak®System on page 9‑37.
Black plate (26,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20121-26 In BriefTire Pressure MonitorThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).The TPMS warning light alerts youto a significant loss in pressure ofone of the vehicle's tires. If thewarning light comes on, stop assoon as possible and inflate thetires to the recommended pressureshown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑10. The warninglight will remain on until the tirepressure is corrected.During cooler conditions, the low tirepressure warning light may appearwhen the vehicle is first started andthen turn off. This may be an earlyindicator that the tire pressures aregetting low and the tires need to beinflated to the proper pressure.The TPMS does not replace normalmonthly tire maintenance. It is thedriver’s responsibility to maintaincorrect tire pressures.See Tire Pressure Monitor Systemon page 10‑53.Tire Sealant andCompressor KitThis vehicle may come with a sparetire and tire changing equipment ora tire sealant and compressor kit.The kit can be used to temporarilyseal small punctures in the treadarea of the tire.See Tire Sealant and CompressorKit (With Pressure Relief Button) onpage 10‑67 or Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit (With PressureDeflation Button) on page 10‑74 forcomplete operating information.If the vehicle came with a spare tireand tire changing equipment, seeIf a Tire Goes Flat on page 10‑64.Engine Oil Life SystemThe engine oil life system calculatesengine oil life based on vehicle useand displays the CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message when it is timeto change the engine oil and filter.The oil life system should be resetto 100% only following an oilchange.Resetting the Oil Life System1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN withthe engine off.2. Press the DIC MENU button onthe turn signal lever to enter theVehicle Information Menu. Usethe thumbwheel to scroll throughthe menu items until you reachREMAINING OIL LIFE.3. Press the SET/CLR button toreset the oil life at 100%.4. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑12.
Black plate (27,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012In Brief 1-27Driving for Better FuelEconomyDriving habits can affect fuelmileage. Here are some driving tipsto get the best fuel economypossible..Avoid fast starts and acceleratesmoothly..Brake gradually and avoidabrupt stops..Avoid idling the engine for longperiods of time..When road and weatherconditions are appropriate, usecruise control..Always follow posted speedlimits or drive more slowly whenconditions require..Keep vehicle tires properlyinflated..Combine several trips into asingle trip..Replace the vehicle's tires withthe same TPC Spec numbermolded into the tire's sidewallnear the size..Follow recommended scheduledmaintenance.Roadside AssistanceProgramU.S.: 1-800-252-1112TTY Users (U.S.): 1-888-889-2438Canada: 1-800-268-6800Mexico: 01-800-466-0818As the owner of a new Buick, youare automatically enrolled in theRoadside Assistance program.See Roadside Assistance Program(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑7orRoadside Assistance Program(Mexico) on page 13‑9for moreinformation.
Black plate (28,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20121-28 In BriefRoadside Service and OnStar(U.S. and Canada)If you have an active OnStarsubscription, press the Qbuttonand the current GPS location will besent to an OnStar Advisor who willassess your problem, contactRoadside Assistance, and relayyour exact location to get thehelp you need.Online Owner Center(U.S. and Canada)The Online Owner Center is acomplimentary service that includesonline service reminders, vehiclemaintenance tips, online ownermanual, special privileges,and more.Sign up today at:www.buickownercenter.com(U.S.) or www.gm.ca (Canada).OnStar®If equipped, this vehicle has acomprehensive, in-vehicle systemthat can connect to a live Advisorfor Emergency, Security, Navigation,Connection, and DiagnosticServices. See OnStar Overview onpage 14‑1for more information.
Black plate (1,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1Keys, Doors, andWindowsKeys and LocksKeys .......................... 2-2Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-8Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11DoorsTrunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Vehicle SecurityVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Anti-theft Alarm System . . . . . . 2-13Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Immobilizer Operation(Key Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Immobilizer Operation(Keyless Access) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Exterior MirrorsConvex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Park Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Interior MirrorsManual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-17Automatic DimmingRearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18WindowsWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20Rear Window Sunshade . . . . . 2-20RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Black plate (2,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20122-2 Keys, Doors, and WindowsKeys and LocksKeys{WARNINGLeaving children in a vehicle withthe ignition key is dangerous formany reasons. Children or otherscould be badly injured or evenkilled. They could operate thepower windows or other controlsor even make the vehicle move.The windows will function with thekeys in the ignition and childrencould be seriously injured or killedif caught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave the keys ina vehicle with children.{WARNINGLeaving children in a vehicle withthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter is dangerous for manyreasons; children or others couldbe badly injured or even killed.They could operate the powerwindows or other controls or evenmake the vehicle move. Thewindows will function with theRKE transmitter in the vehicleand they could be seriouslyinjured or killed if caught in thepath of a closing window. Do notleave the RKE transmitter in avehicle with children.The key that is part of the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter canbe used for the ignition and all locksif the vehicle is a key accessvehicle. If the vehicle has thekeyless ignition, the key can beused for the locks.
Black plate (3,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-3Press the button on the RKEtransmitter to extend the key. Pressthe button and the key blade toretract the key.See your dealer if a new key isneeded.Notice: If the keys get locked inthe vehicle, it may have to bedamaged to get them out. Alwayscarry a spare key.If locked out of the vehicle, seeRoadside Assistance Program (U.S.and Canada) on page 13‑7orRoadside Assistance Program(Mexico) on page 13‑9.With an active OnStar subscription,an OnStar Advisor may remotelyunlock the vehicle. See OnStarOverview on page 14‑1.Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑20 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.If there is a decrease in the RKEoperating range:.Check the distance. Thetransmitter may be too far fromthe vehicle..Check the location. Othervehicles or objects may beblocking the signal..Check the transmitter's battery.See “Battery Replacement”laterin this section..If the transmitter is still notworking correctly, see yourdealer or a qualified technicianfor service.Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System OperationThe transmitter functions will workup to 20 m (65 ft) away from thevehicle. On vehicles with remotestart the distance will be greater.Keep in mind that other conditions,such as those previously stated, canimpact the performance of thetransmitter.
Black plate (4,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20122-4 Keys, Doors, and WindowsRKE without Remote Start ShownQ(Lock): Press to lock all doors.The turn signal indicators may flashand/or the horn may sound toindicate locking, see “LockingFeedback”under VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑40.If the driver door is open when Qispressed, all doors lock except thedriver door, if enabled through thevehicle personalization.If the passenger door is open whenQis pressed, all doors lock.Pressing Qmay also arm thetheft-deterrent system. SeeAnti-theft Alarm System onpage 2‑13.K(Unlock): Press to unlock thedriver door or all doors. See “DoorUnlock Options”under VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑40.The turn signal indicators may flashand/or the horn may sound toindicate unlocking. See “UnlockFeedback”under VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑40.Pressing Kwill disarm thetheft-deterrent system. SeeAnti-theft Alarm System onpage 2‑13.Memory seat positions may berecalled when unlocking the vehicle.See “Memory Seats”under PowerSeat Adjustment on page 3‑5and“Remote Recall”under VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑40 formore information.V(Remote Trunk Release):Press and hold to unlock the trunk.7(Vehicle Locator/PanicAlarm): Press and releaseone time to locate the vehicle.The exterior lamps flash and thehorn chirps.Press and hold 7for at leasttwo seconds to sound the panicalarm. The horn sounds and theturn signals flash until 7is pressedagain or the vehicle is started./(Remote Vehicle Start): Forvehicles with this feature, press Qand then press and hold /withinfive seconds to start the engine fromoutside the vehicle using the RKEtransmitter. See Remote VehicleStart on page 2‑8for additionalinformation.The buttons on the keys aredisabled when there is a key is inthe ignition, if equipped.
Black plate (5,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-5Keyless Access OperationSome vehicles have a keylessaccess system that lets you lockand unlock the doors and accessthe trunk without removing the RKEtransmitter from your pocket, purse,briefcase, etc. The RKE transmittershould be within 1 m (3 ft) of thedoor or trunk being opened.Keyless UnlockingWith the RKE transmitter within1 m (3 ft), approach the front doorand pull the handle to unlock andopen the door. If the transmitter isrecognized, the door will unlockand open.Entering any door other than thedriver door will always cause all ofthe doors to unlock. This is notcustomizable.To customize which doors unlockwhen the driver door is opened, see“Door Unlock Options”underVehicle Personalization onpage 5‑40.Lock SensorWhen all doors are closed and theignition is off, the vehicle can belocked by pressing this area on thedoor handle. This feature will beavailable for several minutes afterthe vehicle has been turned off.Keyless Trunk OpeningLift up on the touch pad locatedabove the license plate to openthe trunk if the RKE transmitter iswithin range.Programming Transmitters tothe VehicleOnly RKE transmitters programmedto the vehicle will work. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchased andprogrammed through your dealer.The vehicle can be reprogrammedso that lost or stolen transmittersno longer work. Any remainingtransmitters will need to bereprogrammed. Each vehiclecan have up to five transmittersmatched to it.
Black plate (6,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20122-6 Keys, Doors, and WindowsProgramming with a RecognizedTransmitter (Keyless AccessVehicles Only)A new transmitter can beprogrammed to the vehicle whenthere is one recognized transmitter.To program, the vehicle must be offand all of the transmitters, bothcurrently recognized and new, mustbe with you.1. Place the recognizedtransmitter(s) in the cupholder.2. Insert the vehicle key of thenew transmitter into the key lockcylinder located on the outsideof the driver door and turnthe key to the unlock positionfive times within 10 seconds.The Driver Information Center(DIC) displays READY FORREMOTE #2, 3, 4 or 5.3. Place the new transmitter intothe transmitter pocket. Thetransmitter pocket is locatedinside the center consolestorage area under thecupholder. The cupholder willneed to be pulled out to accessthe transmitter pocket.4. Press the ignition. When thetransmitter is learned, the DICwill show that it is ready toprogram the next transmitter.5. Remove the transmitter from thetransmitter pocket and press K.To program additionaltransmitters, repeat Steps 3through 5.When all additional transmittersare programmed, press and holdthe ignition for 10 seconds toexit programming mode.Programming without aRecognized Transmitter(Keyless Access Vehicles Only)If there are no currently recognizedtransmitters available, follow thisprocedure to program up to fivetransmitters. This feature is notavailable in Canada. This procedurewill take approximately 30 minutesto complete. The vehicle must be offand all of the transmitters you wishto program must be with you.1. Insert the vehicle key of thetransmitter into the key lockcylinder located on the outsideof the driver door and turnthe key to the unlock positionfive times within 10 seconds.The Driver InformationCenter (DIC) displaysREMOTE LEARN PENDING,PLEASE WAIT.
Black plate (7,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-72. Wait for 10 minutes until theDIC displays PRESS ENGINESTART BUTTON TO LEARNand then press the ignition.The DIC displays will againshow REMOTE LEARNPENDING, PLEASE WAIT.3. Repeat Step 2 two additionaltimes. After the third time, allpreviously known transmitterswill no longer work with thevehicle. Remaining transmitterscan be relearned during thenext steps.The DIC display shouldnow show READY FORREMOTE # 1.4. Place the new transmitter intothe transmitter pocket. Thetransmitter pocket is locatedinside the center consolestorage area under thecupholder. The cupholder willneed to be pulled out to accessthe transmitter pocket.5. Press the ignition. When thetransmitter is learned theDIC will show that it is ready toprogram the next transmitter.6. Remove the transmitter from thetransmitter pocket and press K.To program additionaltransmitters, repeat Steps 4through 6.When all additional transmittersare programmed, press and holdthe ignition for 10 seconds toexit programming mode.Starting the Vehicle with a LowTransmitter BatteryIf the transmitter battery is weak, theDIC may display NO REMOTEDETECTED when you try to startthe vehicle. The REPLACEBATTERY IN REMOTE KEYmessage may also be displayedat this time.To start the vehicle:1. Remove the cupholder from thecenter console storage area.2. Place the transmitter in thetransmitter pocket with thebuttons facing up.3. With the vehicle in P (Park) orN (Neutral), press the brakepedal and the START/STOPbutton. See Starting the Engineon page 9‑20 for additionalinformation about thevehicle's keyless ignitionwith pushbutton start.Replace the transmitter batteryas soon as possible.
Black plate (8,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20122-8 Keys, Doors, and WindowsBattery ReplacementReplace the battery if the REPLACEBATTERY IN REMOTE KEYmessage displays in the DIC.See “REPLACE BATTERY INREMOTE KEY”under Key and LockMessages on page 5‑36.The battery is not rechargeable.To replace the battery:1. Push the button on thetransmitter to extend the key.2. Remove the battery cover byprying it with a finger.3. Remove the battery by pushingon the battery and sliding ittoward the key blade.4. Insert the new battery, positiveside facing up. Push the batterydown until it is held in place.Replace with a CR2032 orequivalent battery.5. Snap the battery cover back onto the transmitter.Remote Vehicle StartIf available, this feature allows theengine to be started from outsidethe vehicle.The /button will be on theRKE transmitter if the vehicle hasremote start.Laws in some local communitiesmay restrict the use of remotestarters. For example, some lawsmay require a person using remotestart to have the vehicle in view.Check local regulations for anyrequirements.Starting the Engine UsingRemote StartTo start the engine using the remotestart feature:1. Aim the Remote Keyless Entrytransmitter at the vehicle.2. Press and release Q.3. Immediately after completingStep 2, press and hold /untilthe turn signal lamps flash, or forabout two seconds if the vehicleis not in view.When the vehicle starts, theparking lamps will turn on andremain on as long as the engineis running. The doors will belocked and the climate controlsystem may come on.Turn the ignition to ON/RUN(key access), or select the ON/RUN/START ignition position (keylessaccess), to drive the vehicle.The engine will shut off after10 minutes unless a time extensionis done or the ignition is put in ON/RUN (key access) or ON/RUN/START (keyless access).When the vehicle is startedremotely, the climate control systemwill use the last setting before thevehicle was shut off. See “RemoteStart Climate Control Opertation”inAutomatic Climate Control Systemon page 8‑1or Dual Automatic
Black plate (9,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-9Climate Control System onpage 8‑4. Vehicles with heated orheated and ventilated front seatscan have this feature turn onautomatically during a remote start.See “Remote Start Heated Seats”and “Remote Start Cooled Seats”under Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑40 for more information.Extending Engine Run TimeFor a 10-minute extension, repeatSteps 1 and 2 while the engine isstill running. The remote start canonly be extended once.When the remote start is extended,the second 10 minutes will startimmediately.For example, if the vehicle hasbeen running for five minutes, and10 minutes are added, the enginewill run for a total of 15 minutes.A maximum of two remote starts orremote start attempts are allowedbetween ignition cycles.The vehicle's ignition must beturned on and then back off beforethe remote start procedure can beused again.Canceling a Remote StartTo cancel a remote start, do any ofthe following:.Aim the RKE transmitter at thevehicle and press and hold /until the parking lamps turn off..Turn on the hazard warningflashers..Turn the vehicle on and then off.Conditions in Which Remote StartWill Not WorkThe remote start will not operate if:.The key is in the ignition (keyaccess) or the ignition is in anyposition other than OFF (keylessaccess)..The transmitter is in the vehicle(keyless access)..The hood is not closed..The hazard warning flashersare on..There is an emission controlsystem malfunction..The engine coolant temperatureis too high..The oil pressure is low..Two remote vehicle starts havealready been used..The vehicle is not in P (Park).
Black plate (10,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20122-10 Keys, Doors, and WindowsDoor Locks{WARNINGUnlocked doors can bedangerous..Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily open thedoors and fall out of a movingvehicle. The chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in acrash is increased if thedoors are not locked. So, allpassengers should wearsafety belts properly and thedoors should be lockedwhenever the vehicle isdriven.(Continued)WARNING (Continued).Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A child canbe overcome by extreme heatand can suffer permanentinjuries or even death fromheat stroke. Always lock thevehicle whenever leaving it..Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen slowing or stopping thevehicle. Lock the doors tohelp prevent this fromhappening.To lock and unlock the doors fromthe outside, use the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter orthe key.To lock the doors from inside, usethe power door lock switch or doorlock knob. To unlock the doors, usethe power door lock switch or pullonce on the door handle to unlock it,and a second time to open it.Manually locking the driver dooralso automatically locks allother doors.For more information see:.Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2‑3..Power Door Locks on page 2‑11..Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑40.
Black plate (11,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-11Power Door LocksK(Unlock): Press to unlock alldoors.Q(Lock): Press to lock all doors.See “Power Door Locks”in VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑40.Delayed LockingWhen locking the doors with thepower lock switch and a door isopen, the doors will lockfive seconds after the last door isclosed. You will hear three chimesto signal that the delayed lockingfeature is in use.Pressing the power lock switchtwice or the lock button on the RKEtransmitter twice will override thedelayed locking feature andimmediately lock all the doors.This feature will not operate if thekey is in the ignition.This feature can be programmed byusing the Driver Information Center(DIC). See “Delayed Door Lock”under Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑40.Safety LocksPress o{to activate the safetylocks on the rear doors. TheLED (A) comes on when activated.The rear door power windows arealso disabled.Press o{again to deactivate thelockout switch.If the light flashes, the feature maynot be working properly.
Black plate (12,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20122-12 Keys, Doors, and WindowsDoorsTrunk{WARNINGExhaust gases can enter thevehicle if it is driven with theliftgate, trunk/hatch open, or withany objects that pass through theseal between the body and thetrunk/hatch or liftgate. Engineexhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.If the vehicle must be driven withthe liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:.Close all of the windows..Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.(Continued)WARNING (Continued).Adjust the Climate Controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside air andset the fan speed to thehighest setting. See “ClimateControl Systems”in theIndex..If the vehicle has a powerliftgate, disable the powerliftgate function.For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑28.Remote Trunk ReleaseTo open the trunk from outside thevehicle, press Von the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter,or press the touch pad above thelicense plate.
Black plate (13,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-13Emergency Trunk ReleaseHandleNotice: Do not use theemergency trunk release handleas a tie-down or anchor pointwhen securing items in the trunkas it could damage the handle.The emergency trunk releasehandle is only intended to aid aperson trapped in a latched trunk,enabling them to open the trunkfrom the inside.There is an emergency trunkrelease handle located inside thetrunk on the trunk latch. On somevehicles, the release handle can beaccessed by folding the rear seatcenter seatback. See Rear Seats onpage 3‑11. Pull the release handleto open the trunk from the inside.Vehicle SecurityThis vehicle has theft-deterrentfeatures; however, they do not makeit impossible to steal.Anti-theft Alarm SystemThis vehicle has an anti-theft alarmsystem.Arming the SystemTo arm the system, press Qon theRKE transmitter.The alarm automatically arms afterabout 30 seconds. The securitylight, located on the instrumentpanel, flashes.Press Von the RKE transmitter toopen the trunk without setting off thealarm. The system rearms when thetrunk is closed.
Black plate (14,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20122-14 Keys, Doors, and WindowsDisarming the SystemTo disarm the system, do one of thefollowing:.Press Kon the RKE transmitter..Approach the vehicle with theRKE transmitter (keylessaccess)..Start the engine.The alarm automatically disarms.How to Detect a TamperConditionIf Kis pressed and the hornsounds, an attempted break-in hasoccurred while the system wasarmed.If the alarm has been activated, theTHEFT ATTEMPTED message willappear on the DIC. See Anti-theftAlarm System Messages onpage 5‑38 for additional information.ImmobilizerSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑20 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.Immobilizer Operation(Key Access)This vehicle has a passivetheft-deterrent system.The system does not have to bemanually armed or disarmed.The vehicle is automaticallyimmobilized when the key isremoved from the ignition.The system is automaticallydisarmed when the vehicle isstarted with the correct key. The keyuses a transponder that matches animmobilizer control unit in thevehicle and automatically disarmsthe system. Only the correct keystarts the vehicle. The vehicle maynot start if the key is damaged.The security light, located in theinstrument panel cluster, comes onif there is a problem with arming ordisarming the theft-deterrentsystem.When trying to start the vehicle, thesecurity light comes on briefly whenthe ignition is turned on.If the engine does not start and thesecurity light stays on, there is aproblem with the system. Turn theignition off and try again.If the engine still does not start, andthe key appears to be undamagedor the light continues to stay on, tryanother ignition key.
Black plate (15,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-15If the engine still does not start withthe other key, the vehicle needsservice. If the vehicle does start, thefirst key may be damaged. See yourdealer who can service thetheft-deterrent system and have anew key made.Do not leave the key or device thatdisarms or deactivates thetheft-deterrent system in the vehicle.Immobilizer Operation(Keyless Access)This vehicle has a passivetheft-deterrent system.The system does not have to bemanually armed or disarmed.The vehicle is automaticallyimmobilized when the transmitterleaves the vehicle.The immobilization system isdisarmed when the ignition button ispushed in and a valid transmitter isfound in the vehicle.The security light, located in theinstrument panel cluster, comes onif there is a problem with arming ordisarming the theft-deterrentsystem.The system has one or moretransmitters that are matched to animmobilizer control unit in yourvehicle. Only a correctly matchedtransmitter will start the vehicle.If the transmitter is ever damaged,you may not be able to start yourvehicle.When trying to start the vehicle, thesecurity light comes on briefly whenthe ignition is turned on.If the engine does not start and thesecurity light stays on, there is aproblem with the system. Turn theignition off and try again.If the RKE appears to beundamaged, try another transmitter.Or, you may try placing thetransmitter in the transmitter pocketlocated in the center console. See“No Remote Detected”under Keyand Lock Messages on page 5‑36.If the engine does not start with theother transmitter or when thetransmitter is in the pocket in thecenter console, your vehicle needsservice. See your dealer who canservice the theft-deterrent systemand have a new transmitterprogrammed to the vehicle.Do not leave the key or device thatdisarms or deactivates thetheft-deterrent system in the vehicle.
Black plate (16,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20122-16 Keys, Doors, and WindowsExterior MirrorsConvex Mirrors{WARNINGA convex mirror can make things,like other vehicles, look fartheraway than they really are. If youcut too sharply into the right lane,you could hit a vehicle on theright. Check the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.The passenger side mirror is convexshaped. A convex mirror's surface iscurved so more can be seen fromthe driver seat.Power MirrorsTo adjust the mirrors:1. Turn the control knob to theL (left) or R (right) selecting thedriver or passenger mirror.2. Push the control knob to the left,right, up, or down to adjust themirror.Vehicles with the memory featurecan store a preferred mirror position.See “Memory Seats”under PowerSeat Adjustment on page 3‑5formore information.Folding MirrorsManual Foldaway MirrorsThese mirrors can be folded inwardto prevent damage when goingthrough an automatic car wash.To fold, pull the mirror toward thevehicle. Push the mirror outward toreturn it to the original position.Automatic Dimming FeatureThe vehicle may have a driveroutside mirror that automaticallyadjusts for the glare of theheadlamps behind you.Turn Signal IndicatorThe vehicle may have a turn signalindicator lamp built into the mirrorhousing. The turn signal lampflashes with the use of the vehicle'sturn signal and hazard flashers.
Black plate (17,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-17Heated MirrorsFor vehicles with heated mirrors:1(Rear Window Defogger):Press to heat the mirrors.See “Rear Window Defogger”underAutomatic Climate Control Systemon page 8‑1for more information.Park Tilt MirrorsIf the vehicle is equipped withmemory mirrors, there is an optionto have the mirrors tilt down, whenin R (Reverse), to more easily seethe ground near the vehicle.When the vehicle is shifted toR (Reverse), both the driver andpassenger mirrors will tilt downward.They will return to their previousposition when the vehicle is shiftedout of R (Reverse), the ignition isturned to OFF, or the vehicle is leftin R (Reverse) for an extendedperiod of time.This feature can be turned on or off.See Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑40.Interior MirrorsManual Rearview MirrorAdjust the inside rearview mirror fora clear view of the area behind yourvehicle. To avoid glare of theheadlamps from behind, push thetab forward for daytime and pull itfor nighttime use.Vehicles with OnStar have threecontrol buttons at the bottom of themirror. See your dealer for moreinformation about OnStar and howto subscribe to it. See OnStarOverview on page 14‑1.
Black plate (18,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20122-18 Keys, Doors, and WindowsAutomatic DimmingRearview MirrorOn vehicles with an automaticdimming inside rearview mirror theautomatic dimming reduces theglare from the headlamps of thevehicle behind you.Vehicles with OnStar have threecontrol buttons located at thebottom of the mirror. See yourdealer for more information aboutOnStar and how to subscribe to it.See OnStar Overview on page 14‑1.Cleaning the MirrorDo not spray glass cleaner directlyon the mirror. Use a soft toweldampened with water.Windows{WARNINGLeaving children, helpless adults,or pets in a vehicle with thewindows closed is dangerous.They can be overcome by theextreme heat and sufferpermanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke. Never leave achild, a helpless adult, or a petalone in a vehicle, especially withthe windows closed in warm orhot weather.The vehicle aerodynamics aredesigned to improve fuel economyperformance. This may result in apulsing sound when either rearwindow is down and the frontwindows are up. To reduce thesound, open either a front windowor the sunroof (if equipped).
Black plate (19,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-19Power WindowsPress the switch to lower thewindow. Pull the switch up toraise it.The switches work when theignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or in RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). SeeRetained Accessory Power (RAP)on page 9‑25.Express Window OperationWindows with an express-up ordown feature allow the frontwindows to be lowered or raisedwithout holding the switch. Rearwindows only have express-down.Pull a window switch up or push itdown all the way, release it, andthe window goes down or upautomatically. Stop the window bypushing or pulling the switch.Rear Window LockoutThis feature prevents the rearpassenger windows from operating,except from the driver position.Press o{to activate the rearwindow lockout switch. The LED (A)comes on when activated.The rear door locks are alsodisabled. See Safety Locks onpage 2‑11.Press o{again to deactivate thelockout switch.
Black plate (20,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20122-20 Keys, Doors, and WindowsProgramming the PowerWindowsIf the battery on the vehicle hasbeen recharged, disconnected, oris not working, you will need toreprogram each front power windowfor the express-up feature to work.Before reprogramming, replace orrecharge the vehicle's battery.To program each front window:1. With the ignition in ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY, or inRetained Accessory Power(RAP), close all doors.2. Press and hold the powerwindow switch until the windowis fully open.3. Pull the power window switch upuntil the window is fully closed.4. Continue holding the switch upfor approximately two secondsafter the window is completelyclosed.The window is now reprogrammed.Repeat the process for the otherwindows.Sun VisorsPull the sun visor down to blockglare. Detach the sun visor from thecenter mount to pivot to the sidewindow, or to extend along the rod,if available.Rear Window SunshadeOn vehicles with a rear windowsunshade, the switch is on theconsole to the right of the shift lever.The sunshade only operates whenthe ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY.To open the sunshade, press andrelease the switch. The sunshadewill fully extend. To close thesunshade, press and release theswitch again. The sunshade willfully close.If the vehicle is shifted intoR (Reverse) when the sunshade isextended, it will automatically close.
Black plate (21,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-21RoofSunroofOn vehicles with a sunroof, theswitch is located on the overheadconsole.The sunroof only operates when theignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or in RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). SeeRetained Accessory Power (RAP)on page 9‑25.VentThe sunroof has an express-ventopen feature. From the closedposition, press the rear of thesunroof switch (B) to the first detentto vent the sunroof. To close thesunroof, press the front of thesunroof switch (A) to the seconddetent.Express-Open/Express-CloseTo express-open the sunroof fromthe closed or vent position, fullypress and release the rear of theswitch (B). The sunroof opensautomatically. To stop the sunroofpartway, press the switch a secondtime. To express-close the sunroof,fully press and release the front ofthe switch (A). The sunroof closesautomatically. To stop the sunroofpartway, press the switch asecond time.If the sunshade is closed, it opensautomatically with the sunroof butcan also be express-opened/express-closed by using thesunshade control (C) or (D). Thesunshade cannot be fully closedwith the sunroof open.To express-open the sunshade fromthe closed position, fully press andrelease the rear of the switch (C).The sunshade opens automatically.To stop the sunshade partway,press the switch a second time.To express-close the sunshade fullypress and release the front of theswitch (D). The sunshade closesautomatically. To stop the sunshadepartway, press the switch asecond time.Notice: Forcing the sunshadeforward of the sliding glass panelmay cause damage and thesunroof may not operate properly.Always close the glass panelbefore closing the sunshade.The sunroof glass panel cannot beopened or closed if the vehicle hasan electrical failure.
Black plate (22,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20122-22 Keys, Doors, and WindowsAnti-Pinch FeatureIf an object is in the path of thesunroof while it is closing, theanti-pinch feature will detect theobject and stop the sunroof fromclosing at the point of theobstruction. The sunroof andsunshade will then return to theopen or vent position. To close thesunroof once the obstructionhas been removed, refer to"Express-Open/Express-Close"earlier in this section.Dirt and debris may collect on thesunroof seal or in the track. Thiscould cause issues with sunroofoperation and noise. It could alsoplug the water drainage system.Periodically open the sunroof andremove any obstacles or loosedebris. Wipe the sunroof seal androof sealing area using a cleancloth, mild soap, and water. Do notremove grease from the sunroof.
Black plate (1,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Seats and Restraints 3-1Seats andRestraintsHead RestraintsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Front SeatsSeat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-5Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Heated and Ventilated FrontSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10Rear SeatsRear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11Safety BeltsSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-19Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-19Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-20Airbag SystemAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-23When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27Servicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-32Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-33Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Black plate (2,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20123-2 Seats and RestraintsChild RestraintsOlder Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34Infants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-39Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-41Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-50Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50Securing Child Restraints(Front Passenger Seat) . . . . 3-52Head RestraintsThe vehicle's front and rear seatshave adjustable head restraints inthe outboard seating positions.{WARNINGWith head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do notdrive until the head restraints forall occupants are installed andadjusted properly.Adjust the head restraint so that thetop of the restraint is at the sameheight as the top of the occupant'shead. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.
Black plate (3,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Seats and Restraints 3-3Front SeatTo raise or lower the head restraint,press the release button located onthe side of the head restraint andpull up or push the head restraintdown and release the button.Pull and push on the head restraintafter the button is released to makesure that it is locked in place.The front head restraints are notdesigned to be removed.Rear SeatPull the head restraint up to raise it.To lower the head restraint, pressthe release button, located on thehead restraint post on the top of theseatback, while you push the headrestraint down.Push down on the head restraintafter the button is released to makesure that it is locked in place.If you are installing a child restraintin the rear seat, see “Securing aChild Restraint Designed for theLATCH System”under LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3‑42.
Black plate (4,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20123-4 Seats and RestraintsFront SeatsSeat AdjustmentSeat Position{WARNINGYou can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust amanual driver seat while thevehicle is moving.(Continued)WARNING (Continued)The sudden movement couldstartle and confuse you, or makeyou push a pedal when you donot want to. Adjust the driver seatonly when the vehicle is notmoving.To adjust the seat position:1. Pull the handle under the frontof the seat cushion.2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release the handle.3. Try to move the seat backand forth to be sure it is lockedin place.Height AdjustmentPress and hold the top or bottom ofthe switch to raise or lower the seat.Release the switch when thedesired height is reached.
Black plate (5,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Seats and Restraints 3-5Power Seat AdjustmentTo adjust a power seat:.Move the seat forward orrearward by sliding the controlforward or rearward..Raise or lower the front or rearpart of the seat cushion bymoving the front or rear of thecontrol up or down..Raise or lower the entire seat bymoving the entire control upor down.Lumbar AdjustmentIf available, press and hold the frontor rear of the control to increase ordecrease lumbar support.To raise or lower lumbar support,press and hold the top or bottom ofthe control.Release the control when theseatback reaches the desired levelof lumbar support.See Power Seat Adjustment onpage 3‑5for more information.
Black plate (6,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20123-6 Seats and RestraintsReclining Seatbacks{WARNINGSitting in a reclined position whenthe vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even when buckledup, the safety belts cannot dotheir job when reclined like this.(Continued)WARNING (Continued)The shoulder belt cannot do itsjob because it will not be againstyour body. Instead, it will be infront of you. In a crash, youcould go into it, receiving neck orother injuries.The lap belt cannot do its jobeither. In a crash, the belt couldgo up over your abdomen. Thebelt forces would be there, not atyour pelvic bones. This couldcause serious internal injuries.For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have theseatback upright. Then sit wellback in the seat and wear thesafety belt properly.Manual Reclining Seatbacks{WARNINGYou can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust amanual driver seat while thevehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle andconfuse you, or make you push apedal when you do not want to.Adjust the driver seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.{WARNINGIf either seatback is not locked,it could move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure theyare locked.
Black plate (7,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Seats and Restraints 3-7To recline the seatback:1. Lift the recline lever.2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, and thenrelease the lever to lock theseatback in place.3. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked.To return the seatback to theupright position:1. Lift the lever fully withoutapplying pressure to theseatback, and the seatback willreturn to the upright position.2. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked.Power Reclining SeatbacksTo adjust a power seatback,if equipped:.Tilt the top of the controlrearward to recline..Tilt the top of the control forwardto raise.Memory SeatsOn vehicles with the memoryfeature, the “1”and “2”buttons onthe outboard side of the driver seatare used to manually save andrecall the driver seat and outsidemirror positions. These manuallystored positions are referred to asButton Memory positions.
Black plate (8,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20123-8 Seats and RestraintsThe vehicle will also automaticallysave driver seat and outside mirrorpositions to the current driverRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter when the ignition isplaced in OFF. These automaticallystored positions are referred to asRKE Memory positions. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2‑3formore information.Storing Button Memory PositionsTo save positions into ButtonMemory:1. Adjust the driver seat, seatbackrecliner, and both outside mirrorsto the desired driving positions.2. Press and hold MEM (Memory)and “1”at the same time until abeep sounds.3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for asecond driver using “2.”Recalling Button MemoryPositionsTo recall the manually saved ButtonMemory positions, press and hold“1”or “2.”The driver seat andoutside mirrors move to thepositions stored to those buttonswhen pressed. Releasing “1”or “2”before the stored positions arereached stops the recall.If something has blocked the driverseat while recalling a memoryposition, the recall may stop.Remove the obstruction; then pressand hold the appropriate manualcontrol for the memory item that isnot recalling for two seconds. Tryrecalling the memory position againby pressing the appropriate memorybutton. If the memory position is stillnot recalling, see your dealer forservice.Recalling RKE Memory Positions(Memory Remote Recall)The Memory Remote Recall featurecan recall the driver seat andoutside mirrors to previously storedRKE Memory positions whenentering the vehicle.Every time the ignition is placed inOFF, the positions of the driver seatand outside mirrors areautomatically stored to the RKEtransmitter that was used to startthe vehicle. These positions arecalled RKE Memory positions andmay be different than the previouslymentioned Button Memory positionssaved to the “1”or “2”buttons. Toautomatically recall RKE Memorypositions, unlock the driver doorwith the RKE transmitter, and openthe driver door. On vehicles withKeyless Access, opening the driverdoor when an RKE transmitter ispresent will activate the RKEMemory recall. If the driver door isalready open, pressing the RKEtransmitter Kbutton will alsoactivate the RKE Memory recall.
Black plate (9,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Seats and Restraints 3-9The driver seat and outside mirrorswill move to the previously savedRKE Memory positions.This feature is turned on or off usingthe vehicle personalization menu.See “Remote Recall”under VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑40 formore information.To stop recall movement, press oneof the memory, power mirror,or power seat controls.If something has blocked the driverseat while recalling a memoryposition, the recall may stop.Remove the obstruction; then pressand hold the appropriate manualcontrol for the memory item that isnot recalling for two seconds. Tryrecalling the memory position againby opening the driver door andpressing the RKE transmitterKbutton. If the memory position isstill not recalling, see your dealerfor service.Easy Exit Driver SeatThis feature moves the seatrearward allowing the driver moreroom to exit the vehicle.To activate, place the ignition inOFF and open the driver door. If thedriver door is already open, placingthe ignition in OFF will activate theeasy exit driver seat.This feature is turned on or off usingthe vehicle personalization menu.See “Driver Seat Easy Exit”underVehicle Personalization onpage 5‑40 for more information.To stop recall movement, press oneof the memory or power seatcontrols.If something has blocked the driverseat while recalling the exit position,the recall may stop. Remove theobstruction; then press and hold thepower seat control rearward fortwo seconds. Try recalling the exitposition again. If the exit position isstill not recalling, see your dealer forservice.
Black plate (10,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20123-10 Seats and RestraintsHeated and VentilatedFront Seats{WARNINGIf you cannot feel temperaturechange or pain to the skin, theseat heater may cause burnseven at low temperatures. Toreduce the risk of burns, peoplewith such a condition should usecare when using the seat heater,especially for long periods oftime. Do not place anything onthe seat that insulates againstheat, such as a blanket, cushion,cover, or similar item. This maycause the seat heater tooverheat. An overheated seatheater may cause a burn or maydamage the seat.Heated and Ventilated SeatButtons Shown, Heated SeatButtons SimilarIf available, the buttons are on theclimate control panel. To operate,the ignition must be on.Press Lto heat the seat cushionand seatback or {, if equipped, toventilate the seat.Press the button once for thehighest setting. With each press ofthe button, the seat will change tothe next lower setting, and then tothe off setting. The lights indicatethree for the highest setting and onefor the lowest.The passenger seat may takelonger to heat up.Remote Start Heated andVentilated SeatsDuring a remote start, the heated orventilated seats, if equipped, can beturned on automatically. They arecanceled when the ignition is turnedon. Press the button to use theheated or ventilated seats after thevehicle is started.The heated or ventilated seatindicator lights on the button do notturn on during a remote start.
Black plate (11,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Seats and Restraints 3-11The heated seat temperatureperformance of an unoccupied seatmay be reduced. This is normal.The heated or ventilated seats willnot turn on during a remote startunless they are enabled in thevehicle personalization menu. SeeRemote Vehicle Start on page 2‑8and “Remote Start Heated Seats”or“Remote Start Cooled Seats”underVehicle Personalization onpage 5‑40 for more information.Rear SeatsFolding the SeatbackEither side of the seatback can befolded down for more cargo space.Fold a seatback only when thevehicle is not moving.Notice: Folding a rear seat withthe safety belts still fastened maycause damage to the seat or thesafety belts. Always unbuckle thesafety belts and return them totheir normal stowed positionbefore folding a rear seat.To fold the seatback down:Rear Seat with Safety BeltRetainer Clip Shown1. Before folding the seatback,make sure the safety belt is inthe retainer clip (if equipped).
Black plate (12,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20123-12 Seats and RestraintsRear Seat with Safety Belt GuideLoop Shown2. Pull on the lever on the top ofthe seatback to unlock it.A tab near the seatback leverraises when the seatback isunlocked.3. Fold the seatback down.Repeat the steps to fold theother seatback, if desired.Raising the Seatback{WARNINGIf either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.{WARNINGA safety belt that is improperlyrouted, not properly attached,or twisted will not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After raising therear seatback, always check to besure that the safety belts areproperly routed and attached, andare not twisted.To raise a seatback:1. Lift the seatback up and push itrearward to lock it in place.Make sure the safety belt is inthe retainer clip (if equipped)and is not twisted or caught inthe seatback.A tab near the seatback leverretracts when the seatback islocked in place.2. Push and pull the top of theseatback to be sure it is lockedinto position.3. Repeat the steps to raise theother seatback, if necessary.When the seat is not in use, itshould be kept in the upright, lockedposition.
Black plate (13,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Seats and Restraints 3-13Safety BeltsThis section of the manualdescribes how to use safety beltsproperly. It also describes somethings not to do with safety belts.{WARNINGDo not let anyone ride where asafety belt cannot be wornproperly. In a crash, if you or yourpassenger(s) are not wearingsafety belts, injuries can be muchworse than if you are wearingsafety belts. You can be seriouslyinjured or killed by hitting thingsinside the vehicle harder or bybeing ejected from the vehicle.In addition, anyone who is notbuckled up can strike otherpassengers in the vehicle.(Continued)WARNING (Continued)It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area, inside or outsideof a vehicle. In a collision,passengers riding in these areasare more likely to be seriouslyinjured or killed. Do not allowpassengers to ride in any area ofthe vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts.Always wear a safety belt, andcheck that all passenger(s) arerestrained properly too.This vehicle has indicators as areminder to buckle the safety belts.See Safety Belt Reminders onpage 5‑14 for additional information.Why Safety Belts WorkWhen riding in a vehicle, you travelas fast as the vehicle does. If thevehicle stops suddenly, you keepgoing until something stops you.It could be the windshield, theinstrument panel, or the safety belts!
Black plate (14,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20123-14 Seats and RestraintsWhen you wear a safety belt, youand the vehicle slow down together.There is more time to stop becauseyou stop over a longer distance and,when worn properly, your strongestbones take the forces from thesafety belts. That is why wearingsafety belts makes such goodsense.Questions and Answers AboutSafety BeltsQ: Will I be trapped in the vehicleafter a crash if I am wearing asafety belt?A: You could be —whether you arewearing a safety belt or not.Your chance of being consciousduring and after a crash, so youcan unbuckle and get out, ismuch greater if you are belted.Q: If my vehicle has airbags, whyshould I have to wear safetybelts?A: Airbags are supplementalsystems only; so they work withsafety belts —not instead ofthem. Whether or not an airbagis provided, all occupants stillhave to buckle up to get themost protection.Also, in nearly all states and inall Canadian provinces, the lawrequires wearing safety belts.How to Wear Safety BeltsProperlyThis section is only for people ofadult size.There are special things to knowabout safety belts and children. Andthere are different rules for smallerchildren and infants. If a child will beriding in the vehicle, see OlderChildren on page 3‑34 or Infantsand Young Children on page 3‑36.Follow those rules for everyone'sprotection.It is very important for all occupantsto buckle up. Statistics show thatunbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who arewearing safety belts.There are important things to knowabout wearing a safety belt properly..Sit up straight and always keepyour feet on the floor in frontof you.
Black plate (15,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Seats and Restraints 3-15.Always use the correct bucklefor your seating position..Wear the lap part of the belt lowand snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs. In a crash,this applies force to the strongpelvic bones and you would beless likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the beltwould apply force on yourabdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries..Wear the shoulder belt over theshoulder and across the chest.These parts of the body are bestable to take belt restrainingforces. The shoulder belt locks ifthere is a sudden stop or crash.{WARNINGYou can be seriously injured,or even killed, by not wearingyour safety belt properly.(Continued)WARNING (Continued).Never allow the lap orshoulder belt to becomeloose or twisted..Never wear the shoulder beltunder both arms or behindyour back..Never route the lap orshoulder belt over anarmrest.Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehiclehave a lap-shoulder belt.The following instructions explainhow to wear a lap-shoulder beltproperly.1. Adjust the seat, if the seat isadjustable, so you can sit upstraight. To see how, see“Seats”in the Index.2. Pick up the latch plate and pullthe belt across you. Do not let itget twisted.The lap-shoulder belt may lock ifyou pull the belt across you veryquickly. If this happens, let thebelt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across youmore slowly.If the shoulder portion of apassenger belt is pulled out allthe way, the child restraintlocking feature may be engaged.If this happens, let the belt goback all the way and start again.
Black plate (16,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20123-16 Seats and Restraints3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.Pull up on the latch plate tomake sure it is secure. If the beltis not long enough, see SafetyBelt Extender on page 3‑19.Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.If equipped with a shoulder beltheight adjuster, move it to theheight that is right for you. See“Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster”later in this section forinstructions on use andimportant safety information.4. To make the lap part tight, pullup on the shoulder belt.It may be necessary to pullstitching on the safety beltthrough the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smalleroccupants.To unlatch the belt, push the buttonon the buckle. The belt shouldreturn to its stowed position. Slidethe latch plate up the safety beltwebbing, when the safety belt is notin use. The latch plate should reston the stitching on the safety belt,near the guide loop on the side wall.Before a door is closed, be sure thesafety belt is out of the way. If adoor is slammed against a safetybelt, damage can occur to both thesafety belt and the vehicle.Shoulder Belt Height AdjusterThe vehicle has a shoulder beltheight adjuster for the driver andright front passenger seatingpositions.Adjust the height so the shoulderportion of the belt is on the shoulderand not falling off of it. The beltshould be close to, but notcontacting, the neck. Impropershoulder belt height adjustmentcould reduce the effectiveness ofthe safety belt in a crash. See Howto Wear Safety Belts Properly onpage 3‑14.
Black plate (17,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Seats and Restraints 3-17Press the release button (A) andmove the height adjuster to thedesired position. The adjuster canbe moved up by pushing the slide/trim up. After the adjuster is set tothe desired position, try to move itdown without pushing the releasebutton to make sure it has lockedinto position.Safety Belt PretensionersThis vehicle has safety beltpretensioners for front outboardoccupants. Although the safety beltpretensioners cannot be seen, theyare part of the safety belt assembly.They can help tighten the safetybelts during the early stages of amoderate to severe frontal andnear frontal crash if the thresholdconditions for pretensioneractivation are met.Pretensioners work only once. If thepretensioners activate in a crash,the pretensioners and probablyother parts of the vehicle's safetybelt system will need to be replaced.See Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts after a Crash on page 3‑20.Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuidesThis vehicle may have rear shoulderbelt comfort guides. If not, they areavailable through your dealer. Theguides may provide added safetybelt comfort for older children whohave outgrown booster seats andfor some adults. When installed andproperly adjusted, the comfort guidepositions the belt away from theneck and head.There is one guide for each outsidepassenger position in the rear seat.Here is how to install a comfortguide to the safety belt:1. Remove the guide from itsstorage pocket on the side ofthe seat.
Black plate (18,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20123-18 Seats and Restraints2. Place the guide over the belt,and insert the two edges of thebelt into the slots of the guide.3. Be sure that the belt is nottwisted and it lies flat. Theelastic cord must be under thebelt and the guide on top.{WARNINGA safety belt that is not properlyworn may not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulder(Continued)WARNING (Continued)and across the chest. These partsof the body are best able to takebelt restraining forces.4. Buckle, position, and releasethe safety belt as describedpreviously in this section. Makesure the shoulder portion of thebelt is on the shoulder and notfalling off of it. The belt shouldbe close to, but not contacting,the neck.
Black plate (19,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Seats and Restraints 3-19Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancySafety belts work for everyone,including pregnant women. Like alloccupants, they are more likely tobe seriously injured if they do notwear safety belts.A pregnant woman should wear alap-shoulder belt, and the lapportion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding,throughout the pregnancy.The best way to protect the fetus isto protect the mother. When a safetybelt is worn properly, it is more likelythat the fetus will not be hurt in acrash. For pregnant women, as foranyone, the key to making safetybelts effective is wearing themproperly.Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle's safety belt will fastenaround you, you should use it.But if a safety belt is not longenough, your dealer will order youan extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat youwill wear, so the extender will belong enough for you. To help avoidpersonal injury, do not let someoneelse use it, and use it only for theseat it is made to fit. The extenderhas been designed for adults. Neveruse it for securing child seats. Towear it, attach it to the regular safetybelt. For more information, see theinstruction sheet that comes withthe extender.Safety System CheckNow and then, check that the safetybelt reminder light, safety belts,buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are all working properly.Look for any other loose ordamaged safety belt system partsthat might keep a safety belt systemfrom doing its job. See your dealerto have it repaired. Torn or frayedsafety belts may not protect you ina crash. They can rip apart underimpact forces. If a belt is torn orfrayed, get a new one right away.Make sure the safety belt reminderlight is working. See Safety BeltReminders on page 5‑14 for moreinformation.Keep safety belts clean and dry.See Safety Belt Care on page 3‑20.
Black plate (20,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20123-20 Seats and RestraintsSafety Belt CareKeep belts clean and dry.{WARNINGDo not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts after aCrash{WARNINGA crash can damage the safetybelt system in the vehicle.A damaged safety belt systemmay not properly protect theperson using it, resulting inserious injury or even death in acrash. To help make sure thesafety belt systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soonas possible.After a minor crash, replacement ofsafety belts may not be necessary.But the safety belt assemblies thatwere used during any crash mayhave been stressed or damaged.See your dealer to have the safetybelt assemblies inspected orreplaced.New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the safety beltsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.Have the safety belt pretensionerschecked if the vehicle has been in acrash, or if the airbag readiness lightstays on after you start the vehicleor while you are driving. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑14.
Black plate (21,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Seats and Restraints 3-21Airbag SystemThe vehicle has the followingairbags:.A frontal airbag for the driver..A frontal airbag for the frontoutboard passenger..A seat-mounted side impactairbag for the driver..A seat-mounted side impactairbag for the front outboardpassenger..A roof-rail airbag for the driverand the passenger seateddirectly behind the driver..A roof-rail airbag for the frontoutboard passenger and thepassenger seated directlybehind the front outboardpassenger.The vehicle may have the followingairbags:.Seat-mounted side impactairbags for the second rowoutboard passengers.All of the airbags have the wordAIRBAG embossed on the trim oron a label near the deploymentopening.For frontal airbags, the wordAIRBAG is on the center of thesteering wheel for the driver and onthe instrument panel for the frontoutboard passenger.For seat-mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAG is on theside of the seatback closest tothe door.For roof-rail airbags, the wordAIRBAG is on the ceiling or trim.Airbags are designed to supplementthe protection provided by safetybelts. Even though today's airbagsare also designed to help reducethe risk of injury from the force of aninflating bag, all airbags must inflatevery quickly to do their job.
Black plate (22,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20123-22 Seats and RestraintsHere are the most important thingsto know about the airbag system:{WARNINGYou can be severely injured orkilled in a crash if you are notwearing your safety belt, evenwith airbags. Airbags aredesigned to work with safetybelts, not replace them. Also,airbags are not designed to inflatein every crash. In some crashessafety belts are the only restraint.See When Should an AirbagInflate? on page 3‑24.Wearing your safety belt during acrash helps reduce the chance ofhitting things inside the vehicle orbeing ejected from it. Airbags are“supplemental restraints”to thesafety belts. Everyone in thevehicle should wear a safety beltproperly, whether or not there isan airbag for that person.{WARNINGBecause airbags inflate with greatforce and faster than the blink ofan eye, anyone who is upagainst, or very close to anyairbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Do notsit unnecessarily close to anyairbag, as you would be if sittingon the edge of the seat or leaningforward. Safety belts help keepyou in position before and duringa crash. Always wear a safetybelt, even with airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possiblewhile still maintaining control ofthe vehicle.Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positions withseat-mounted side impact airbagsand/or roof-rail airbags.{WARNINGChildren who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protectionfor adults and older children, butnot for young children and infants.Neither the vehicle's safety beltsystem nor its airbag system isdesigned for them. Youngchildren and infants need theprotection that a child restraintsystem can provide. Alwayssecure children properly in thevehicle. To read how, see OlderChildren on page 3‑34 or Infantsand Young Children onpage 3‑36.
Black plate (23,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Seats and Restraints 3-23There is an airbag readiness lighton the instrument panel cluster,which shows the airbag symbol. Thesystem checks the airbag electricalsystem for malfunctions. The lighttells you if there is an electricalproblem. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑14 for moreinformation.Where Are the Airbags?The driver frontal airbag is in thecenter of the steering wheel.The front outboard passengerfrontal airbag is in the passengerside instrument panel.Driver Side Shown, PassengerSide SimilarThe driver and front outboardpassenger seat-mounted sideimpact airbags are in the side of theseatbacks closest to the door.The roof-rail airbags for the driver,front outboard passenger, andsecond row outboard passengersare in the ceiling above the sidewindows.
Black plate (24,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20123-24 Seats and RestraintsRear Seat Driver Side Shown,Passenger Side SimilarOn vehicles with second row seat‐mounted side impact airbags, theyare in the sides of the rear seatbackclosest to the door.{WARNINGIf something is between anoccupant and an airbag, theairbag might not inflate properlyor it might force the object intothat person causing severe injury(Continued)WARNING (Continued)or even death. The path of aninflating airbag must be keptclear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and anairbag, and do not attach or putanything on the steering wheelhub or on or near any otherairbag covering.Do not use seat accessories thatblock the inflation path of aseat-mounted side impact airbag.Never secure anything to the roofof a vehicle with roof-rail airbagsby routing a rope or tie‐downthrough any door or windowopening. If you do, the path of aninflating roof-rail airbag will beblocked.When Should an AirbagInflate?Frontal airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe frontalor near frontal crashes to helpreduce the potential for severeinjuries, mainly to the driver's orfront outboard passenger's headand chest. However, they are onlydesigned to inflate if the impactexceeds a predetermineddeployment threshold. Deploymentthresholds are used to predict howsevere a crash is likely to be in timefor the airbags to inflate and helprestrain the occupants.Whether the frontal airbags will orshould inflate is not based primarilyon how fast the vehicle is traveling.It depends on what is hit, thedirection of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down.
Black plate (25,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Seats and Restraints 3-25Frontal airbags may inflate atdifferent crash speeds depending onwhether the vehicle hits an objectstraight on or at an angle, andwhether the object is fixed ormoving, rigid or deformable,narrow or wide.Thresholds can also vary withspecific vehicle design.Frontal airbags are not intended toinflate during vehicle rollovers, rearimpacts, or in many side impacts.In addition, the vehicle hasdual-stage frontal airbags.Dual-stage airbags adjust therestraint according to crash severity.The vehicle has electronic frontalsensors, which help the sensingsystem distinguish between amoderate frontal impact and a moresevere frontal impact. For moderatefrontal impacts, dual-stage airbagsinflate at a level less than fulldeployment.For more severe frontal impacts, fulldeployment occurs.The vehicle has seat-mounted sideimpact airbags and roof-rail airbags.See Airbag System on page 3‑21.Seat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags are intended toinflate in moderate to severe sidecrashes depending on the locationof the impact. In addition, theseroof‐rail airbags are intended toinflate during a rollover or in asevere frontal impact. Seat-mountedside impact and roof-rail airbags willinflate if the crash severity is abovethe system's designed thresholdlevel. The threshold level can varywith specific vehicle design.Roof‐rail airbags are not intended toinflate in rear impacts.A seat-mounted side impact airbagis intended to inflate on the sideof the vehicle that is struck. Bothroof‐rail airbags will inflate wheneither side of the vehicle is struck orif the sensing system predicts thatthe vehicle is about to roll over onits side, or in a severe frontalimpact.In any particular crash, no one cansay whether an airbag should haveinflated simply because of thevehicle damage or repair costs.What Makes an AirbagInflate?In a deployment event, the sensingsystem sends an electrical signaltriggering a release of gas from theinflator. Gas from the inflator fills theairbag causing the bag to break outof the cover. The inflator, the airbag,and related hardware are all part ofthe airbag module.For airbag location, see Where Arethe Airbags? on page 3‑23.
Black plate (26,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20123-26 Seats and RestraintsHow Does an AirbagRestrain?In moderate to severe frontal ornear frontal collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the steeringwheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions,even belted occupants can contactthe inside of the vehicle.Airbags supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts bydistributing the force of the impactmore evenly over theoccupant's body.But airbags would not help in manytypes of collisions, primarilybecause the occupant's motion isnot toward those airbags. See WhenShould an Airbag Inflate? onpage 3‑24 for more information.Airbags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplementto safety belts.What Will You See afteran Airbag Inflates?After the frontal airbags andseat-mounted side impact airbagsinflate, they quickly deflate, soquickly that some people may noteven realize an airbag inflated.Roof-rail airbags may still be at leastpartially inflated for some time afterthey inflate. Some components ofthe airbag module may be hot forseveral minutes. For location of theairbags, see Where Are theAirbags? on page 3‑23.The parts of the airbag that comeinto contact with you may be warm,but not too hot to touch. There maybe some smoke and dust comingfrom the vents in the deflatedairbags. Airbag inflation does notprevent the driver from seeing out ofthe windshield or being able to steerthe vehicle, nor does it preventpeople from leaving the vehicle.{WARNINGWhen an airbag inflates, theremay be dust in the air. This dustcould cause breathing problemsfor people with a history ofasthma or other breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon asit is safe to do so. If you havebreathing problems but cannotget out of the vehicle after anairbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door.If you experience breathingproblems following an airbagdeployment, you should seekmedical attention.The vehicle has a feature that mayautomatically unlock the doors, turnon the interior lamps, turn on thehazard warning flashers, andshut off the fuel system after theairbags inflate.
Black plate (27,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Seats and Restraints 3-27You can lock the doors, turn off theinterior lamps, and turn off thehazard warning flashers by usingthe controls for those features.{WARNINGA crash severe enough to inflatethe airbags may have alsodamaged important functions inthe vehicle, such as the fuelsystem, brake and steeringsystems, etc. Even if the vehicleappears to be drivable after amoderate crash, there may beconcealed damage that couldmake it difficult to safely operatethe vehicle.Use caution if you should attemptto restart the engine after a crashhas occurred.In many crashes severe enough toinflate the airbag, windshields arebroken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the front outboardpassenger airbag..Airbags are designed to inflateonly once. After an airbaginflates, you will need some newparts for the airbag system.If you do not get them, theairbag system will not be thereto help protect you in anothercrash. A new system will includeairbag modules and possiblyother parts. The service manualfor the vehicle covers the needto replace other parts..The vehicle has a crash sensingand diagnostic module whichrecords information after acrash. See Vehicle DataRecording and Privacy onpage 13‑18 and Event DataRecorders on page 13‑19..Let only qualified technicianswork on the airbag systems.Improper service can mean thatan airbag system will not workproperly. See your dealer forservice.Passenger SensingSystemThe vehicle has a passengersensing system for the frontoutboard passenger position. Thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light on the instrument panelwhen the vehicle is started.The words ON and OFF will bevisible during the system check.If you use remote start, if equipped,to start the vehicle from a distanceyou may not see the system check.
Black plate (28,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20123-28 Seats and RestraintsWhen the system check iscomplete, either the word ON orthe word OFF will be visible. SeePassenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 5‑15.The passenger sensing systemturns off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag undercertain conditions. No other airbagis affected by the passengersensing system.The passenger sensing systemworks with sensors that are part ofthe front outboard passenger seat.The sensors are designed to detectthe presence of a properly-seatedoccupant and determine if the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagshould be allowed to inflate or not.According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlysecured in a rear seat in the correctchild restraint for their weightand size.We recommend that children besecured in a rear seat, including: aninfant or a child riding in arear-facing child restraint; a childriding in a forward-facing child seat;an older child riding in a boosterseat; and children, who are largeenough, using safety belts.Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag inflates.{WARNINGA child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the passenger frontalairbag inflates. This is becausethe back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close tothe inflating airbag. A child in aforward-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the(Continued)WARNING (Continued)passenger frontal airbag inflatesand the passenger seat is in aforward position.Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off thepassenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notinflate under some unusualcircumstance, even though theairbag is off.Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe front outboard passengerseat, always move the seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.
Black plate (29,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Seats and Restraints 3-29The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag if:.The front outboard passengerseat is unoccupied..The system determines that aninfant is present in a childrestraint..A front outboard passengertakes his/her weight off of theseat for a period of time..Or, if there is a critical problemwith the airbag system or thepassenger sensing system.When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag,the off indicator will light and stay litas a reminder that the airbags areoff. See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5‑15.The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn on the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbaganytime the system senses that aperson of adult size is sittingproperly in the front outboardpassenger seat. When thepassenger sensing system hasallowed the airbags to be enabled,the on indicator will light and staylit as a reminder that the airbagsare active.For some children, includingchildren in child restraints and forvery small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turnoff the front outboard passengerfrontal airbag, depending upon theperson's seating posture and bodybuild. Everyone in the vehicle whohas outgrown child restraintsshould wear a safety beltproperly —whether or not thereis an airbag for that person.{WARNINGIf the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑14 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.If the On Indicator Is Lit for aChild RestraintIf a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit:1. Turn the vehicle off.2. Remove the child restraint fromthe vehicle.3. Remove any additional itemsfrom the seat such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.
Black plate (30,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20123-30 Seats and Restraints4. Reinstall the child restraintfollowing the directions providedby the child restraintmanufacturer and refer toSecuring Child Restraints (RearSeat) on page 3‑50 or SecuringChild Restraints (FrontPassenger Seat) on page 3‑52.5. If, after reinstalling the childrestraint and restarting thevehicle, the on indicator is still lit,turn the vehicle off. Then slightlyrecline the vehicle seatback andadjust the seat cushion,if adjustable, to make sure thatthe vehicle seatback is notpushing the child restraint intothe seat cushion.Also make sure the childrestraint is not trapped under thevehicle head restraint. If thishappens, adjust the headrestraint. See Head Restraintson page 3‑2.6. Restart the vehicle.The passenger sensing system mayor may not turn off the airbag for achild in a child restraint dependingupon the child's seating posture andbody build. It is better to secure thechild restraint in a rear seat.If the Off Indicator Is Lit for anAdult-Size OccupantIf a person of adult-size is sitting inthe front outboard passenger seat,but the off indicator is lit, it could bebecause that person is not sittingproperly in the seat. Use thefollowing steps to allow the systemto detect that person and enablethe front outboard passengerfrontal airbag :1. Turn the vehicle off.2. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat, such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.3. Place the seatback in the fullyupright position.4. Have the person sit upright inthe seat, centered on the seatcushion, with legs comfortablyextended.5. Restart the vehicle and have theperson remain in this position fortwo to three minutes after the onindicator is lit.
Black plate (31,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Seats and Restraints 3-31Additional Factors AffectingSystem OperationSafety belts help keep thepassenger in position on the seatduring vehicle maneuvers andbraking, which helps the passengersensing system maintain thepassenger airbag status. See“Safety Belts”and “Child Restraints”in the Index for additionalinformation about the importance ofproper restraint use.A thick layer of additional material,such as a blanket or cushion,or aftermarket equipment such asseat covers, seat heaters, and seatmassagers can affect how well thepassenger sensing systemoperates. We recommend that younot use seat covers or otheraftermarket equipment except whenapproved by GM for your specificvehicle. See Adding Equipment tothe Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑32 for more informationabout modifications that can affecthow the system operates.A wet seat can affect theperformance of the passengersensing system. Here is how:.The passenger sensing systemmay turn off the passengerfrontal airbag when liquid issoaked into the seat. If thishappens, the off indicator will belit, and the airbag readiness lighton the instrument panel will alsobe lit..Liquid pooled on the seat thathas not soaked in may make itmore likely that the passengersensing system will turn on thepassenger frontal airbag while achild restraint or child occupantis on the seat. If the passengerfrontal airbag is turned on, theon indicator will be lit.If the passenger seat gets wet, drythe seat immediately. If the airbagreadiness light is lit, do not install achild restraint or allow anyone tooccupy the seat. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑14 forimportant safety information.The on indicator may be lit if anobject, such as a briefcase,handbag, grocery bag, laptop orother electronic device, is put on anunoccupied seat. If this is notdesired remove the object fromthe seat.{WARNINGStowing of articles under thepassenger seat or between thepassenger seat cushion andseatback may interfere with theproper operation of the passengersensing system.Servicing theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAirbags affect how the vehicleshould be serviced. There are partsof the airbag system in severalplaces around the vehicle. Yourdealer and the service manual haveinformation about servicing thevehicle and the airbag system.
Black plate (32,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20123-32 Seats and RestraintsTo purchase a service manual, seeService Publications OrderingInformation on page 13‑16.{WARNINGFor up to 10 seconds after thevehicle is turned off and thebattery is disconnected, an airbagcan still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if youare close to an airbag when itinflates. Avoid yellow connectors.They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, andmake sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAdding accessories that change thevehicle's frame, bumper system,height, front end or side sheetmetal, may keep the airbag systemfrom working properly.The operation of the airbag systemcan also be affected by changing ormoving any parts of the front seats,safety belts, the airbag sensing anddiagnostic module, steering wheel,instrument panel, roof-rail airbagmodules, ceiling headliner or pillargarnish trim, front sensors, sideimpact sensors, or airbag wiring.Your dealer and the service manualhave information about the locationof the airbag sensors, sensingand diagnostic module, andairbag wiring.In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system for thefront outboard passenger position,which includes sensors that arepart of the passenger seat. Thepassenger sensing system may notoperate properly if the original seattrim is replaced with non-GMcovers, upholstery or trim, or withGM covers, upholstery or trimdesigned for a different vehicle.Any object, such as an aftermarketseat heater or a comfort enhancingpad or device, installed under or ontop of the seat fabric, could alsointerfere with the operation of thepassenger sensing system.This could either prevent properdeployment of the passengerairbag(s) or prevent the passengersensing system from properlyturning off the passenger airbag(s).See Passenger Sensing System onpage 3‑27.If your vehicle needs to be modifiedbecause you have a disability andyou have questions about whetherthe modifications will affect thevehicle's airbag system, or if youhave questions about whether theairbag system will be affected if thevehicle is modified for any otherreason, call Customer Assistance.See Customer Assistance Offices(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑4orCustomer Assistance Offices(Mexico) on page 13‑5.
Black plate (33,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Seats and Restraints 3-33Airbag System CheckThe airbag system does not needregularly scheduled maintenance orreplacement. Make sure the airbagreadiness light is working. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 5‑14 for more information.Notice: If an airbag covering isdamaged, opened, or broken, theairbag may not work properly. Donot open or break the airbagcoverings. If there are anyopened or broken airbag covers,have the airbag covering and/orairbag module replaced. For thelocation of the airbags, seeWhere Are the Airbags? onpage 3‑23. See your dealer forservice.Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash{WARNINGA crash can damage theairbag systems in the vehicle.A damaged airbag system maynot work properly and maynot protect you and yourpassenger(s) in a crash, resultingin serious injury or even death.To help make sure the airbagsystems are working properlyafter a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soonas possible.If an airbag inflates, you willneed to replace airbag systemparts. See your dealer for service.If the airbag readiness light stays onafter the vehicle is started or comeson when you are driving, the airbagsystem may not work properly.Have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag Readiness Lighton page 5‑14 for more information.Vehicles with eAssist have ahigh voltage battery and a standard12‐volt battery. If an airbag inflatesor the vehicle has been in a crash,the vehicle's sensing system mayshut down the high voltage system.When this occurs, the high voltagebattery is disconnected and thevehicle is not charging the 12‐voltbattery or the electrical system.The vehicle may start but it shutsdown once the 12‐volt battery isdepleted. When the 12‐volt batteryis depleted, the vehicle will not startand the on‐board jump start featureis disabled. The airbag readinesslight and/or the 12‐volt batterywarning light are displayed. Beforethe vehicle can be operated again, itmust be serviced at your dealer.
Black plate (34,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20123-34 Seats and RestraintsChild RestraintsOlder ChildrenOlder children who have outgrownbooster seats should wear thevehicle's safety belts.The manufacturer's instructions thatcome with the booster seat, statethe weight and height limitations forthat booster. Use a booster seatwith a lap-shoulder belt until thechild passes the below fit test:.Sit all the way back on the seat.Do the knees bend at the seatedge? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat..Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.Does the shoulder belt rest onthe shoulder? If yes, continue.If no, then return to thebooster seat..Does the lap belt fit low andsnug on the hips, touching thethighs? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat..Can proper safety belt fit bemaintained for the length of thetrip? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.Q: What is the proper way towear safety belts?A: An older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulderbelt can provide. The shoulderbelt should not cross the face orneck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, justtouching the top of the thighs.This applies belt force to thechild's pelvic bones in a crash.It should never be worn over theabdomen, which could causesevere or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.
Black plate (35,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Seats and Restraints 3-35In a crash, children who are notbuckled up can strike other peoplewho are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Olderchildren need to use safety beltsproperly.{WARNINGNever do this.Never allow two children to wearthe same safety belt. The safetybelt cannot properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, the twochildren can be crushed togetherand seriously injured. A safetybelt must be used by only oneperson at a time.{WARNINGNever do this.Never allow a child to wear thesafety belt with the shoulder beltbehind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearingthe lap-shoulder belt properly. In acrash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt.The child could move too farforward increasing the chance ofhead and neck injury.(Continued)WARNING (Continued)The child might also slide underthe lap belt. The belt force wouldthen be applied right on theabdomen. That could causeserious or fatal injuries. Theshoulder belt should go over theshoulder and across the chest.
Black plate (36,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20123-36 Seats and RestraintsInfants and YoungChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needsprotection! This includes infants andall other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age andsize of the traveler changes theneed, for everyone, to use safetyrestraints. In fact, the law in everystate in the United States and inevery Canadian province sayschildren up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.{WARNINGChildren can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle andnever allow children to play withthe safety belts.Airbags plus lap‐shoulder belts offerprotection for adults and olderchildren, but not for young childrenand infants. Neither the vehicle'ssafety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them.Every time infants and youngchildren ride in vehicles, they shouldhave the protection provided byappropriate child restraints.Children who are not restrainedproperly can strike other people,or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
Black plate (37,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Seats and Restraints 3-37{WARNINGNever do this.Never hold an infant or a childwhile riding in a vehicle. Due tocrash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it during a crash.For example, in a crash at only40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)infant will suddenly become a110 kg (240 lb) force on aperson's arms. An infant shouldbe secured in an appropriaterestraint.{WARNINGNever do this.Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Never put a rear-facingchild restraint in the right frontseat. Secure a rear-facing childrestraint in a rear seat.(Continued)WARNING (Continued)It is also better to secure aforward-facing child restraint in arear seat. If you must secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go.
Black plate (38,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20123-38 Seats and RestraintsQ: What are the different types ofadd-on child restraints?A: Add-on child restraints, whichare purchased by the vehicleowner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particularrestraint should take intoconsideration not only the child'sweight, height, and age but alsowhether or not the restraint willbe compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.For most basic types of childrestraints, there are manydifferent models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, besure it is designed to be used ina motor vehicle. If it is, therestraint will have a label sayingthat it meets federal motorvehicle safety standards.The restraint manufacturer'sinstructions that come with therestraint state the weight andheight limitations for a particularchild restraint. In addition, thereare many kinds of restraintsavailable for children withspecial needs.{WARNINGTo reduce the risk of neck andhead injury during a crash, infantsneed complete support. This isbecause an infant's neck is notfully developed and its headweighs so much compared withthe rest of its body. In a crash, aninfant in a rear-facing childrestraint settles into the restraint,so the crash forces can bedistributed across the strongestpart of an infant's body, the backand shoulders. Infants shouldalways be secured in rear-facingchild restraints.{WARNINGA young child's hip bones are stillso small that the vehicle's regularsafety belt may not remain low onthe hip bones, as it should.Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child's abdomen. In a crash,the belt would apply force on abody area that is unprotected byany bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatalinjuries. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries during acrash, young children shouldalways be secured in appropriatechild restraints.
Black plate (39,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Seats and Restraints 3-39Child Restraint Systems(A) Rear‐Facing Infant SeatA rear-facing infant seat (A)provides restraint with the seatingsurface against the back of theinfant.The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts tokeep the infant positioned in therestraint.(B) Forward-Facing Child SeatA forward-facing child seat (B)provides restraint for the child'sbody with the harness.(C) Booster SeatsA booster seat (C) is a child restraintdesigned to improve the fit of thevehicle's safety belt system.A booster seat can also help achild to see out the window.
Black plate (40,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20123-40 Seats and RestraintsSecuring an Add-On ChildRestraint in the Vehicle{WARNINGA child can be seriously injuredor killed in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly securedin the vehicle. Secure the childrestraint properly in the vehicleusing the vehicle safety belt orLATCH system, following theinstructions that came with thatchild restraint and the instructionsin this manual.To help reduce the chance of injury,the child restraint must be securedin the vehicle. Child restraintsystems must be secured in vehicleseats by lap belts or the lap beltportion of a lap-shoulder belt, or bythe LATCH system. See LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3‑42 formore information.Children can be endangered in acrash if the child restraint is notproperly secured in the vehicle.When securing an add-on childrestraint, refer to the instructionsthat come with the restraint whichmay be on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both, and to this manual.The child restraint instructions areimportant, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacementcopy from the manufacturer.Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraintin the vehicle —even when no childis in it.In some areas, Certified ChildPassenger Safety Technicians(CPSTs) are available to inspectand demonstrate how to correctlyuse and install child restraints.In the U.S., refer to theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) website tolocate the nearest child safety seatinspection station. For CPSTavailability in Canada, check withTransport Canada or the ProvincialMinistry of Transportation office.Securing the Child within theChild Restraint{WARNINGA child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the child is notproperly secured in the childrestraint. Secure the childproperly following the instructionsthat came with that child restraint.
Black plate (41,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Seats and Restraints 3-41Where to Put theRestraintAccording to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.We recommend that children andchild restraints be secured in a rearseat, including: an infant or a childriding in a rear-facing child restraint;a child riding in a forward-facingchild seat; an older child riding in abooster seat; and children, who arelarge enough, using safety belts.A label on your sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front.”This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great if theairbag deploys.{WARNINGA child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates.This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.(Continued)WARNING (Continued)Secure rear-facing childrestraints in a rear seat, evenif the airbag is off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3‑27 for additionalinformation.When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with yourchild restraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.Child restraints and booster seatsvary considerably in size, and somemay fit in certain seating positionsbetter than others. Always makesure the child restraint is properlysecured.
Black plate (42,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20123-42 Seats and RestraintsDepending on where you place thechild restraint and the size of thechild restraint, you may not be ableto access adjacent safety beltassemblies or LATCH anchors foradditional passengers or childrestraints. Adjacent seatingpositions should not be used if thechild restraint prevents access to orinterferes with the routing of thesafety belt.Wherever a child restraint isinstalled, be sure to secure thechild restraint properly.Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inyour vehicle —even when no childis in it.Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH System)The LATCH system holds a childrestraint during driving or in a crash.This system is designed to makeinstallation of a child restraint easier.The LATCH system uses anchors inthe vehicle and attachments on thechild restraint that are made for usewith the LATCH system.Make sure that a LATCH-compatiblechild restraint is properly installedusing the anchors, or use thevehicle's safety belts to secure therestraint, following the instructionsthat came with that restraint, andalso the instructions in this manual.When installing a child restraint witha top tether, you must also useeither the lower anchors or thesafety belts to properly secure thechild restraint. A child restraint mustnever be installed using only thetop tether and anchor.In order to use the LATCH system inthe vehicle, you need a childrestraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraintmanufacturer will provide you withinstructions on how to use the childrestraint and its attachments. Thefollowing explains how to attach achild restraint with theseattachments in the vehicle.Not all vehicle seating positions orchild restraints have lower anchorsand attachments or top tetheranchors and attachments.
Black plate (43,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Seats and Restraints 3-43Lower AnchorsLower anchors (A) are metal barsbuilt into the vehicle. There aretwo lower anchors for eachLATCH seating position that willaccommodate a child restraint withlower attachments (B).Top Tether AnchorA top tether (A, C) anchors the topof the child restraint to the vehicle.A top tether anchor is built into thevehicle. The top tetherattachment (B) on the child restraintconnects to the top tether anchor inthe vehicle in order to reduce theforward movement and rotation ofthe child restraint during driving orin a crash.The child restraint may have asingle tether (A) or a dual tether (C).Either will have a singleattachment (B) to secure thetop tether to the anchor.Some child restraints that have atop tether are designed for usewith or without the top tether beingattached. Others require thetop tether always to be attached.In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached. Be sure to read andfollow the instructions for thechild restraint.
Black plate (44,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20123-44 Seats and RestraintsLower Anchor and Top TetherAnchor LocationsRear SeatI(Top Tether Anchor): Seatingpositions with top tether anchors.H(Lower Anchor): Seatingpositions with two lower anchors.To assist in locating the loweranchors, each rear anchor positionhas a label, near the creasebetween the seatback and theseat cushion.To assist in locating the top tetheranchors, the top tether anchorsymbol is on the cover.The top tether anchors are underthe covers, behind the rear seat, onthe filler panel. Be sure to use ananchor on the same side of thevehicle as the seating positionwhere the child restraint willbe placed.Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be attached, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top tethermust be attached.
Black plate (45,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Seats and Restraints 3-45According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition. See Where to Put theRestraint on page 3‑41 foradditional information.Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCHSystem{WARNINGIf a LATCH-type child restraint isnot attached to anchors, the childrestraint will not be able to protectthe child correctly. In a crash, thechild could be seriously injured orkilled. Install a LATCH-type childrestraint properly using theanchors, or use the vehicle safetybelts to secure the restraint,following the instructions thatcame with the child restraint andthe instructions in this manual.{WARNINGDo not attach more than one childrestraint to a single anchor.Attaching more than one childrestraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachmentto come loose or even breakduring a crash. A child or otherscould be injured. To reduce therisk of serious or fatal injuriesduring a crash, attach only onechild restraint per anchor.{WARNINGChildren can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Buckle any unused safetybelts behind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pullthe shoulder belt all the way out(Continued)WARNING (Continued)of the retractor to set the lock,if the vehicle has one, after thechild restraint has been installed.Notice: Do not let the LATCHattachments rub against thevehicle’s safety belts. This maydamage these parts. If necessary,move buckled safety belts toavoid rubbing the LATCHattachments.Do not fold the empty rear seatwith a safety belt buckled. Thiscould damage the safety belt orthe seat. Unbuckle and return thesafety belt to its stowed position,before folding the seat.If you need to secure more than onechild restraint in the rear seat, seeWhere to Put the Restraint onpage 3‑41.You cannot secure three childrestraints using the LATCH anchorsin the rear seat at the same time,
Black plate (46,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20123-46 Seats and Restraintsbut you can install two of them.If you want to do this, install oneLATCH child restraint in thepassenger-side position, and installthe other one either in thedriver-side position or in the centerposition. If you need to install childrestraints in both the center anddriver‐side position, the one in thecenter seating position will need tobe secured using the vehicle safetybelts instead of the LATCH anchors.Refer to the following illustration tolearn which anchors to use.A. Passenger Side Rear SeatingPosition and Lower Anchors1 and 2B. Center Rear Seating Positionand Lower Anchors 3 and 4C. Driver Side Rear SeatingPosition and Lower Anchors4 and 5There are five lower LATCH anchorsin the rear seat..Use anchors 1 and 2 wheninstalling a child restraint usingLATCH in seating position A..Use anchors 3 and 4 wheninstalling a child restraint usingLATCH in seating position B..Use anchors 4 and 5 wheninstalling a child restraint usingLATCH in seating position C.Installing child restraints usingLATCH in seating positions B and Cat the same time is prohibited.Make sure to attach the childrestraint at the proper anchorlocation.This system is designed to makeinstallation of child restraints easier.When using lower anchors, do notuse the vehicle's safety belts.Instead use the vehicle's anchorsand child restraint attachments tosecure the restraints. Somerestraints also use another vehicleanchor to secure a top tether.1. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments to the loweranchors. If the child restraintdoes not have lowerattachments or the desiredseating position does not have
Black plate (47,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Seats and Restraints 3-47lower anchors, secure the childrestraint with the top tether andthe safety belts. Refer to thechild restraint manufacturerinstructions and the instructionsin this manual.1.1. Find the lower anchors forthe desired seatingposition.1.2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.If the head restraintinterferes with the properinstallation of the childrestraint, the head restraintmay be removed. See“Head Restraint Removaland Reinstallation”at theend of this section.1.3. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments on the childrestraint to the loweranchors.2. If the child restraint manufacturerrecommends that the top tetherbe attached, attach and tightenthe top tether to the top tetheranchor, if equipped. Refer to thechild restraint instructions andthe following steps:2.1. Find the top tether anchor.Open the cover to exposethe anchor.2.2. Route, attach, and tightenthe top tether according tothe child restraintinstructions and thefollowing instructions:.If the position you are usingdoes not have a headrestor head restraint, or theheadrest or head restrainthas been removed, and youare using a single tether,route the tether over theseatback..If the position you are usingdoes not have a headrestor head restraint, or theheadrest or head restrainthas been removed, and youare using a dual tether,route the tether over theseatback.
Black plate (48,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20123-48 Seats and Restraints.If the position you are usinghas an adjustable headrestor head restraint and youare using a single tether,route the tether under theheadrest or head restraintand in between theheadrest or head restraintposts. See Head Restraintson page 3‑2..If the position you are usinghas an adjustable headrestor head restraint and youare using a dual tether,route the tether around theheadrest or head restraint.3. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at theLATCH path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. There should be nomore than 2.5 cm (1 in) ofmovement, for properinstallation.
Black plate (49,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Seats and Restraints 3-49Head Restraint Removal andReinstallationThe rear outboard head restraintscan be removed if they interfere withthe proper installation of the childrestraint.To remove the head restraint:1. Partially fold the seatbackforward. See Rear Seats onpage 3‑11 for additionalinformation.2. Press both buttons on the headrestraint posts at the same time,and pull up on the headrestraint.3. Store the head restraint in thetrunk of the vehicle.4. When the child restraint isremoved, reinstall the headrestraint before the seatingposition is used.{WARNINGWith head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do notdrive until the head restraints forall occupants are installed andadjusted properly.
Black plate (50,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20123-50 Seats and RestraintsTo reinstall the head restraint:1. Insert the head restraint postsinto the holes in the top of theseatback. The notches (A) onthe posts must face the driverside of the vehicle.2. Push the head restraint down.If necessary, press the heightadjustment release button tofurther lower the head restraint.See Head Restraints onpage 3‑2.3. Try to move the head restraintto make sure that it is lockedin place.Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash{WARNINGA crash can damage the LATCHsystem in the vehicle. A damagedLATCH system may not properlysecure the child restraint,resulting in serious injury or evendeath in a crash. To help makesure the LATCH system isworking properly after a crash,see your dealer to have thesystem inspected and anynecessary replacements made assoon as possible.If the vehicle has the LATCH systemand it was being used during acrash, new LATCH system partsmay be needed.New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the LATCHsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat)When securing a child restraintin a rear seating position, study theinstructions that came with thechild restraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑42 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint issecured in the vehicle using asafety belt and it uses a top tether,see Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 3‑42 for top tether anchorlocations.
Black plate (51,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Seats and Restraints 3-51Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.If the child restraint does not havethe LATCH system, you will beusing the safety belt to secure thechild restraint in this position. Besure to follow the instructions thatcame with the child restraint. Securethe child in the child restraint whenand as the instructions say.If more than one child restraintneeds to be installed in the rearseat, be sure to read Where to Putthe Restraint on page 3‑41.1. Put the child restraint onthe seat.If the head restraint interfereswith the proper installation of thechild restraint, the head restraintmay be removed. See “HeadRestraint Removal andReinstallation”under LowerAnchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 3‑42.2. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.4. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.
Black plate (52,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20123-52 Seats and Restraints5. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint, itmay be helpful to use your kneeto push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 4 and 5.6. If the child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer's instructionsregarding the use of the toptether. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑42 for moreinformation.7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.If the top tether is attached to a toptether anchor, disconnect it. If thehead restraint was removed,reinstall it before the seatingposition is used. See “HeadRestraint Removal andReinstallation”under Lower Anchorsand Tethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑42 for additionalinformation on installing the headrestraint properly.Securing Child Restraints(Front Passenger Seat)This vehicle has airbags. A rearseat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. SeeWhere to Put the Restraint onpage 3‑41.In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system which isdesigned to turn off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag and seat‐mounted side impact airbag undercertain conditions. See PassengerSensing System on page 3‑27 andPassenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 5‑15 for more information,including important safetyinformation.
Black plate (53,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Seats and Restraints 3-53A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front.”This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great if theairbag deploys.{WARNINGA child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates.This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.(Continued)WARNING (Continued)Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3‑27 for additionalinformation.If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑42 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint issecured using a safety belt and ituses a top tether, see LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3‑42 fortop tether anchor locations.Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.
Black plate (54,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20123-54 Seats and RestraintsYou will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint inthis position. Follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.1. Move the seat as far back as itwill go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbagand seat‐mounted side airbag,the off indicator on thepassenger airbag statusindicator should light and staylit when you start the vehicle.See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5‑15.2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.3. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.4. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.5. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.
Black plate (55,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Seats and Restraints 3-556. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint, itmay be helpful to use your kneeto push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 5 and 6.7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.If the airbags are off, the offindicator in the passenger airbagstatus indicator will come on andstay on when the vehicle is started.If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit, see “If theOn Indicator Is Lit for a ChildRestraint ”under PassengerSensing System on page 3‑27 formore information.To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.
Black plate (56,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20123-56 Seats and Restraints2NOTES
Black plate (1,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Storage 4-1StorageStorage CompartmentsGlove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Front Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-2Additional Storage FeaturesConvenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3StorageCompartmentsGlove BoxThe glove box is located on thepassenger side of the instrumentpanel. Lift up on the lever to open it.CupholdersThere are removable cupholderslocated in the center console.Slide the cover (A) to accessthe cupholders.Cupholders are also located in therear center armrest.
Black plate (2,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20124-2 StorageFront StoragePull up on the handle (A) and pullthe cover down to open.Center Console StorageThe armrest can be adjusted bysliding it to the desired position.The center console has an uppertray and a lower main storage area.To access the main storage area,adjust the armrest to the rearposition and push button (A) toopen. Push button (B) to accessthe upper tray.An accessory power outlet is in thelower area. See Power Outlets onpage 5‑6.Some vehicles might also haveinput jacks for auxiliary audiodevices. See Auxiliary Devices(Radio with CD) on page 7‑38 orAuxiliary Devices (Radio with CD/DVD and MEM) on page 7‑41 orAuxiliary Devices (Radio with CDand Touchscreen) on page 7‑44.
Black plate (3,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Storage 4-3Additional StorageFeaturesConvenience NetUse the convenience net located inthe trunk to store small loads as farforward as possible. The net shouldnot be used to store heavy loads.Attach the net so the opening isfacing up. Attach the net loops tothe hooks on the rear panel of thetrunk.
Black plate (4,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20124-4 Storage2NOTES
Black plate (1,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Instruments and Controls 5-1Instruments andControlsControlsSteering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-2Heated Steering Wheel . . . . . . . 5-3Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-3Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Clock (With Date Display) . . . . . 5-5Clock (Without DateDisplay) ..................... 5-6Clock (Color Radio) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Driver Efficiency Gauge . . . . . . 5-12Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-14Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-14Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-16MalfunctionIndicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16Brake System WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19Electric Parking BrakeLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21StabiliTrak®OFF Light . . . . . . . 5-21Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak®Light . . . . 5-21Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-23Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-23Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 5-24Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-24Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . 5-25Taillamp Indicator Light . . . . . . 5-25Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-25Information DisplaysDriver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25Head-Up Display (HUD) . . . . . 5-29Vehicle MessagesVehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33Battery Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33Brake System Messages . . . . 5-33Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-34Cruise Control Messages . . . . 5-34Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-34Engine Cooling SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-35Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-36Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-36Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-36Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36Object Detection SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37Ride Control SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37Anti-theft Alarm SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38Starting the VehicleMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Black plate (2,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20125-2 Instruments and ControlsTire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-39Window Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40Vehicle PersonalizationVehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-40Universal Remote SystemUniversal Remote System . . . 5-46Universal Remote SystemProgramming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46Universal Remote SystemOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49ControlsSteering WheelAdjustmentTo adjust the steering wheel:1. Pull the lever (A) down.2. Move the steering wheel upor down.3. Pull or push the steering wheelcloser or away from you.4. Pull the lever (A) up to lock thesteering wheel in place.Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.Steering Wheel ControlsFor vehicles with audio steeringwheel controls, some audio controlscan be adjusted at the steeringwheel.b/g(Push to Talk): For vehicleswith a Bluetooth®, OnStar,or navigation system, press tointeract with those systems. SeeBluetooth (Overview) on page 7‑57or Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls)
Black plate (3,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Instruments and Controls 5-3on page 7‑59 or Bluetooth (VoiceRecognition) on page 7‑64 orBluetooth (UHP Mexico Only) onpage 7‑70,OnStar Overview onpage 14‑1, or the navigation manualfor more information.$/i(Mute/End Call): Press tosilence the vehicle speakers only.Press again to turn the sound on.For vehicles with OnStar orBluetooth systems, press to rejectan incoming call, or end acurrent call._SRC ^(Rotary Control):Turn to select an audio source.Press _or ^to select the next orprevious favorite radio station, CD,or MP3 track.+x−(Volume): Press + toincrease the volume. Press −todecrease the volume.Heated Steering WheelFor vehicles with a heated steeringwheel, the button for this feature islocated on the climate controlsystem.(:Press to turn the heatedsteering wheel on or off. A light onthe button displays when the featureis turned on.The steering wheel takes aboutthree minutes to start heating.HornPress aon the steering wheelpad to sound the horn.Windshield Wiper/WasherThe windshield wiper lever is on theright side of the steering column.With the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, movethe windshield wiper lever to selectthe wiper speed.2: Use for fast wipes.1: Use for slow wipes.
Black plate (4,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20125-4 Instruments and Controls3(Adjustable Interval Wipes):Turn the band up for more frequentwipes or down for less frequentwipes.9(Off): Use to turn the windshieldwipers off.3(Mist): Briefly move the wiperlever down for a single wipe or holddown for several wipes.Clear ice and snow from the wiperblades before using them. If theyare frozen to the windshield,carefully loosen or thaw them.Damaged wiper blades should bereplaced. See Wiper BladeReplacement on page 10‑27.Heavy snow or ice can overload thewipers. A circuit breaker stops themuntil the motor cools.Wipe ParkingIf the ignition is turned to LOCK/OFF while the wipers are on 1, 2,or 3, they will immediately stop.If the windshield wiper lever is thenmoved to 9before the driver dooris opened, or within 10 minutes, thewipers will restart and move to thebase of the windshield.If the ignition is turned to LOCK/OFF during a windshield wash, thewipers will stop when they reach thebase of the windshield.Windshield WasherPull the windshield wiper levertoward you to spray windshieldwasher fluid and activate the wipers.The wipers will continue until thelever is released or the maximumwash time is reached.When the windshield wiper lever isreleased, additional wipes mayoccur depending on how long thewindshield washer had beenactivated.See Washer Fluid on page 10‑22 forinformation on filling the windshieldwasher fluid reservoir.{WARNINGIn freezing weather, do not usethe washer until the windshield iswarmed. Otherwise the washerfluid can form ice on thewindshield, blocking your vision.CompassThe vehicle may have a compassdisplay on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). The compass receivesits heading and other informationfrom the Global PositioningSystem (GPS) antenna, StabiliTrak,and vehicle speed information.Avoid covering the GPS antenna forlong periods of time with objectsthat may interfere with the antenna'sability to receive a satellite signal.
Black plate (5,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Instruments and Controls 5-5See Backglass Antenna onpage 7‑25 and Satellite RadioAntenna on page 7‑26 for thelocation of the vehicle's antennas.The compass system is designed tooperate for a certain number ofmiles or degrees of turn beforeneeding a signal from the GPSsatellites. When the compassdisplay shows CAL, drive thevehicle for a short distance in anopen area where it can receive aGPS signal. The compass systemwill automatically determine whenthe GPS signal is restored andprovide a heading again. SeeCompass Messages on page 5‑34for more information on themessages that may be displayed forthe compass.Clock (With Date Display)The infotainment system controlsare used to access the time anddate settings through the menusystem. See Operation onpage 7‑12 for information abouthow to use the menu system.Setting the Time and Date1. Press the CONFIG button andselect Time and Date Settings,or press H.2. Select Set Time or Set Date.3. Turn the Menu knob to adjustthe highlighted value.4. Press SELECT to select thenext value.5. To save the time or date andreturn to the Time and DateSettings menu, press the/BACK button at any time orpress SELECT after adjustingthe minutes or year.Setting the 12/24 Hour Format1. Press the CONFIG button andselect Time and Date Settings,or press H.2. Highlight Set Time Format.3. Press SELECT to select the12 hour or 24 hour displayformat.Setting the Month and DayFormat1. Press the CONFIG button andselect Time and Date Settings,or press H.2. Highlight Set Date Format.3. Press SELECT to selectMM/DD/YY (month/day/year) orDD/MM/YY (day/month/year).Setting the Auto Time Adjust1. Press the CONFIG button andselect Time and Date Settings,or press H.2. Highlight Auto Time Adjust.3. Press SELECT to turn AutoTime Adjust on or off.4. Press SELECT to select TimeZone, and then select theTime Zone.5. Press SELECT to turn DaylightSavings on or off.
Black plate (6,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20125-6 Instruments and ControlsClock (Without DateDisplay)The infotainment system controlsare used to access the time anddate settings through the menusystem. See Operation onpage 7‑12 for information abouthow to use the menu system.Setting the Time1. Press the CONFIG button andselect Time Settings,or press H.2. Select Set Time.3. Turn the Menu knob to adjustthe highlighted value.4. Press SELECT to select thenext value.5. To save the time and return tothe Time Settings menu, pressthe /BACK button at any timeor press SELECT after adjustingthe minutes.Setting the 12/24 Hour Format1. Press the CONFIG button andselect Time Settings,or press H.2. Highlight 12/24 Hour Format.3. Press SELECT to select the12 hour or 24 hour displayformat.Clock (Color Radio)The clock is in the center stackdisplay.To set the time:1. Press the CONFIG button toenter the menu options. Turn theMenu knob to scroll through theavailable setup features. PressSELECT or press the Timescreen button to display otheroptions within that feature.2. Press + or −to decrease orincrease the Hours and Minutesdisplayed on the clock.12/24 HR Format: Press the12 HR screen button for standardtime; press the 24 HR screen buttonfor military time.Day + or Day −:Press the Day +or Day −display buttons to increaseor decrease the day.Display: Press Display to turn thedisplay of the time on the screen onor off.Power OutletsThe accessory power outlet can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone or MP3 player.This outlet is located under thearmrest inside the center consolestorage.The outlet is powered when theignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or until the driverdoor is opened within 10 minutes ofturning off the vehicle. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 9‑25.
Black plate (7,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Instruments and Controls 5-7Open the protective cover to usethe accessory power outlet.Certain electrical accessoriesmay not be compatible with theaccessory power outlet andcould overload vehicle or adapterfuses. If there is a problem, seeyour dealer.When adding electrical equipment,be sure to follow the installationinstructions included with theequipment. See Add-On ElectricalEquipment on page 9‑60.Notice: Hanging heavyequipment from the power outletcan cause damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty. Thepower outlets are designed foraccessory power plugs only, suchas cell phone charge cords.Power Outlet 110 Volt AlternatingCurrentThe vehicle may have a poweroutlet that can be used to plug inelectrical equipment with amaximum limit of 150 watts.The power outlet is located on therear of the center console.An indicator light on the outletcomes on when in use. The lightcomes on when the ignition is inON/RUN, equipment requiring lessthan 150 watts is plugged into theoutlet, and no system fault isdetected.The indicator light on the outlet willnot turn on if the plug is not fullyseated.If you try to connect equipmentusing more than 150 watts or asystem fault is detected, theequipment may operate for ashort period and turn itself off.A protection circuit shuts off thepower supply and the indicator lightturns off. To reset the circuit, unplugthe item and plug it back in or turnthe Remote Accessory Power (RAP)off and then back on. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 9‑25. Prolonged usage of thepower outlet at the maximum load of150 watts may cause the outlet tooverheat and automatically shutdown. The power restarts whenequipment that operates within thelimit is plugged into the outlet and asystem fault is not detected.
Black plate (8,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20125-8 Instruments and ControlsThe power outlet is not designed forthe following equipment, and maynot work properly if any of thefollowing is plugged in:.Equipment with high initial peakwattage such as:compressor-driven refrigeratorsand electric power tools..Other equipment requiring anextremely stable power supplysuch as:microcomputer-controlledelectric blankets, touch sensorlamps, etc.Warning Lights,Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning lights and gauges cansignal that something is wrongbefore it becomes serious enoughto cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to thewarning lights and gauges couldprevent injury.Warning lights come on when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Some warning lights comeon briefly when the engine is startedto indicate they are working.Gauges can indicate when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Often gauges and warninglights work together to indicate aproblem with the vehicle.When one of the warning lightscomes on and stays on whiledriving, or when one of the gaugesshows there may be a problem,check the section that explains whatto do. Follow this manual's advice.Waiting to do repairs can be costlyand even dangerous.
Black plate (9,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Instruments and Controls 5-9Instrument ClusterEnglish Shown, Metric Similar
Black plate (10,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20125-10 Instruments and ControlsEnglish eAssist Shown, Metric eAssist Similar
Black plate (11,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Instruments and Controls 5-11SpeedometerThe speedometer shows thevehicle's speed in either kilometersper hour (km/h) or miles perhour (mph).OdometerThe odometer shows how far thevehicle has been driven, in eitherkilometers or miles.This vehicle has a tamper-resistantodometer. If the vehicle needs anew odometer installed, the newone is set to the mileage of the oldodometer. If this is not possible, it isset at zero and a label is put on thedriver door to show the old mileagereading.TachometerThe tachometer displays theengine speed in revolutions perminute (rpm).For eAssist vehicles, whenthe ignition is in ON/RUN, thetachometer indicates the vehiclestatus. When pointing to AUTOSTOP, the engine is off but thevehicle is on and can move. Theengine could auto start at any time.When the indicator points to OFF,the vehicle is off.When the engine is on, thetachometer will indicate the engine’srevolutions per minute (rpm). Thetachometer may vary by severalhundred rpm’s, during auto stopmode, when the engine is shuttingoff and restarting.A slight bump may be felt when thetransmission is determining themost fuel efficient operating range.Fuel GaugeMetric
Black plate (12,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20125-12 Instruments and ControlsEnglishWhen the ignition is on, the fuelgauge indicates about how muchfuel is left in the tank.An arrow on the fuel gaugeindicates the side of the vehicle thefuel door is on.When the indicator nears empty, thelow fuel light comes on. There is stilla little fuel left, but the fuel tankshould be filled soon.Here are four things that someowners ask about. None of theseshow a problem with the fuel gauge:.At the service station, the fuelpump shuts off before the gaugereads full..It takes a little more or less fuelto fill up than the gaugeindicated. For example, thegauge indicated the tank washalf full, but it actually took alittle more or less than half thetank's capacity to fill the tank..The gauge moves a little whileturning a corner or speeding up..The gauge takes a few secondsto stabilize after the ignition isturned on, and goes back toempty when the ignition isturned off.Driver Efficiency GaugeFor eAssist vehicles, this gaugeassists in driving efficiently and willvary based on driver input.To maximize efficiency keep thegauge pointed in the solid greenzone in the center of the gauge.The gauge moves to the left whenbraking and to the right whenaccelerating. When either are doneaggressively, the vehicle is beingdriven less efficiently and the gaugewill move further from the center.
Black plate (13,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Instruments and Controls 5-13Engine CoolantTemperature GaugeMetricEnglishThis gauge shows the enginecoolant temperature.If the gauge pointer moves towardthe shaded area, the engine istoo hot.In eAssist vehicles, the enginecoolant warning light comes onwhen the engine is too hot. SeeEngine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light on page 5‑22 inthis section.This reading indicates the samething as the warning light. It meansthat the engine coolant hasoverheated. If the vehicle has beenoperating under normal drivingconditions, pull off the road, stop thevehicle, and turn off the engine assoon as possible. See EngineOverheating on page 10‑19 for moreinformation.
Black plate (14,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20125-14 Instruments and ControlsSafety Belt RemindersDriver Safety Belt ReminderLightThere is a driver safety beltreminder light on the instrumentpanel cluster.When the vehicle is started, thislight flashes and a chime may comeon to remind the driver to fastentheir safety belt. Then the light stayson solid until the belt is buckled.This cycle may continue severaltimes if the driver remains orbecomes unbuckled while thevehicle is moving.If the driver safety belt is buckled,neither the light nor the chimecomes on.Passenger Safety BeltReminder LightWhen the vehicle is started, thislight flashes and a chime may comeon to remind front passengers tofasten their safety belt. Then thelight stays on solid until thebelt is buckled.This cycle continues several timesif the front passenger remains orbecomes unbuckled while thevehicle is moving.If the front passenger safety belt isbuckled, neither the chime nor thelight comes on.The front passenger safety beltreminder light and chime may turnon if an object is put on the seatsuch as a briefcase, handbag,grocery bag, laptop, or otherelectronic device. To turn off thereminder light and/or chime, removethe object from the seat or bucklethe safety belt.Airbag Readiness LightThis light shows if there is anelectrical problem. The systemcheck includes the airbag sensor(s),passenger sensing system, thepretensioners, the airbag modules,the wiring, and the crash sensingand diagnostic module. For moreinformation on the airbag system,see Airbag System on page 3‑21.The airbag readiness light comes onand stays on for several secondswhen the vehicle is started.Then the light goes out.
Black plate (15,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Instruments and Controls 5-15{WARNINGIf the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is started orcomes on while driving, it meansthe airbag system might not beworking properly. The airbags inthe vehicle might not inflate in acrash, or they could even inflatewithout a crash. To help avoidinjury, have the vehicle servicedright away.Passenger Airbag StatusIndicatorThe vehicle has a passengersensing system. See PassengerSensing System on page 3‑27 forimportant safety information. Theinstrument panel has a passengerairbag status indicator.When the vehicle is started, thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light ON and OFF for severalseconds as a system check.If you are using remote start,if equipped, to start the vehicle froma distance, you may not see thesystem check. Then, after severalmore seconds, the status indicatorwill light either ON or OFF to let youknow the status of the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag.If the word ON is lit on thepassenger airbag status indicator, itmeans that the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag is allowedto inflate.If the word OFF is lit on the airbagstatus indicator, it means that thepassenger sensing system hasturned off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag.If, after several seconds, both statusindicator lights remain on, or if thereare no lights at all, there may be aproblem with the lights or thepassenger sensing system.See your dealer for service.{WARNINGIf the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑14 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.
Black plate (16,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20125-16 Instruments and ControlsCharging System LightThe charging system light comes onbriefly when the ignition is turnedon, but the engine is not running, asa check to show the light is working.The light turns off when the engineis started. If it does not, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.If the light stays on, or comes onwhile driving, there could be aproblem with the electrical chargingsystem. Have it checked by yourdealer. Driving while this light is oncould drain the battery.If a short distance must be drivenwith the light on, be sure to turn offall accessories, such as the radioand air conditioner.MalfunctionIndicator LampA computer system called OBD II(On-Board Diagnostics-SecondGeneration) monitors the operationof the vehicle to ensure emissionsare at acceptable levels, to producea cleaner environment. This lightcomes on when the vehicle isplaced in ON/RUN for key access orService Only Mode for keylessaccess, as a check to show it isworking. If it does not, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.See Ignition Positions (Key Access)on page 9‑16 or Ignition Positions(Keyless Access) on page 9‑18 formore information.This light should come on when theignition is on, but the engine is notrunning, as a check to show it isworking. If it does not, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on and stays on while theengine is running, this indicates thatthere is an OBD II problem andservice is required.Malfunctions often are indicated bythe system before any problem isapparent. Being aware of the lightcan prevent more serious damageto the vehicle. This system assiststhe dealer technician in correctlydiagnosing any malfunction.
Black plate (17,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Instruments and Controls 5-17Notice: If the vehicle iscontinually driven with this lighton, the emission controls mightnot work as well, the vehicle fueleconomy might not be as good,and the engine might not run assmoothly. This could lead tocostly repairs that might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Notice: Modifications made to theengine, transmission, exhaust,intake, or fuel system of thevehicle or the replacement of theoriginal tires with other thanthose of the same TirePerformance Criteria (TPC) canaffect the vehicle's emissioncontrols and can cause this lightto come on. Modifications tothese systems could lead tocostly repairs not covered by thevehicle warranty. This could alsoresult in a failure to pass arequired Emission Inspection/Maintenance test. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10‑3.This light comes on during amalfunction in one of two ways:Light Flashing: A misfire conditionhas been detected. A misfireincreases vehicle emissions andcould damage the emission controlsystem on the vehicle. Diagnosisand service might be required.To prevent more serious damage tothe vehicle:.Reduce vehicle speed..Avoid hard accelerations..Avoid steep uphill grades..If towing a trailer, reduce theamount of cargo being hauled assoon as it is possible.If the light continues to flash, whenit is safe to do so, stop the vehicle.Find a safe place to park. Turn thevehicle off, wait at least 10 seconds,and restart the engine. If the light isstill flashing, follow the previoussteps and see your dealer forservice as soon as possible.Light On Steady: An emissioncontrol system malfunction hasbeen detected on the vehicle.Diagnosis and service might berequired.The following may correct anemissions system malfunction:.Check that the fuel cap is fullyinstalled. See Filling the Tank onpage 9‑52. The diagnosticsystem can determine if the fuelcap has been left off orimproperly installed. A loose ormissing fuel cap allows fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere.A few driving trips with the capproperly installed should turn thelight off.
Black plate (18,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20125-18 Instruments and Controls.Check that good quality fuel isused. Poor fuel quality causesthe engine not to run asefficiently as designed and maycause stalling after start-up,stalling when the vehicle ischanged into gear, misfiring,hesitation on acceleration,or stumbling on acceleration.These conditions might go awayonce the engine is warmed up.If one or more of these conditionsoccurs, change the fuel brand used.It will require at least one full tank ofthe proper fuel to turn the light off.See Recommended Fuel onpage 9‑49.If none of the above have made thelight turn off, your dealer can checkthe vehicle. The dealer has theproper test equipment anddiagnostic tools to fix anymechanical or electrical problemsthat might have developed.Emissions Inspection andMaintenance ProgramsSome local governments may haveprograms to inspect the on-vehicleemission control equipment. For theinspection, the emission system testequipment is connected to thevehicle’s Data LinkConnector (DLC).The DLC is under the instrumentpanel to the left of the steeringwheel. See your dealer if assistanceis needed.The vehicle may not passinspection if:.The malfunction indicator lamp ison with the engine running, or ifthe light does not come on whenthe ignition is turned to ON/RUNwhile the engine is off..The OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics) system determinesthat critical emission controlsystems have not beencompletely diagnosed. Thevehicle would be considered notready for inspection. This canhappen if the 12-volt battery hasrecently been replaced or rundown. The diagnostic system isdesigned to evaluate criticalemission control systems duringnormal driving. This can takeseveral days of routine driving.If this has been done and thevehicle still does not pass theinspection for lack of OBD IIsystem readiness, your dealercan prepare the vehicle forinspection.
Black plate (19,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Instruments and Controls 5-19Brake System WarningLightThe vehicle brake system consistsof two hydraulic circuits. If onecircuit is not working, the remainingcircuit can still work to stop thevehicle. For normal brakingperformance, both circuits need tobe working.If the warning light comes on, thereis a brake problem. Have your brakesystem inspected right away.If the vehicle has antilock brakes,this light should come on when thevehicle is placed in START. If it doesnot, have the vehicle serviced byyour dealer.If the light comes on while driving,pull off the road and stop carefully.The pedal may be harder to push orit can go closer to the floor. It maytake longer to stop. Try turning offand restarting the vehicle one or twotimes. If the light is still on, have thevehicle towed for service. SeeAntilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light on page 5‑20 andTowing the Vehicle on page 10‑94.{WARNINGThe brake system might not beworking properly if the brakesystem warning light is on.Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to acrash. If the light is still on afterthe vehicle has been pulled offthe road and carefully stopped,have the vehicle towed forservice.Electric Parking BrakeLightEnglish MetricFor vehicles with the ElectricParking Brake (EPB), the parkingbrake status light comes on whenthe parking brake is applied. If thelight continues flashing after theparking brake is released, or whiledriving, there is a problem with theElectric Parking Brake system.A SERVICE PARKING BRAKEmessage may also display in theDriver Information Center (DIC).See Brake System Messages onpage 5‑33 for more information.If the light does not come on,or remains flashing, see your dealer.
Black plate (20,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20125-20 Instruments and ControlsFor vehicles with the ElectricParking Brake (EPB), the parkingbrake warning light should come onbriefly when ignition is placed in ON/RUN. If it does not come on, thenhave it fixed so it will be ready towarn if there is a problem.If this light comes on, there is aproblem with a system on thevehicle that is causing the parkingbrake system to work at a reducedlevel. The vehicle can still be driven,but should be taken to a dealer assoon as possible. See ParkingBrake on page 9‑34 for moreinformation.For vehicles with the uplevel oreAssist cluster, this telltaledisplays in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) screen.Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning LightThis light comes on briefly when theengine is started.If the light does not come on, have itfixed so it will be ready to warn ifthere is a problem.If the ABS light stays on, turn theignition off.If the light comes on while driving,stop as soon as it is safely possibleand turn off the vehicle. Then startthe engine again to reset thesystem. If the ABS light stays on,or comes on again while driving,the vehicle needs service. A chimemay also sound when the lightcomes on steady.If the ABS light is the only light on,the vehicle has regular brakes, butthe antilock brakes are notfunctioning.If both the ABS and the brakesystem warning light are on, thevehicle's antilock brakes are notfunctioning and there is a problemwith the regular brakes. See yourdealer for service.See Brake System Warning Light onpage 5‑19.See Brake System Messages onpage 5‑33 for all brake relatedDIC messages.
Black plate (21,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Instruments and Controls 5-21Traction Off LightThis light comes on when theTraction Control System (TCS) hasbeen turned off by pressing andreleasing the TCS/StabiliTrakbutton.This light also comes on and thesystem turns off if there is a problemwith the traction control system.If the light comes on and stays onfor an extended period of time whilethe system is turned on, the vehicleneeds service.See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 9‑36 and StabiliTrak®System on page 9‑37 for moreinformation.StabiliTrak®OFF LightThis light comes on when theStabiliTrak system is turned off.If the Traction Control System (TCS)is off, wheel spin is not limited.If StabiliTrak is off, the system doesnot assist in controlling the vehicle.Turn on the TCS and the StabiliTraksystem and the warning lightturns off.See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 9‑36 and StabiliTrak®System on page 9‑37 for moreinformation.Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak®LightThe Traction Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak light comes on brieflywhen the engine is started.If the light does not come on, havethe vehicle serviced by the dealer.If the system is working normally,the indicator light turns off.If the light is on while certain DICmessages display, this indicatesthat the TCS and StabiliTraksystems are not working or aredisabled.If the light is on and not flashing,the TCS and potentially theStabiliTrak system have beendisabled.
Black plate (22,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20125-22 Instruments and ControlsCheck the DIC messages todetermine which feature(s) is nolonger functioning and whether it isbecause of the driver turning off thefeature(s), or because the system isnot working properly and the vehiclerequires service.If the TCS is disabled, wheel spin isnot limited. If the StabiliTrak systemis disabled, the system does not aidin maintaining directional control ofthe vehicle.If the indicator/warning light is onand flashing, the TCS or theStabiliTrak system is activelyworking. Check the DIC messagesfor details to determine whichsystem is working. If the LOWTRACTION message appears, thesystem is limiting wheel spin. If amessage appears in the DIC, thesystem is aiding in maintainingdirectional control of the vehicle.See StabiliTrak®System onpage 9‑37 and Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 9‑36 formore information.See Ride Control System Messageson page 5‑37 for more informationon the messages associated withthis light.For vehicles with an uplevel cluster,this light comes on in the Driverinformation Center (DIC).Engine CoolantTemperature WarningLightFor eAssist vehicles, this lightcomes on briefly while starting thevehicle.If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by the dealer. If the systemis working normally, the indicatorlight goes off.Notice: Driving with the enginecoolant temperature warning lighton could cause the vehicle tooverheat. See Engine Overheatingon page 10‑19. The vehicle'sengine could be damaged, and itmight not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Never drive withthe engine coolant temperaturewarning light on.The engine coolant temperaturewarning light comes on when theengine has overheated.If this happens pull over and turn offthe engine as soon as possible. SeeEngine Overheating on page 10‑19for more information.
Black plate (23,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Instruments and Controls 5-23Tire Pressure LightFor vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), this lightcomes on briefly when the engine isstarted. It provides informationabout tire pressures and the TPMS.When the Light Is On SteadyThis indicates that one or more ofthe tires are significantlyunderinflated.A Driver Information Center (DIC)tire pressure message may alsodisplay. See Vehicle Messages onpage 5‑33 for more information.Stop as soon as possible, andinflate the tires to the pressure valueshown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Tire Pressureon page 10‑51 for more information.When the Light Flashes First andThen Is On SteadyIf the light flashes for about a minuteand then stays on, there may be aproblem with the TPMS. If theproblem is not corrected, the lightwill come on at every ignition cycle.See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10‑54 for moreinformation.Engine Oil Pressure Light{WARNINGDo not keep driving if the oilpressure is low. The engine canbecome so hot that it catches fire.Someone could be burned. Checkthe oil as soon as possible andhave the vehicle serviced.Notice: Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always follow the maintenanceschedule for changing engine oil.The oil pressure light should comeon briefly as the engine is started.If it does not come on have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.If the light comes on and stays on, itmeans that oil is not flowing throughthe engine properly. The vehiclecould be low on oil and might havesome other system problem. Seeyour dealer.For vehicles with the uplevel oreAssist cluster, this telltale displaysin the Driver Information Center(DIC) screen.
Black plate (24,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20125-24 Instruments and ControlsLow Fuel Warning LightThis light, below the fuel gauge,comes on briefly when the engineis started.If it does not come on have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.If the system is working normally,the indicator light then goes off.This light also comes on when thefuel tank is low on fuel. When fuelis added the light should go off.If it does not, have your vehicleserviced.For vehicles with an uplevel oreAssist cluster, this telltaledisplays in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) screen.Security LightThe immobilizer light should comeon briefly as the engine is started.If it does not come on, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.If the system is working normally,the indicator light turns off.If the light stays on and the enginedoes not start, there could be aproblem with the theft-deterrentsystem. See Immobilizer Operation(Key Access) on page 2‑14 orImmobilizer Operation (KeylessAccess) on page 2‑15 for moreinformation.High-Beam On LightThis light comes on when thehigh-beam headlamps are in use.See Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger on page 6‑2for moreinformation.
Black plate (25,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Instruments and Controls 5-25Front Fog Lamp LightFor vehicles with fog lamps, thislight comes on when the fog lampsare on.The light goes out when the foglamps are turned off. See FogLamps on page 6‑5for moreinformation.Taillamp Indicator LightThis light comes on when thetaillamps are in use.Cruise Control LightThis light is white whenever thecruise control is set and turns greenwhen the cruise control is active.The light goes out when the cruisecontrol is turned off. See CruiseControl on page 9‑40 for moreinformation.For vehicles with the uplevel oreAssist cluster, this telltale will beshown in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) screen.Information DisplaysDriver InformationCenter (DIC)The Driver Information Center (DIC)displays information about thevehicle. It also displays warningmessages if a system problem isdetected. See Vehicle Messages onpage 5‑33 for more information. Allmessages appear in the DIC displaylocated in the center of theinstrument panel cluster.On some models, the DIC mayshow warning lights or indicators inthe top portion of the display. SeeWarning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators on page 5‑8for moreinformation.The vehicle may also have featuresthat can be customized through thecontrols on the radio. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑40 formore information.
Black plate (26,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20125-26 Instruments and ControlsDIC Operation and DisplaysThe DIC has different displayswhich can be accessed by using theDIC buttons on the turn signal leverto the left of the steering wheel. TheDIC displays trip, fuel, vehiclesystem information, and warningmessages if a system problem isdetected.The bottom of the DIC displayshows what position the shift leveris in, the odometer, and the directionthe vehicle is driving.In cold weather the DIC display maychange slowly. This is normal andwill move more quickly as thevehicle's interior temperature rises.DIC ButtonsA. SET/CLR: Press to set or clearthe menu item when it isdisplayed.B. w x (Thumbwheel): Use toscroll through the items in eachmenu. A small marker will moveacross the bottom of the pageas you scroll through the items.This shows where each page isin the menu.C. MENU: Press to get to the Trip/Fuel Menu and the VehicleInformation Menu.Trip/Fuel Menu ItemsPress MENU on the turn signallever until Trip/Fuel InformationMenu is displayed. Use w x toscroll through the following menuitems:.Digital Speedometer.Trip 1.Trip 2.Power Flow Gauge(eAssist Only).Fuel Range.Average Fuel Economy/Instantaneous Fuel Economy.Average Vehicle Speed.Timer.Navigation
Black plate (27,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Instruments and Controls 5-27Digital SpeedometerThe speedometer shows how fastthe vehicle is moving in eitherkilometers per hour (km/h) or milesper hour (mph). The speedometercannot be reset.Trip 1 and Trip 2This display shows the currentdistance traveled, in eitherkilometers (km) or miles (mi), sincethe last reset for the trip odometer.The trip odometer can be reset tozero by pressing SET/CLR while thetrip odometer display is showing.Power Flow Gauge (eAssist Only)This display shows the operatingmode of the eAssist system and thehigh voltage battery charge level.The animation indicates thedirection of energy flow.Fuel RangeThis display shows the approximatedistance the vehicle can be drivenwithout refueling. The fuel rangeestimate is based on an average ofthe vehicle's fuel economy overrecent driving history and theamount of fuel remaining in the fueltank. Fuel range cannot be reset.Average Fuel Economy/Instantaneous Fuel EconomyOn some models, this displayshows Average Fuel Economy.On other models, this display showsboth Average Fuel Economy andInstantaneous Fuel Economy.The Average Fuel Economy displayshows the approximate averageliters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km)or miles per gallon (mpg). Thisnumber is calculated based on thenumber of L/100 km (mpg) recordedsince the last time this menu itemwas reset. The fuel economy can bereset by pressing SET/CLR whilethe Average Fuel Economy displayis showing.The Instantaneous Fuel Economydisplay shows the current fueleconomy in liters per 100 kilometers(L/100 km) or miles per gallon(mpg). This number reflects only thefuel economy that the vehicle hasright now and changes frequently asdriving conditions change. Unlikeaverage economy, this displaycannot be reset.Average Vehicle SpeedThis display shows the averagespeed of the vehicle in miles perhour (mph) or kilometers perhour (km/h). This average iscalculated based on the variousvehicle speeds recorded since thelast reset of this value. The averagespeed can be reset by pressingSET/CLR while the Average VehicleSpeed display is showing.
Black plate (28,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20125-28 Instruments and ControlsTimerThis display can be used as a timer.To start the timer, press SET/CLRwhile Timer is displayed. Thedisplay will show the amount of timethat has passed since the timer waslast reset, not including time theignition is off. Time will continue tobe counted as long as the ignition ison, even if another display is beingshown on the DIC. The timer willrecord up to 99 hours, 59 minutes,and 59 seconds (99:59:59) afterwhich the display will return to zero.To stop the timer, press SET/CLRbriefly while Timer is displayed. Toreset the timer to zero, press andhold SET/CLR.NavigationThis display is used for the OnStaror Navigation System Turn-by-Turnguidance. See OnStar Overview onpage 14‑1or the navigation manual,if the vehicle has navigation, formore information.Vehicle Information MenuItemsPress MENU on the turn signallever until Vehicle Information Menuis displayed. Use w x to scrollthrough the following menu items:.Unit.Tire Pressure.Jump Start (eAssist Only).Remaining Oil Life.Battery VoltageUnitMove w x to switch betweenmetric or US when the Unit displayis active. Press SET/CLR to confirmthe setting. This will change thedisplays on the cluster and DIC toeither metric or English (US)measurements.Tire PressureThe display will show a vehicle withthe approximate pressures of allfour tires. Tire pressure is displayedin either kilopascal (kPa) or poundsper square inch (psi). See TirePressure Monitor System onpage 10‑53 and Tire PressureMonitor Operation on page 10‑54 formore information.Jump Start (eAssist Only)This display allows for on-boardjump starting of the vehicle. See“Jump Starting (On-board witheAssist Only)”for more information.Remaining Oil LifeThis display shows an estimate ofthe oil's remaining useful life.If REMAINING OIL LIFE 99% isdisplayed, that means 99% of thecurrent oil life remains.When the remaining oil life is low,the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage will appear on the display.See Engine Oil Messages onpage 5‑35.
Black plate (29,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Instruments and Controls 5-29The oil should be changed as soonas possible. See Engine Oil onpage 10‑9. In addition to the engineoil life system monitoring the oil life,additional maintenance isrecommended in the MaintenanceSchedule in this manual. SeeMaintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3for more information.Remember, the Oil Life display mustbe reset after each oil change. It willnot reset itself. Also, be careful notto reset the Oil Life displayaccidentally at any time other thanwhen the oil has just been changed.It cannot be reset accurately untilthe next oil change. To reset theengine oil life system, press SET/CLR while the Oil Life display isactive. See Engine Oil Life Systemon page 10‑12.Battery VoltageThis display, available on somevehicles, shows the current batteryvoltage. If the voltage is in thenormal range, the value will display.For example, the display may readBattery Voltage 15.0 Volts. Thevehicle's charging system regulatesvoltage based on the state of thebattery. The battery voltage canfluctuate while viewing thisinformation on the DIC. This isnormal. See Charging System Lighton page 5‑16 for more information.If there is a problem with the batterycharging system, the DIC willdisplay a messageCompassThe vehicle may have a compassdisplay in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See Compass onpage 5‑4for more information.Head-Up Display (HUD){WARNINGIf the HUD image is too bright ortoo high in your field of view, itmay take you more time to seethings you need to see when it isdark outside. Be sure to keep theHUD image dim and placed low inyour field of view.For vehicles with the Head-UpDisplay (HUD), some informationconcerning the operation of thevehicle is projected onto thewindshield. This includes thespeedometer reading, rpm reading,transmission position, outside airtemperature, compass heading, anda brief display of the current radiostation, including XM information orCD track. It will also displayturn-by-turn navigation information ifthe vehicle has a navigation radio.
Black plate (30,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20125-30 Instruments and ControlsThe images are projected throughthe HUD lens located on the driverside of the instrument panel.Notice: If you try to use the HUDimage as a parking aid, you maymisjudge the distance anddamage your vehicle. Do not usethe HUD image as a parking aid.The HUD information can bedisplayed in one of three languages,English, French, or Spanish. Thespeedometer reading and othernumerical values can be displayedin either English or metric units.The language selection is changedthrough the radio and the units ofmeasurement is changed throughthe trip computer in the DriverInformation Center (DIC). SeeAM-FM Radio (Radio with CD/DVD/MEM) on page 7‑17 or AM-FMRadio (Radio with CD andTouchscreen) on page 7‑19 andDriver Information Center (DIC) onpage 5‑25.HUD Display on the VehicleWindshieldThe HUD information appears as animage focused out toward the frontof the vehicle.When the ignition is placed in theON/RUN or ON/RUN/STARTposition, HUD will display anintroductory message for a shorttime, until the HUD is ready.The following indicator lights comeon in the instrument panel whenactivated and also appear onthe HUD:.Turn Signal Indicators.High-Beam Indicator SymbolThe HUD temporarily displays somevehicle warnings, such as CHECKTIRE PRESSURE and FUELLEVEL LOW when these messagesare on the DIC trip computer.The HUD also displays the followingmessages on vehicles with thesesystems, when they are active:.TRACTION CONTROL ACTIVE.STABILITRAK ACTIVEWhen the HUD is on, thespeedometer reading is continuallydisplayed. The current radio stationor CD track number will display for ashort period of time after the radioor CD track status changes. Thishappens whenever radio informationis changed.
Black plate (31,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Instruments and Controls 5-31The speedometer size is reducedwhen radio, CD information,warnings, or turn-by-turn navigationinformation are displayed onthe HUD.The HUD control is located to theleft of the steering wheel.To adjust the HUD image so thatitems are properly displayed, do thefollowing:1. Adjust the driver seat to acomfortable position.2. Start the engine.3. Adjust the HUD controls.Use the following settings to adjustthe HUD.OFF: To turn HUD off, turn theHUD dimming knob fullycounterclockwise until theHUD display turns off.Brightness: Turn the dimming knobclockwise or counterclockwise tobrighten or dim the display.«(Up) or ª(Down): Press theup or down arrows to center theHUD image in your view. The HUDimage can only be adjusted up anddown, not side to side.PAGE: Press to select the displayformats. Release the PAGE buttonwhen the format number with thedesired display is shown on theHUD. If vehicle messages aredisplayed, pressing PAGE mayclear the message.The three formats are as follows:English Shown, Metric SimilarFormat One: This display gives thespeedometer reading (in English ormetric units), turn signal indication,high‐beam indication, transmissionpositions, outside air temperature,and compass heading.English Shown, Metric SimilarFormat Two: This display includesthe information in Format Onewithout the transmissioninformation, the outside airtemperature, and compass heading.
Black plate (32,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20125-32 Instruments and ControlsEnglish Shown, Metric SimilarFormat Three: This displayincludes much of the information inFormat One along with a circulartachometer, but without outside airtemperature and compass heading.All formats will show the turn-by-turnnavigation information and providedetails about the next drivingmaneuver to be made. When younear your next maneuver, the HUDwill display a distance bar that willempty the closer you get to yourmaneuver. All navigation informationis provided to the HUD by thenavigation radio or OnStar service,for vehicles that have thesefeatures.English Shown, Metric SimilarThe HUD image displayed on thewindshield will automatically dimand brighten to compensate foroutside lighting. However, theHUD brightness control can still beadjusted as needed.The HUD image can temporarilylight up depending on the angleand position of the sunlight on theHUD display. This is normal and willchange when the angle of thesunlight on the HUD displaychanges.Polarized sunglasses could makethe HUD image harder to see.Care of the HUDClean the inside of the windshieldas needed to remove any dirt or filmthat could reduce the sharpness orclarity of the HUD image.To clean the HUD lens, use a soft,clean cloth that has household glasscleaner sprayed on it. Wipe theHUD lens gently, then dry it. Do notspray cleaner directly on the lensbecause the cleaner could leak intothe unit.
Black plate (33,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Instruments and Controls 5-33If You Cannot See the HUDImage When the Ignition Is On.Is anything covering theHUD lens?.Is the HUD dimmer setting brightenough?.Is the HUD image adjusted tothe proper height?.Are you wearing polarizedsunglasses?.Still no HUD image? Check thefuse in the instrument panel fuseblock. See Instrument PanelFuse Block on page 10‑40.If the HUD Image Is Not Clear.Is the HUD image too bright?.Are the windshield and HUDlens clean?If the HUD image is not correct,contact your dealer.Keep in mind that the windshield ispart of the HUD system.Vehicle MessagesMessages displayed on theDIC indicate the status of thevehicle or some action that may beneeded to correct a condition.Multiple messages may displayone after the other.The messages that do not requireimmediate action can beacknowledged and cleared bypressing SET/CLR. The messagesthat require immediate action cannotbe cleared until that action isperformed. All messages should betaken seriously and clearing themessages does not correct theproblem.Battery Voltage andCharging MessagesBATTERY SAVER ACTIVEThis message displays when thevehicle has detected that the batteryvoltage is dropping beyond areasonable point. The battery saversystem starts reducing certainfeatures of the vehicle that you maybe able to notice. At the point thatfeatures are disabled, this messageis displayed. It means that thevehicle is trying to save the chargein the battery. Turn off unnecessaryaccessories to allow the battery torecharge.LOW BATTERYThis message is displayed when thebattery voltage is low. See Batteryon page 10‑25 for more information.SERVICE BATTERYCHARGING SYSTEMThis message is displayed whenthere is a fault in the batterycharging system. Take the vehicle toyour dealer for service.Brake System MessagesBRAKE FLUID LOWThis message is displayed when thebrake fluid level is low. See BrakeFluid on page 10‑23.
Black plate (34,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20125-34 Instruments and ControlsSTEP ON BRAKE TORELEASE PARK BRAKEThis message is displayed if youattempt to release the electricparking brake without the brakepedal applied. See Parking Brakeon page 9‑34 for more information.RELEASE PARK BRAKEThis message is displayed if theelectric parking brake is on while thevehicle is in motion. Release itbefore you attempt to drive. SeeParking Brake on page 9‑34 formore information.SERVICE BRAKE ASSISTThis message may be displayedwhen there is a problem with thebrake boost assist system. Whenthis message is displayed, the brakeboost assist motor might be heardoperating and you might noticepulsation in the brake pedal.This is normal under theseconditions. Take the vehicle toyour dealer for service.SERVICE PARKING BRAKEThis message is displayed whenthere is a problem with the electricparking brake. See Parking Brakeon page 9‑34 for more information.Take the vehicle to your dealer.Compass MessagesCALThis message is displayed when thecompass needs to be calibrated.See Compass on page 5‑4.–––Three dashes will be displayed if thecompass needs service. See yourdealer for service.Cruise Control MessagesCRUISE SET TO XXXThis message displays when thecruise control is set and shows thespeed it was set to. See CruiseControl on page 9‑40 for moreinformation.Door Ajar MessagesDRIVER DOOR OPENThis message will display when thedriver door is open. Close the doorcompletely.HOOD OPENThis message will display when thehood is open. Close the hoodcompletely.LEFT REAR DOOR OPENThis message will display when thedriver side rear door is open. Closethe door completely.PASSENGER DOOR OPENThis message will display when thefront passenger door is open. Closethe door completely.RIGHT REAR DOOR OPENThis message will display when thepassenger side rear door is open.Close the door completely.
Black plate (35,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Instruments and Controls 5-35TRUNK OPENThis message will display when thetrunk is open. Close the trunkcompletely.Engine Cooling SystemMessagesA/C OFF DUE TO HIGHENGINE TEMPThis message displays when theengine coolant becomes hotter thanthe normal operating temperature.To avoid added strain on a hotengine, the air conditioningcompressor automatically turns off.When the coolant temperaturereturns to normal, the airconditioning compressor turnsback on. You can continue todrive the vehicle.If this message continues to appear,have the system repaired by yourdealer as soon as possible to avoiddamage to the engine.COOLANT LEVEL LOW ADDCOOLANTThis message will display if thecoolant is low. See Engine Coolanton page 10‑16.ENGINE OVERHEATED —IDLE ENGINEThis message displays when theengine coolant temperature is toohot. Stop and allow the vehicle toidle until it cools down.ENGINE OVERHEATED —STOP ENGINEThis message displays and acontinuous chime sounds if theengine cooling system reachesunsafe temperatures for operation.Stop and turn off the vehicle assoon as it is safe to do so to avoidsevere damage. This messageclears when the engine has cooledto a safe operating temperature.Engine Oil MessagesCHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONThis message displays when theengine oil needs to be changed.When you change the engine oil, besure to reset the Oil Life System.See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑12 and Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑25 forinformation on how to reset thesystem. See Engine Oil onpage 10‑9and MaintenanceSchedule on page 11‑3for moreinformation.ENGINE OIL HOT, IDLEENGINEThis message displays when theengine oil temperature is too hot.Stop and allow the vehicle to idleuntil it cools down.ENGINE OIL LOW —ADD OILThis message displays when theengine oil level is too low. Check theoil level. See Engine Oil onpage 10‑9.
Black plate (36,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20125-36 Instruments and ControlsOIL PRESSURE LOW —STOPENGINEThis message displays if low oilpressure levels occur. Stop thevehicle as soon as safely possibleand do not operate it until the causeof the low oil pressure has beencorrected. Check the oil as soon aspossible and have the vehicleserviced by your dealer.Engine Power MessagesENGINE POWER IS REDUCEDThis message displays when thevehicle's engine power is reduced.Reduced engine power can affectthe vehicle's ability to accelerate.If this message is on, but there isno reduction in performance,proceed to your destination. Theperformance may be reduced thenext time the vehicle is driven. Thevehicle may be driven at a reducedspeed while this message is on, butmaximum acceleration and speedmay be reduced.Anytime this message stays on,the vehicle should be taken to yourdealer for service as soon aspossible.Fuel System MessagesFUEL LEVEL LOWThis message displays when thevehicle is low on fuel. Refuel assoon as possible.TIGHTEN GAS CAPThis message displays when thefuel cap is not on tight. Tighten thefuel cap.Key and Lock MessagesNO REMOTE DETECTEDThis message displays when thetransmitter battery is weak onvehicles with keyless access. See“Starting the Vehicle with a LowTransmitter Battery”under RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2‑3for moreinformation.REPLACE BATTERY INREMOTE KEYThis message displays when thebattery in the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter needs tobe replaced.Lamp MessagesAFL (Adaptive ForwardLighting) LAMPS NEEDSERVICEThis message displays when theAdaptive Forward Lighting (AFL)system is disabled and needsservice. See your dealer. SeeAdaptive Forward Lighting (AFL) onpage 6‑4for more information.
Black plate (37,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Instruments and Controls 5-37Object Detection SystemMessagesPARK ASSIST OFFThis message displays when thepark assist system has been turnedoff or when there is a temporarycondition causing the system to bedisabled. See Ultrasonic ParkingAssist on page 9‑42.SERVICE PARK ASSISTThis message displays if there is aproblem with the Ultrasonic RearParking Assist (URPA) system.Do not use this system to help youpark. See Ultrasonic Parking Assiston page 9‑42 for more information.See your dealer for service.SERVICE BLIND ZONE ALERTSYSTEMIf this message appears, both SBZAdisplays will remain on indicatingthere is a problem with the SBZAsystem. If these displays remain onafter continued driving, the systemneeds service. Take the vehicle toyour dealer.SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERTSYSTEM OFFThis message indicates that thedriver has turned the system off.SIDE BLIND ZONE SYS.UNAVAILABLEThis message indicates that theSBZA system is disabled becausethe sensor is blocked and cannotdetect vehicles in the blind zone.The sensor may be blocked by mud,dirt, snow, ice, or slush. Thismessage may also activate duringheavy rain or due to road spray. Thevehicle does not need service. Forcleaning, see Exterior Care onpage 10‑98.Ride Control SystemMessagesALL WHEEL DRIVE OFFThis message displays when theAll-Wheel Drive (AWD) System hasbeen turned off. See All-WheelDrive on page 9‑32.SERVICE ALL WHEEL DRIVESYSTEMThis message displays when thereis a problem with the All-WheelDrive (AWD) System. See yourdealer for service.SERVICE REAR AXLEThis message displays when thereis a problem with the All-WheelDrive (AWD) System. See yourdealer for service.
Black plate (38,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20125-38 Instruments and ControlsSERVICE TRACTIONCONTROLThis message displays when thereis a problem with the TractionControl System (TCS). When thismessage is displayed, the systemwill not limit wheel spin. Adjust yourdriving accordingly. See your dealerfor service.SERVICE STABILITRAKThis message displays if there is aproblem with the StabiliTrak system.If this message appears, try to resetthe system. Stop; turn off the enginefor at least 15 seconds; then startthe engine again. If this messagestill comes on, it means there is aproblem. See your dealer forservice. The vehicle is safe to drive,however, you do not have thebenefit of StabiliTrak, so reduceyour speed and drive accordingly.SPORT MODE ONThis message displays when usingthe selective ride control. SeeSelective Ride Control on page 9‑39for more information.TRACTION CONTROL OFFThis message displays when theTraction Control System (TCS) isturned off. Adjust your drivingaccordingly.Anti-theft Alarm SystemMessagesTHEFT ATTEMPTEDThis message displays if the vehicledetects a tamper condition.Starting the VehicleMessagesJUMP START ACTIVE WAIT TOSTARTThis message displays whileperforming an on-board jump startof the vehicle. See “Jump Starting(On-board with eAssist Only)”formore information.JUMP START COMPLETEATTEMPT STARTThis message displays whileperforming an on-board jump startof the vehicle. See “Jump Starting(On-board with eAssist Only)”formore information.JUMP START DISABLED SEEOWNERS MANUALThis message displays if there is aproblem with the on-board jumpstart system. Take the vehicle toyour dealer for service.
Black plate (39,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Instruments and Controls 5-39Tire MessagesTIRE PRESSURE LOW ADDAIR TO TIREOn vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays when thepressure in one or more of thevehicle's tires is low.The low tire pressure warning lightwill also come on. See TirePressure Light on page 5‑23.If a tire pressure message appearson the DIC, stop as soon as youcan. Inflate the tires by adding airuntil the tire pressure is equal to thevalues shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. See Tireson page 10‑44,Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑10, and Tire Pressure onpage 10‑51.You can receive more than one tirepressure message at a time. Toread the other messages that mayhave been sent at the same time,press the SET/CLR button.The DIC also shows the tirepressure values. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑25.SERVICE TIRE MONITORSYSTEMThis message displays if there is aproblem with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS). See TirePressure Monitor Operation onpage 10‑54 for more information.TIRE LEARNING ACTIVEThis message displays when thesystem is learning new tires. SeeTire Pressure Monitor Operation onpage 10‑54 for more information.Transmission MessagesSERVICE TRANSMISSIONThis message displays if there is aproblem with the transmission. Seeyour dealer.SHIFT TO PARKThis message displays when thetransmission needs to be shifted toP (Park). This may appear whenattempting to remove the key fromthe ignition or from the vehicle if thevehicle is not in P (Park).TRANSMISSION HOT —IDLEENGINEThis message displays and a chimesounds if the transmission fluid inthe vehicle gets hot. Driving with thetransmission fluid temperature highcan cause damage to the vehicle.Stop the vehicle and let it idle toallow the transmission to cool. Thismessage clears when the fluidtemperature reaches a safe level.
Black plate (40,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20125-40 Instruments and ControlsWindow MessagesOPEN, THEN CLOSE DRIVERWINDOWThis message is displayed when thewindow needs to be reprogrammed.If the vehicle's battery has beenrecharged or disconnected, you willneed to reprogram each frontwindow for the express-up feature towork. See Power Windows onpage 2‑19 for more information.OPEN, THEN CLOSEPASSENGER WINDOWThis message is displayed when thewindow needs to be reprogrammed.If the vehicle's battery has beenrecharged or disconnected, you willneed to reprogram each frontwindow for the express-up feature towork. See Power Windows onpage 2‑19 for more information.VehiclePersonalizationThe audio system controls are usedto access the personalizationmenus for customizing vehiclefeatures.CONFIG (Configuration): Press toaccess the ConfigurationSettings menu.Menu Knob: Turn to scroll throughthe menus.SELECT: Press to enter the menusand select menu items./BACK: Press to exit or movebackward in a menu.Entering the PersonalizationMenus1. Press CONFIG to access theConfiguration Settings menu.2. Turn the Menu knob to highlightVehicle Settings.3. Press SELECT to select theVehicle Settings menu.The following list of menu items maybe available:.Climate and Air Quality.Comfort and Convenience.Collision/Detection Systems.Language.Lighting.Power Door Locks.Remote Lock/Unlock/Start.Return to Factory SettingsTurn the Menu knob to highlight themenu. Press SELECT to select it.Each of the menus is detailed in thefollowing information.Climate and Air QualitySelect the Climate and Air Qualitymenu and the following may bedisplayed:.Auto Fan Speed.Air Quality Sensor.Auto Heated Seats.Air Conditioning Mode
Black plate (41,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Instruments and Controls 5-41.Remote Start Auto Heated Seats.Remote Start Cooled Seats.Auto Defog.Auto Rear DefogAuto Fan SpeedThis will allow you to select theautomatic fan speed. It can beadjusted to run lower or higher thannormal.Press SELECT when Auto FanSpeed is highlighted to open themenu. Turn the Menu knob tohighlight High, Medium, or Low.Press SELECT to confirm theselection. Press /BACK to moveto the last menu.Air Quality SensorThis will allow you to select whetherthe system will operate at high orlow sensitivity. Only vehicles withthe dual zone climate control willhave this option.Press SELECT when Air QualitySensor is highlighted to open themenu. Turn the Menu knob tohighlight High or Low. PressSELECT to confirm the selection.Press /BACK to move to thelast menu.Auto Heated SeatsIf equipped and turned on, thisfeature will automatically activateheated seats at the level required bythe interior temperature. The autoheated seats can be turned off byusing the heated seat buttons onthe climate control panel.Press SELECT when Auto HeatedSeats is highlighted to open themenu. Turn the Menu knob tohighlight On or Off. Press SELECTto confirm the selection. Press /BACK to move to the last menu.Air Conditioning ModeThis allows selection of automaticstart of the air conditioning uponvehicle start. Selecting On indicatesthe air conditioning will be on whenthe vehicle is started. Selecting Offturns the air conditioning off eachtime the vehicle is started. LastSetting will resume the last settingwhen the vehicle was shut off.Press SELECT when AirConditioning Mode is highlighted toopen the menu. Turn the Menu knobto highlight Off, On, or Last Setting.Press SELECT to confirm theselection. Press /BACK to move tothe last menu.Remote Start Auto Heated SeatsIf equipped and turned on, thisfeature will turn the heated seats onwhen using remote start oncold days.Press SELECT when Remote StartAuto Heated Seats is highlighted.Turn the Menu knob to select On orOff. Press SELECT to confirm theselection. Press /BACK to move tothe last menu.
Black plate (42,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20125-42 Instruments and ControlsRemote Start Cooled SeatsIf equipped and turned on, thisfeature will turn the cooled seats onwhen using remote start onwarm days.Press SELECT when Remote StartCooled Seats is highlighted. Turnthe Menu knob to select On or Off.Press SELECT to confirm theselection. Press /BACK to move tothe last menu.Auto DefogThis will allow you to turn the autodefog on or off. Only vehicles withthe dual zone climate control willhave this option.Press SELECT when Auto Defog ishighlighted to open the menu. Turnthe Menu knob to highlight On orOff. Press SELECT to confirm theselection. Press /BACK to move tothe last menu.Auto Rear DefogIf equipped, this will allow you toturn the auto rear defog on or off.This feature will automatically turnon the rear defogger when it iscold outside.Press SELECT when Auto RearDefog is highlighted to open themenu. Turn the Menu knob tohighlight On or Off. Press SELECTto confirm the selection. Press/BACK to move to the last menu.Comfort and ConvenienceSelect the Comfort andConvenience menu and thefollowing will be displayed:.Chime Volume.Driver Seat Easy Exit.Park Tilt MirrorsChime VolumeThis allows selection of the chimevolume level.Press SELECT when Chime Volumeis highlighted. Turn the Menu knobto select Normal or High. PressSELECT to confirm the selection.Press /BACK to move to thelast menu.Driver Seat Easy ExitWhen on, this feature will move thedriver seat rearward upon turningthe ignition off and opening thedriver door. This may be performedto make it easier to exit the vehicle.See “Easy Exit Driver Seat”underPower Seat Adjustment on page 3‑5for more information.This allows you to turn the easy exitseat feature on or off.Press SELECT when Driver SeatEasy Exit is highlighted. Turn theMenu knob to select On or Off.Press SELECT to confirm theselection. Press /BACK to move tothe last menu.
Black plate (43,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Instruments and Controls 5-43Park Tilt MirrorsWhen on, both the driver andpassenger mirrors will tilt downwardwhen the vehicle is shifted toR (Reverse) to improve visibility ofthe ground near the rear wheels.They will return to their previousdriving position when the vehicle isshifted out of R (Reverse), theignition is turned to OFF, or thevehicle is left in R (Reverse). SeePark Tilt Mirrors on page 2‑17 formore information.This allows you to turn the park tiltmirrors feature on or off.Press SELECT when Park TiltMirrors is highlighted. Turn theMenu knob to select Driver &Passenger or Off. Press SELECT toconfirm the selection. Press/BACK to move to the last menu.Collision/Detection SystemsSelect the Collision/DetectionSystems menu and the following willbe displayed:.Side Blind Zone Alert SystemSide Blind Zone Alert SystemIf equipped, this feature allows theSide Blind Zone Alert Systemfeature to be turned on or off.Press SELECT when Side BlindZone Alert System is highlighted.Turn the Menu knob to select On orOff. Press SELECT to confirm theselection. Press /BACK to move tothe last menu.LanguageSelect the Language menu and thefollowing will be displayed:.English.French.SpanishTurn the Menu knob to select thelanguage. Press SELECT to confirmthe selection. Press /BACK tomove to the last menu.LightingSelect the Lighting menu and thefollowing will be displayed:.Exit Lighting.Vehicle Locator LightsExit LightingThis allows selection of how longthe exterior lamps stay on whenleaving the vehicle and it isdark outside.Press SELECT when Exit Lighting ishighlighted. Turn the Menu knob toselect Off, 30 Seconds, 1 Minute,or 2 Minutes. Press SELECT toconfirm the selection. Press/BACK to move to the last menu.
Black plate (44,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20125-44 Instruments and ControlsVehicle Locator LightsThis allows the vehicle locator lightsto be turned on or off. The vehiclelocator lights come on whenunlocking the vehicle with theRKE transmitter.Press SELECT when VehicleLocator Lights is highlighted. Turnthe Menu knob to select On or Off.Press SELECT to confirm theselection. Press /BACK to move tothe last menu.Power Door LocksSelect Power Door Locks and thefollowing will be displayed:.Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out.Delayed Door Lock.Auto Door UnlockUnlocked Door Anti Lock OutWhen on, this feature will keep thedriver door from locking when thedoor is open. If off is selected, theUnlocked Door Anti Lock Out menuwill be available and the door willlock as programmed throughthis menu.Press SELECT when UnlockedDoor Anti Lock Out is highlighted.Turn the Menu knob to select On orOff. Press SELECT to confirm theselection. Press /BACK to move tothe last menu.Delayed Door LockWhen on, this feature will delay thelocking of the doors untilfive seconds after the last door isclosed. You will hear three chimesto signal delayed locking is in use.Pressing either the power lockbutton or Qon the RKE transmittertwice will override the delayedlocking feature and immediately lockall of the doors.Press SELECT when Delayed DoorLock is highlighted. Turn theMenu knob to select On or Off.Press SELECT to confirm theselection. Press /BACK to moveto the last menu.Auto Door UnlockThis allows selection of which of thedoors will automatically unlock whenthe vehicle is shifted into P (Park).Press SELECT when Auto DoorUnlock is highlighted. Turn theMenu knob to select All Doors,Driver Door, or Off. Press SELECTto confirm the selection. Press/BACK to move to the last menu.Remote Lock/Unlock/StartSelect Remote Lock/Unlock/Startand the following will be displayed:.Unlock Feedback (Lights).Locking Feedback.Door Unlock Options.Remote Recall.Passive Entry.Remote Left In Vehicle
Black plate (45,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Instruments and Controls 5-45Unlock Feedback (Lights)When on, the exterior lamps willflash when unlocking the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter.Press SELECT when UnlockFeedback (Lights) is highlighted.Turn the Menu knob to select On orOff. Press SELECT to confirm theselection. Press /BACK to move tothe last menu.Locking FeedbackThis allows selection of what type offeedback is given when locking thevehicle with the RKE transmitter.Press SELECT when LockingFeedback is highlighted. Turn theMenu knob to select Lights andHorn, Lights Only, Horn Only, or Off.Press SELECT to confirm theselection. Press /BACK to moveto the last menu.Door Unlock OptionsThis allows selection of which doorswill unlock when pressing Kon theRKE transmitter.Press SELECT when Door UnlockOptions is highlighted. Turn theMenu knob to select All Doors orDriver Door Only. When set toDriver Door Only, the driver door willunlock the first time the unlockbutton is pressed and all doors willunlock when the button is pressed asecond time. When set to All Doors,all of the doors will unlock at the firstpress of K. Press SELECT toconfirm the selection. Press/BACK to move to the last menu.Remote RecallWhen on, this feature will recall thecurrent driver's last seat and outsidemirror positions upon unlocking thedriver door with the RKE, andopening that door. The current driveris identified when the RKE is usedto unlock the driver door. If keylessaccess equipped, the recall willoccur upon opening the driver door.See “Memory Remote Recall”underPower Seat Adjustment on page 3‑5for more information.This allows the Remote Recallfeature to be turned on or off.Remote Recall is when thememorized settings will be recalledas you unlock and enter the vehicle.Press SELECT when Remote Recallis highlighted. Turn the Menu knobto select On or Off. Press SELECTto confirm the selection. Press /BACK to move to the last menu.Passive EntryThis allows the Passive Entryfeature to be turned on or off.Press SELECT when Passive Entryis highlighted. Turn the Menu knobto select On or Off. Press SELECTto confirm the selection. Press/BACK to move to the last menu.
Black plate (46,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20125-46 Instruments and ControlsRemote Left In VehicleThis allows the Remote Left InVehicle reminder feature to beturned on or off. If on, the horn willchirp if a remote is left in thevehicle.Press SELECT when Remote Left InVehicle is highlighted. Turn theMenu knob to select On or Off.Press SELECT to confirm theselection. Press /BACK to moveto the last menu.Return to Factory SettingsSelect Return to Factory Settings toreturn all of the vehiclepersonalization to the defaultsettings. Turn the Menu knob toselect Yes or No. Press SELECT toconfirm and go back to thelast menu.Universal RemoteSystemSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑20 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.Universal Remote SystemProgrammingIf the vehicle has this feature, youwill see these buttons with one LEDindicator next to them in theoverhead console.This system provides a way toreplace up to three remote controltransmitters used to activatedevices such as garage dooropeners, security systems, andhome automation devices.Do not use the Universal Remotesystem with any garage door openerthat does not have the stop andreverse feature. This includesany garage door opener modelmanufactured before April 1,1982.Read the instructions completelybefore attempting to program theUniversal Remote system. Becauseof the steps involved, it may behelpful to have another personavailable to assist with programmingthe Universal Remote system.Keep the original hand-heldtransmitter for use in other vehiclesas well as for future UniversalRemote system programming. It isalso recommended that upon thesale of the vehicle, the programmedUniversal Remote system buttonsbe erased for security purposes.See “Erasing Universal RemoteSystem Buttons”later in thissection.
Black plate (47,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Instruments and Controls 5-47When programming a garage door,park outside of the garage. Parkdirectly in line with and facing thegarage door opener motor-head orgate motor-head. Be sure thatpeople and objects are clear of thegarage door or gate beingprogrammed.It is recommended that a newbattery be installed in the hand-heldtransmitter for quicker and moreaccurate transmission of theradio-frequency signal.Programming the UniversalRemote SystemFor questions or help programmingthe Universal Remote system, call1‐800‐355‐3515 or go towww.homelink.com.Programming a garage door openerinvolves time-sensitive actions, soread the entire procedure beforestarting. Otherwise, the device willtime out and the procedure will haveto be repeated.To program up to three devices:1. Hold the end of the hand-heldtransmitter about 3 to 8 cm (1 to3 in) away from the UniversalRemote system buttons whilekeeping the indicator light inview. The hand-held transmitterwas supplied by themanufacturer of the garage dooropener receiver(motor-head unit).2. At the same time, press andhold both the hand-heldtransmitter button and one of thethree Universal Remote systembuttons to be used to operatethe garage door. Do not releasethe Universal Remote systembutton or the hand-heldtransmitter button until theindicator light changes from aslowly to a rapidly flashing light.You now may release bothbuttons.Some entry gates and garagedoor openers may requiresubstitution of Step 2 with theprocedure noted in “GateOperator and CanadianProgramming”later in thissection.3. Press and hold for five secondsthe newly trained UniversalRemote system button (thebutton selected in Step 2) whileobserving the indicator light andgarage door activation..If the indicator light stays oncontinuously or the garagedoor starts to move whenthe Universal Remotesystem button is pressedand released, then theprogramming is complete.There is no need tocontinue programmingSteps 4 through 6.
Black plate (48,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20125-48 Instruments and Controls.If the Universal Remotesystem indicator light blinksrapidly for two seconds,then turns to a constantlight and the garage doordoes not move, continuewith programming Steps 4through 6.It may be helpful to haveanother person assist withthe remaining Steps 4through 6.“Learn”or “Smart”Button4. After Steps 1 through 3 havebeen completed, locate the“Learn”or “Smart”button insidethe garage on the garage dooropener receiver (motor-headunit). The name and color of thebutton may vary bymanufacturer.5. Firmly press and release the“Learn”or “Smart”button. Afterpressing this button, you willhave 30 seconds to completeStep 6.6. Immediately return to thevehicle. Firmly press and holdfor two seconds the UniversalRemote system button, selectedin Step 2 to control the garagedoor, and then release it. If thegarage door does not move orthe lamp on the garage dooropener receiver (motor-headunit) does not flash, press andhold the same button a secondtime for two seconds, and thenrelease it. Again, if the doordoes not move or the garagedoor lamp does not flash, pressand hold the same button athird time for two seconds, andthen release.The Universal Remote systemshould now activate thegarage door.To program the remaining twoUniversal Remote system buttons,begin with Step 1 of “Programmingthe Universal Remote System.”Gate Operator and CanadianProgrammingIf you have questions or need helpprogramming the Universal Remotesystem, call 1‐800‐355‐3515 or goto www.homelink.com.Canadian radio-frequency lawsrequire transmitter signals to timeout or quit after several seconds oftransmission. This may not be longenough for the Universal Remotesystem to pick up the signal duringprogramming. Similarly, some U.S.gate operators are manufactured totime out in the same manner.
Black plate (49,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Instruments and Controls 5-49If you live in Canada, or you arehaving difficulty programming a gateoperator or garage door opener byusing the “Programming theUniversal Remote System”procedures, regardless of whereyou live, replace Step 2 under“Programming the Universal RemoteSystem”with the following:Continue to press and hold theUniversal Remote system buttonwhile you press and release everytwo seconds (cycle) the hand-heldtransmitter button until thefrequency signal has beensuccessfully accepted by theUniversal Remote system. TheUniversal Remote system indicatorlight will flash slowly at first and thenrapidly. Proceed with Step 3 under“Programming the Universal RemoteSystem”to complete.Universal Remote SystemOperationUsing the Universal RemoteSystemPress and hold the appropriateUniversal Remote system button forat least half of a second. Theindicator light will come on while thesignal is being transmitted.Erasing Universal RemoteSystem ButtonsAll programmed buttons should beerased when the vehicle is sold orthe lease ends.To erase all programmed buttons onthe Universal Remote systemdevice:1. Press and hold down the twooutside buttons until theindicator light begins to flash.This should take about10 seconds.2. Release both buttons.Reprogramming a SingleUniversal Remote SystemButtonTo reprogram any of the threeUniversal Remote system buttons:1. Press and hold the desiredUniversal Remote systembutton. Do not releasethe button.2. The indicator light will begin toflash after 20 seconds. Withoutreleasing the button, proceedwith Step 1 of the section“Programming the UniversalRemote System.”If you have questions or need helpprogramming the Universal Remotesystem, call 1‐800‐355‐3515 or goto www.homelink.com. You mayalso call the customer assistancephone number under CustomerAssistance Offices (U.S. andCanada) on page 13‑4or CustomerAssistance Offices (Mexico) onpage 13‑5.
Black plate (50,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20125-50 Instruments and Controls2NOTES
Black plate (1,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Lighting 6-1LightingExterior LightingExterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-2Exterior Lamps OffReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Automatic HeadlampSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Adaptive ForwardLighting (AFL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-4Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Fog Lamps .................... 6-5Interior LightingInstrument Panel IlluminationControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Sun Visor Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Lighting FeaturesEntry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Battery Load Management . . . . 6-8Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-8
Black plate (2,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20126-2 LightingExterior LightingExterior Lamp ControlsThe exterior lamp control is locatedon the instrument panel on theoutboard side of the steering wheel.Turn the control to the followingpositions:O(Off): Turns off the exteriorlamps. The knob returns to theAUTO position after it is released.Turn to off again to reactivate theAUTO mode.AUTO (Automatic): Automaticallyturns the exterior lamps on and off,depending on outside lighting.;(Parking Lamps): Turns onthe parking lamps together withthe following:.Sidemarker Lamps.Taillamps.License Plate Lamps.Instrument Panel Lights5(Headlamps): Turns on theheadlamps together with thefollowing:.Sidemarker Lamps.Taillamps.License Plate Lamps.Instrument Panel Lights.Parking LampsExterior Lamps OffReminderA warning chime sounds if the driverdoor is opened while the ignition isoff and the exterior lamps are on.Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer2 3 Headlamp High/Low‐BeamChanger: Push the turn signal/lanechange lever away from you andrelease, to turn the high beams on.To return to low beams, push thelever again or pull it toward youand release.This indicator light turns on in theinstrument panel cluster when thehigh‐beam headlamps are on.
Black plate (3,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Lighting 6-3Flash-to-PassTo flash the high beams, pull theturn signal/lane change lever towardyou, and release.Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) canmake it easier for others to see thefront of your vehicle during the day.Fully functional daytime runninglamps are required on all vehiclesfirst sold in Canada.The DRL system turns on thelow-beam headlamps at areduced brightness.For vehicles withHigh Intensity Discharge (HID)headlamps, the dedicated DRL willcome on when all of the followingconditions are met:.The engine is running..The exterior lamp band isin AUTO..The light sensor determines itis daytime.When the DRL are on, thelow-beam headlamps will be on.The taillamps, sidemarker lamps,instrument panel lights, and otherlamps will not be on.The DRL turn off when theheadlamps are turned to Oorthe ignition is off.Automatic HeadlampSystemWhen the exterior lamp control isset to AUTO and it is dark enoughoutside, the headlamps come onautomatically.There is a light sensor located ontop of the instrument panel. Do notcover the sensor; otherwise theheadlamps will come on when theyare not needed.The system may also turn on theheadlamps when driving through aparking garage or tunnel.
Black plate (4,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20126-4 LightingWhen it is bright enough outside,the headlamps will turn off or maychange to Daytime RunningLamps (DRL).The automatic headlamp systemturns off when the exterior lampcontrol is turned to Oor theignition is off.Adaptive ForwardLighting (AFL)The Adaptive Forward LightingSystem (AFL) pivots the headlampshorizontally to provide greater roadillumination while turning. To enableAFL, set the exterior lamp switch tothe AUTO position. Moving theswitch out of the AUTO positiondeactivates the system.AFL operates when the vehiclespeed is greater than 3 km/h(2 mph). AFL does not operatewhen the transmission is inR (Reverse). AFL is not immediatelyoperable after starting the vehicle;driving a short distance is requiredto calibrate the AFL. See ExteriorLamp Controls on page 6‑2.Hazard Warning Flashers|Hazard Warning Flasher:Press this button to make the frontand rear turn signal lamps flash onand off. Press again to turn theflashers off.The hazard warning flashers turn onautomatically if the airbags deploy.Turn and Lane-ChangeSignalsMove the lever all the way up ordown to signal a turn.An arrow on the instrument panelcluster flashes in the direction of theturn or lane change.Raise or lower the lever until thearrow starts to flash to signal a lanechange. Hold it there until the lanechange is completed. If the lever isbriefly pressed and released, theturn signal flashes three times.
Black plate (5,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Lighting 6-5The turn and lane‐change signalcan be turned off manually bymoving the lever back to itsoriginal position.If after signaling a turn or lanechange the arrow flashes rapidly ordoes not come on, a signal bulbmight be burned out.Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulbis not burned out, check the fuse.See Fuses and Circuit Breakers onpage 10‑36.Fog LampsFor vehicles with fog lamps,the button is located on theexterior lamp control, left of thesteering wheel.To turn on the fog lamps, the ignitionand the headlamps or parking lampsmust be on.If the fog lamps are turned on whilethe exterior lamp switch is in theAUTO position, the headlampscome on automatically.#:Press to turn on or off. Anindicator light on the instrumentpanel cluster comes on when thefog lamps are on.Some localities have laws thatrequire the headlamps to be onalong with the fog lamps.
Black plate (6,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20126-6 LightingInterior LightingInstrument PanelIllumination ControlThe brightness of the instrumentpanel lighting and steering wheelcontrols can be adjusted.D(Instrument PanelIllumination) : Move and hold thethumbwheel up or down to brightenor dim the lights.Dome LampsThe interior lamps control located inthe overhead console controls boththe front and rear interior lamps.To operate:((Off): Turns the lamps off.H(Door): Turns the lamps onwhen any door is opened.'(On): Keeps the lamps on allthe time.The interior lamps turn onautomatically if the airbags aredeployed.Reading LampsThere are front and rear readinglamps.The front reading lamps are locatedin the overhead console.#or$:Press to turn each lampon or off.
Black plate (7,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Lighting 6-7The rear reading lamps are locatedin the headliner.Sun Visor LampsThis lamp turns on when the coveris opened.Lighting FeaturesEntry LightingThe headlamps, taillamps, licenseplate lamps, back‐up lamps, domelamps, and most of the interior lightsturn on briefly when the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) Kbutton ispressed, or when the door handle ispulled on a keyless access vehicle.See Ignition Positions (Key Access)on page 9‑16 or Ignition Positions(Keyless Access) on page 9‑18.After about 30 seconds the exteriorlamps turn off, then the dome lampsand remaining interior lights dim tooff. Entry lighting can be disabledmanually by changing the ignitionout of the OFF position, or bypressing the RKE Qbutton.This feature can be changed.See Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑40.Exit LightingThe headlamps, taillamps, parkinglamps, back‐up lamps, and licenseplate lamps come on at night, or inareas with limited lighting, when thekey is removed from the ignition.The dome lamps also come onwhen the key is removed from theignition. The exterior lights anddome lamps remain on after thedoor is closed for a set amount oftime, then automatically turn off.For vehicles with keyless access,the exterior lights and dome lampsautomatically turn on when a door isopened after the ignition is turnedoff. See Ignition Positions (KeyAccess) on page 9‑16 or IgnitionPositions (Keyless Access) onpage 9‑18.The exterior lights turn offimmediately by turning the exteriorlamps control off.This feature can be changed.See Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑40.
Black plate (8,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20126-8 LightingBattery LoadManagementThe vehicle has Electric PowerManagement (EPM) that estimatesthe battery's temperature and stateof charge. It then adjusts the voltagefor best performance and extendedlife of the battery.When the battery's state of chargeis low, the voltage is raised slightlyto quickly bring the charge back up.When the state of charge is high,the voltage is lowered slightly toprevent overcharging. If the vehiclehas a voltmeter gauge or a voltagedisplay on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), you may see thevoltage move up or down. This isnormal. If there is a problem, analert will be displayed.The battery can be discharged atidle if the electrical loads are veryhigh. This is true for all vehicles.This is because the generator(alternator) may not be spinning fastenough at idle to produce all of thepower needed for very highelectrical loads.A high electrical load occurs whenseveral of the following are on, suchas: headlamps, high beams, foglamps, rear window defogger,climate control fan at high speed,heated seats, engine cooling fans,trailer loads, and loads plugged intoaccessory power outlets.EPM works to prevent excessivedischarge of the battery. It does thisby balancing the generator's outputand the vehicle's electrical needs.It can increase engine idle speed togenerate more power wheneverneeded. It can temporarily reducethe power demands of someaccessories.Normally, these actions occur insteps or levels, without beingnoticeable. In rare cases at thehighest levels of corrective action,this action may be noticeable to thedriver. If so, a DIC message mightbe displayed, such as BATTERYSAVER ACTIVE, BATTERYVOLTAGE LOW, or LOW BATTERY.If one of these messages displays, itis recommended that the driverreduce the electrical loads as muchas possible. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑25.Battery Power ProtectionThe battery saver feature isdesigned to protect the vehicle'sbattery.If the exterior lamps or any interiorlight is left on and the ignition isturned off, the battery rundownprotection system automaticallyturns the lamp off after about10 minutes.
Black plate (1,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Infotainment System 7-1InfotainmentSystemIntroductionInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-3Overview (Radio with CD) . . . . . 7-4Overview (Radio with CD/DVD and MEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6Overview (Radio with CD andTouchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12RadioAM-FM Radio (Radio with CD/DVD/MEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17AM-FM Radio (Radio with CDand Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . 7-19Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24Backglass Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-25Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . 7-26Audio PlayersCD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32Mass StorageMedia (MEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35Auxiliary Devices(Radio with CD) . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38Auxiliary Devices(Radio with CD/DVDand MEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41Auxiliary Devices(Radio with CD andTouchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
Black plate (2,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20127-2 Infotainment SystemRear Seat InfotainmentRear Seat Entertainment(RSE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47PhoneBluetooth (Overview) . . . . . . . . 7-57Bluetooth (InfotainmentControls) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-59Bluetooth (VoiceRecognition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-64Bluetooth (UHPMexico Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-70Trademarks and LicenseAgreementsTrademarks and LicenseAgreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-81IntroductionInfotainmentRead the following pages tobecome familiar with the audiosystem's features.{WARNINGTaking your eyes off the road forextended periods could cause acrash resulting in injury or deathto you or others. Do not giveextended attention toentertainment tasks while driving.This system provides access tomany audio and non‐audio listings.To minimize taking your eyes off theroad while driving, do the followingwhile the vehicle is parked:.Become familiar with theoperation and controls of theaudio system..Set up the tone, speakeradjustments, and preset radiostations.For more information, see DefensiveDriving on page 9‑3.
Black plate (3,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Infotainment System 7-3Notice: Contact your dealerbefore adding any equipment.Adding audio or communicationequipment could interfere withthe operation of the engine, radio,or other systems, and coulddamage them. Follow federalrules covering mobile radio andtelephone equipment.The vehicle has RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). With RAP,the audio system can be playedeven after the ignition is turned off.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9‑25 for moreinformation.Navigation SystemFor vehicles with a navigationsystem, see the separate navigationmanual.Theft-Deterrent FeatureThe theft-deterrent feature works bylearning a portion of the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) to theinfotainment system. Theinfotainment system does notoperate if it is stolen or moved to adifferent vehicle.
Black plate (4,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20127-4 Infotainment SystemOverview (Radio with CD) A. VOL/ O.Turns the system on or offand adjusts the volume.B. FAV.Radio: Opens thefavorites list.C. Buttons 1 to 6.Radio: Saves and selectsfavorite stations.D. INFO.Radio: Shows availableinformation about thecurrent station..CD: Shows availableinformation about thecurrent track.E. TUNE.Radio: Manually selectsradio stations..CD: Selects tracks.
Black plate (5,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Infotainment System 7-5F. CD/AUX.Selects the CD player oran external audio source.G. g.Radio: Seeks the previousstation..CD: Select the previoustrack or rewinds withina track.H. X.Removes a disc from theCD slot.I. l.Radio: Seeks the nextstation..CD: Select the next trackor fast forwards withina track.J. RADIO/BAND.Changes the band whilelistening to the radio..Selects the radio whenlistening to a differentaudio source.K. Menu Knob.Opens menus, highlightsmenu items, or setsnumeric values while ina menu.L. SELECT.Selects menu items.M. CONFIG.Opens the Settings menu.N. /BACK.Menu: Moves onelevel back..Character Input: Deletesthe last character.O. H.Opens the Clock menu.P. TONE.Opens the Tone menu.Q. 5.Opens the Phonemain menu..Mutes the audio system.
Black plate (6,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20127-6 Infotainment SystemOverview (Radio with CD/DVD and MEM) A. VOL/ O.Turns the system on or offand adjusts the volume.B. FAV.Radio: Opens thefavorites list..MEM: Opens thefavorites list.C. Buttons 1 to 6.Radio: Saves and selectsfavorite stations..MEM: Saves and selectsfavorite tracks andplaylists.D. INFO.Radio: Shows availableinformation about thecurrent station..CD: Shows availableinformation about thecurrent track.
Black plate (7,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Infotainment System 7-7E. TUNE/ k.Manually selects radiostations and pausestime shifted content..CD/DVD: Select tracks,pauses playback, andstops playback..MEM: Select tracks andpauses playback.F. RADIO/BAND.Changes the band whilelistening to the radio..Selects the radio whenlistening to a differentaudio source.G. g.Radio: Seeks the previousstation..CD: Selects the previoustrack or rewinds withina track..MEM: Selects the previoustrack or rewinds withina track.H. X.Removes a disc from theCD slot.I. REC O.AUX: Records contentfrom audio CDs, MP3/WMA CDs, and USB massstorage devices.J. DEL.MEM: Deletes the currenttrack from MEM.K. l.Radio: Seeks the nextstation..CD: Selects the nexttrack or fast forwardswithin a track..MEM: Selects the nexttrack or fast forwardswithin a track.L. SELECT.Selects menu items.M. Menu Knob.Opens menus, highlightsmenu items, or setsnumeric values whilein a menu.
Black plate (8,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20127-8 Infotainment SystemN. /BACK.Menu: Moves onelevel back..Character Input: Deletesthe last character.O. TONE.Opens the Tone menu.P. H.Opens the Clock menu.Q. CONFIG.Opens the Settings menu.R. 5.Opens the Phonemain menu..Mutes the audio system.S. MEM/DVD/AUX.Selects MEM, CD/DVD,USB, or a connected frontor rear auxiliary audiosource.Overview (Radio withCD and Touchscreen)Infotainment System OverviewThe infotainment system iscontrolled by using the Menu knob,SELECT button, preset buttons, andother buttons on the faceplate.The Menu knob can be turned andthe SELECT button pressed tocomplete any of the highlightedscreen functions.The preset buttons can be pressedto select the appropriate screenbutton function as shown on thedisplay.
Black plate (9,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Infotainment System 7-9A. VOL/ O(Power/Volume)B. FAV (Favorites)C. Buttons 1 to 6D. INFOE. TUNE/ kF. F(Home Page)G. gH. X(Eject)I. CD SlotJ. lK. SOURCEL. Menu KnobM. SELECTN. CONFIGO. /BACKP. HQ. TONER. 5(Phone menu)
Black plate (10,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20127-10 Infotainment SystemConfig Setup MenuThe Config setup menu is used forchanging the options for the audio,display, vehicle configuration,phone, and time.Press the CONFIG button todisplay the Config Menu, then turnthe Menu knob to scroll through thefeatures. Once the desired featuredisplays, press the Menu knobto display more options withinthat feature.LanguagesThe vehicle supports English,French (Canadian), and Spanish.The default language is English.Turn the Menu knob to highlight thelanguage. Press SELECT to changethe display language.English and Metric UnitConversionTo change the display units betweenEnglish and metric units. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑25 for more information.Menu SystemControlsThe Menu knob, SELECT button,and the /BACK button are used tonavigate the menu system.SELECT:Press to:.Enter the menu system..Select or activate the highlightedmenu option..Confirm a set value..Turn a system setting on or off.Menu Knob:Turn to:.Highlight a menu option..Select a value./BACK : Press to:.Exit a menu..Return from a submenu screento the previous menu screen..Delete the last character in asequence.Selecting a Menu Option1. Turn the Menu knob to move thehighlighted bar.2. Press SELECT to select thehighlighted option.
Black plate (11,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Infotainment System 7-11SubmenusAn arrow on the right‐hand edge ofthe menu indicates that it has asubmenu with other options.Activating a Setting1. Turn the Menu knob to highlightthe setting.2. Press SELECT to activate thesetting.Setting a Value1. Turn the Menu knob to changethe current value of the setting.2. Press SELECT to confirm thesetting.Turning a Function On or Off1. Turn the Menu knob to highlightthe function.2. Press SELECT to turn thefunction on or off.Entering a Character Sequence1. Turn the Menu knob to highlightthe character.2. Press SELECT to select thecharacter.Press /BACK to delete the lastcharacter in the sequence or pressand hold to delete the entirecharacter sequence.
Black plate (12,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20127-12 Infotainment SystemStoring Radio Station PresetsUp to 36 preset stations canbe stored. AM, FM, and XM™(if equipped) can be mixed.To store presets:1. Press VOL/ Oto turn thesystem on.2. Select the SOURCE button.3. Press gor lon the faceplateor turn and press SELECT toselect a station.4. Press and hold one of the presetbuttons for more than one and ahalf seconds.5. Repeat the steps for eachpreset.To change the number of presetpages, see AM-FM Radio (Radiowith CD/DVD/MEM) on page 7‑17 orAM-FM Radio (Radio with CD andTouchscreen) on page 7‑19 formore information.Cleaning the DisplayNotice: Using abrasive cleanerswhen cleaning glass surfacescould scratch the glass. Use onlya soft cloth and do not spraycleaner directly on the system asit could affect the mechanicalparts.Do not apply spray cleaner directlyto the system, the cleaner couldaffect the mechanical parts.Do not wipe the panel with a hardcloth or use a volatile liquid such aspaint thinner, it could scratch thesurface or erase the characters onthe buttons.OperationControlsThe infotainment system isoperated by using the pushbuttons,multifunction knobs, menus shownon the display, and steering wheelcontrols, if equipped.Turning the System On or OffVOL/ O(Volume/Power): Press toturn the system on and off.Automatic Switch‐OffIf the infotainment system hasbeen turned on after the ignition isturned off, the system will turn offautomatically after 10 minutes.Volume ControlVOL/ O(Volume/Power): Turn toadjust the volume.5(Phone/Mute): For vehicleswith OnStar®, press and hold 5tomute the infotainment system.Press and hold 5again, or turnthe VOL/ Oknob to cancel mute.For vehicles without OnStar®,press 5to mute the infotainmentsystem. Press 5again, or turn theVOL/ Oknob to cancel mute.
Black plate (13,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Infotainment System 7-13Menu SystemControlsThe Menu knob, SELECT button,and /BACK button are used tonavigate the menu system.Menu Knob:Turn to:.Enter the menu system..Highlight a menu option..Select a value.SELECT:Press to:.Select or activate the highlightedmenu option..Confirm a set value..Turn a system setting on or off./BACK:Press to:.Exit a menu..Return from a submenu screento the previous menu screen..Delete the last character in asequence.Selecting a Menu Option1. Turn the Menu knob to move thehighlighted bar.2. Press SELECT to select thehighlighted option.SubmenusAn arrow on the right‐hand edge ofthe menu indicates that it has asubmenu with other options.Activating a Setting1. Turn the Menu knob to highlightthe setting.2. Press SELECT to activate thesetting.
Black plate (14,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20127-14 Infotainment SystemSetting a Value1. Turn the Menu knob to changethe current value of the setting.2. Press SELECT to confirm thesetting.Turning a Function On or Off1. Turn the Menu knob to highlightthe function.2. Press SELECT to turn thefunction on or off.Entering a Character Sequence1. Turn the Menu knob to highlightthe character.2. Press SELECT to select thecharacter.Press the /BACK button to deletethe last character in the sequenceor press and hold to delete theentire character sequence.Audio SettingsThe audio settings can be set foreach radio band and each audioplayer source.To quickly reset an audio settingvalue to 0:1. Press the TONE button.2. Select the audio setting.3. Press and hold SELECT untilthe value changes to 0.Press the /BACK button to goback to the Tone Settings menu.Adjusting the Treble, Midrange,and Bass1. Press the TONE button.2. Select Treble, Midrange,or Bass.3. Select the value.Press the /BACK button to goback to the Tone Settings menu.
Black plate (15,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Infotainment System 7-15Adjusting the Fader and Balance1. Press the TONE button.2. Select Fader or Balance.3. Select the value.Press the /BACK button to goback to the Tone Settings menu.Adjusting the EQ (Equalizer)For vehicles with an equalizer:1. Press the TONE button.2. Select EQ.3. Select the setting.Press the /BACK button to goback to the Tone Settings menu.DSP (Digital Signal Processing)SettingsFor vehicles with DSP, it is used toprovide a choice of differentlistening experiences.The DSP settings for the radio withCD are:.normal ‐Select this setting toadjust the audio for stereomode. This provides the bestsound quality for the driver seatfirst, with the front passengersecond..hk surround ‐Select to enablehk surround. This produces atrue 6.1 matrix surround fromany two channel digital source.This feature is not available inAM/FM radio mode.The DSP settings for the radio withCD/DVD and MEM are:.2.0 normal ‐Select this settingto adjust the audio for stereomode. This provides the bestsound quality for the driver seatfirst, with the front passengersecond..hk surround ‐Select to enablehk surround. This produces atrue 6.1 matrix surround fromany two channel digital source.This feature is not available inAM/FM radio mode.To adjust the DSP settings:1. Press the TONE button.2. Select DSP.3. Select the setting.Press the /BACK button to goback to the Tone Settings menu.
Black plate (16,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20127-16 Infotainment SystemSystem SettingsConfiguring the Number ofFavorite PagesTo configure the number of availablefavorite pages:1. Press the CONFIG button.2. Select Radio Settings.3. Select Radio Favorites.4. Select the number of availablefavorite pages.5. Press the /BACK button togo back to the SystemConfiguration menu.Auto VolumeThe auto volume featureautomatically adjusts the radiovolume to compensate for road andwind noise as the vehicle speeds upor slows down, so that the volumelevel is consistent.The level of volume compensationcan be selected, or the auto volumefeature can be turned off.1. Press the CONFIG button.2. Select Radio Settings.3. Select Auto Volume.4. Select the setting.5. Press the /BACK button togo back to the SystemConfiguration menu.Maximum Startup VolumeThe maximum volume played whenthe radio with CD is first turned oncan be set.1. Press the CONFIG button.2. Select Radio Settings.3. Select Maximum StartupVolume.4. Select the setting.5. Press the /BACK button togo back to the SystemConfiguration menu.
Black plate (17,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Infotainment System 7-17RadioAM-FM Radio (Radio withCD/DVD/MEM)Control ButtonsThe buttons used to control theradio are:RADIO/BAND: Press to turn theradio on and choose between AM,FM, and XM™, if equipped.Menu Knob: Turn to navigate theavailable menus.TUNE: Turn to search for stations.INFO: Press to display additionalinformation that may be available forthe current song.g/l:Press to search forstations.FAV: Press to open the favoriteslist and select the favorites page.1 to 6: Press to select presetstations.k(Play/Pause): Press to pausetime shifted content, if equipped.RDS (Radio Data System)The radio may have RDS. The RDSfeature is available for use only onFM stations that broadcast RDSinformation. This feature only workswhen the information from the radiostation is available. In rare cases,a radio station could broadcastincorrect information that causesthe radio features to workimproperly. If this happens, contactthe radio station.While the radio is tuned to anFM-RDS station, the station nameor call letters display.Radio MenusRadio menus are available for AMand FM.Turn the Menu knob to open themain radio menu for that band.Selecting a BandPress the RADIO/BAND button tochoose AM, FM, or XM, if equipped.The last station that was playingstarts playing again.Selecting a StationSeek Tuning (Radio with CD)If the radio station is not known:Briefly press gor ltoautomatically search for the nextavailable station. If a station is notfound, the radio switches to a moresensitive search level. If a stationstill is not found, the frequency thatwas last active begins to play.If the radio station is known:Press and hold gor luntil thestation on the display is reached,then release the button.
Black plate (18,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20127-18 Infotainment SystemSeek Tuning (Radio with CD/DVDand MEM)Briefly press gor ltoautomatically search for the nextavailable station. If a station is notfound, the radio switches to a moresensitive search level. If a stationstill is not found, the frequency thatwas last active begins to play.Manual TuningTurn the TUNE knob to select thefrequency on the display.Favorites List1. Turn the Menu knob.2. Select Favorites List.3. Select the station.Station Lists1. Turn the Menu knob.2. Select AM or FM Station List. Allreceivable stations in the currentreception area are displayed. If astation list has not been created,an automatic station searchis done.3. Select the station.Category ListsMost stations that broadcast anRDS program type code specify thetype of programming transmitted.Some stations change the programtype code depending on thecontent. The system stores theRDS stations sorted by programtype in the FM category list.To search for a programming typedetermined by station:1. Turn the Menu knob.2. Select FM category list. A list ofall programming types availabledisplays.3. Select the programming type.A list of stations that transmitprogramming of the selectedtype displays.4. Select the station.The category lists are updatedwhen the station lists areupdated.Updating Station & Category ListsIf stations stored in the station listcan no longer be received:1. Turn the Menu knob.2. Select Update AM or FM StationList, if the stations stored inthe station list are no longerreceived. A station search will becompleted and the first station inthe updated list will play.To cancel the station search,press SELECT.Storing a Station as a FavoriteStations from all bands can bestored in any order in thefavorite pages.Up to six stations can be stored ineach favorite page and the numberof available favorite pages canbe set.Storing StationsTo store the station to a position inthe list, press the correspondingbutton 1 to 6 until a beep is heard.
Black plate (19,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Infotainment System 7-19Retrieving StationsPress the FAV button to open afavorite page or to switch to anotherfavorite page. Briefly press one ofthe 1 to 6 buttons to retrieve thestation.Time Shifting (Radio withCD/DVD and MEM)The radio with MEM time shiftfeature can rewind 20 minutes ofFM/AM content. While listening tothe radio, the content from thecurrent station is always beingbuffered.Press kto pause the radio. Theradio displays the time shift statusbar. The status bar shows theamount of content stored in thebuffer and the current pause point.To resume playback from thecurrent pause point, press kagain.The radio is no longer live, butplayed from the time shift buffer.A status bar displays below thestation number.Press and hold lor gto fastforward or rewind through the timeshift buffer. Hold luntil the endof the recorded buffer resumeslive playback.Press and release lor gto jumpforward or back 30 seconds in thetime shift buffer.When the radio station is changed,the buffer is cleared andautomatically restarted for thecurrent station. Content from apreviously tuned station is nolonger available.The time shift feature is notavailable while recording or withother sources of playback.Pausing AM/FM with the VehicleTurned OffIf AM/FM is paused when thevehicle is turned off, the radiocontinues to buffer the current radiostation for up to 20 minutes.If the vehicle is turned back onwithin 20 minutes, the radioresumes playback from thepaused point.AM-FM Radio (Radio withCD and Touchscreen)Playing the RadioAudio Source MenuVOL/ O(Power/Volume):.Press to turn the radio on or off..Turn the knob to increaseor decrease the volume.The volume is adjusted forthe current audio source orvoice prompts.The steering wheel controls canalso be used to adjust the volume.See Steering Wheel Controls onpage 5‑2for more information.Also, see “Radio Settings”and“Automatic Volume Control”inthis section.
Black plate (20,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20127-20 Infotainment SystemTUNE/ k:Turn to change theradio station. See “Finding aStation”following for moreinformation. Press to play aCD track.SOURCE: Press to select the AM,FM, or XM (if equipped) band.The audio sources can also bechanged by using the steeringwheel controls. See Steering WheelControls on page 5‑2for moreinformation.Tone MenuTo access the sound menu, pressthe TONE button.Use the sound menu to adjust thefollowing features:.Bass.Middle.Treble.EQ.Fade.BalanceSetting the ToneTo adjust the bass, treble andmidrange:.Bass: Press + or - to changethe level..Middle (Midrange): Press + or -to change the level..Treble: Press + or - to changethe level.Adjusting the SpeakersScroll through the settings byturning the Menu knob. PressSELECT to select Fade or Balance.To adjust the speaker fade:.Press F (Front) or R (Rear) tochange from the front or rearspeakers and turn the Menuknob for more sound from theleft or right speakers.To adjust the speaker balance:.Press L (Left) or R (Right) tochange from the left or rightspeakers.EQ SettingsEQ (Equalization): The EQsettings are selected through thesound menu. EQ provides a choiceof Manual or Talk. Turn the Menuknob to highlight. Press SELECT toselect Manual or Talk.Radio SettingsTo access the Radio settings menu:.Press the CONFIG button..Turn the Menu knob until RadioSettings displays. PressSELECT to display other optionswithin that feature.Audio system settings or featurescan be customized for:.Audio Cue Options.Auto Volume.Gracenotes Options.Startup Volume.Number of Favorite Pages
Black plate (21,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Infotainment System 7-21.XM Catagories.RDS.Software Version MenusAudio Cue Options: Audio CueVolume: Press + or ‐or turn theMenu knob to increase or decreasethe audio cue volume.Turn the Menu knob to On or OFFto turn Audio Cues on or off.Auto Volume: Turn the Menu knobto select volume Off, Low, Medium,or High.Gracenotes Options: PressSELECT to turn Normalization onor off.Startup Volume: Press + or ‐orturn the Menu knob to increase ordecrease the infotainment startupvolume.Number of Favorite Pages: Turnthe Menu knob to highlight thenumber of favorites. Press SELECTto select.XM Categories: Turn the Menuknob to highlight the category. PressSELECT to select. Turn the Menuknob to Show all XM Categories todisplay all categories.RDS: Press SELECT to turn RDSon or off.Software Version Menus: Turn theMenu knob to highlight the menu.Press SELECT to selectsoftware menu.Finding a StationSelect a band such as AM, FM,or XM (if equipped).Turn the Menu knob to find a radiostation. To select a preset station,press the corresponding presetbutton.See “Mixed-Band Presets”followingfor more information.Seeking a StationPress gor lto search for astation.Local Station List SearchTo find a list of local stations in thecurrent AM or FM band, turn theMenu knob. The radio performs asearch for available stations.Mixed-Band PresetsUp to 36 preset stations can bestored. Each page can storesix preset stations. The presetswithin a page can be from differentradio bands.To scroll through the pages, pressthe FAV (favorites) button. Thecurrent page number displays abovethe preset buttons.
Black plate (22,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20127-22 Infotainment SystemThe stored stations for each listdisplays at the bottom of the screen.The number of preset FAV lists canbe changed.To store a radio station to amixed-band preset list:1. Press the SOURCE button untilthe desired band is selected.2. Turn the Menu knob to thestation.3. Press the FAV button to scrollthe list.4. Press and hold one of thepreset buttons for more thantwo seconds. The stationfrequency appears on the presetbutton at the bottom of thedisplay.5. Repeat the steps for each presetin each page.To recall a preset station from aFAV page:1. Press the FAV button to scroll tothe page.2. Press the preset button. Thestored preset station is recalled.Automatic StoreThe strongest stations in aradio band can be searched andautomatically stored through theAutomatic Store feature. Pressand hold the AS button until anautostore message displays. The12 stations with the strongest signalstrength in the current radio bandwill be stored.Radio Data System (RDS)The audio system has a Radio DataSystem (RDS). RDS features areavailable for use only on FMstations that broadcast RDSinformation. With RDS, theradio can:.Seek to stations broadcastingthe selected type ofprogramming..Receive announcementsconcerning local and nationalemergencies..Display messages from radiostations.This system relies on receivingspecific information from thesestations and only works when theinformation is available. In rarecases, a radio station couldbroadcast incorrect information thatcauses the radio features to workimproperly. If this happens, contactthe radio station.
Black plate (23,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Infotainment System 7-23The RDS system is always on.When information is broadcast fromthe current FM station, the stationname or call letters display on theaudio screen. RDS can provide aprogram type (PTY) for currentprogramming and the name of theprogram being broadcasted.Satellite RadioXM™Satellite Radio ServiceVehicles with an XM satellite radiotuner and an XM satellite radiosubscription can receive XMprogramming.XM is a satellite radio service basedin the 48 contiguous United Statesand 10 Canadian provinces. XMsatellite radio has a wide variety ofprogramming and commercial-freemusic, coast to coast, and indigital-quality sound. A service feeis required to receive the XMservice. For more information, seewww.xmradio.com or call1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. InCanada, see www.xmradio.ca orcall 1-877-438-9677.When XM is active, the channelname and number, category name,song title, and artist display on thescreen.XM CategoriesXM stations are organized incategories.Removing or Adding Categories1. Press the CONFIG button.Turn the Menu knob untilRadio displays. Press SELECTor press Radio to display theradio settings menu.2. Select the Show/Hide XMCategories screen button.3. Press the category buttons onthe screen to show or hide thecategory.XM MessagesXL (Explicit LanguageChannels): These channels, or anyothers, can be blocked by request,by calling 1-800-929-2100 in theU.S., and 1-877-438-9677 inCanada.XM Updating: The encryption codein the receiver is being updated.No action is required. This processshould take no longer than30 seconds.Loading XM: The audio system isacquiring and processing audio andtext data. No action is needed. Thismessage should disappear shortly.Channel Off Air: This channel isnot currently in service. Tune in toanother channel.Channel Unauth: This channel isblocked or cannot be received withyour XM subscription package.Channel Unavailable: Thispreviously assigned channel is nolonger assigned. Tune to anotherstation.
Black plate (24,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20127-24 Infotainment SystemNo Artist Info: The system isworking properly. No artistinformation is available at thistime on this channel.No Title Info: The system isworking properly. No song titleinformation is available at thistime on this channel.No CAT Info: The system isworking properly. No categoryinformation is available at thistime on this channel.No Information: The system isworking properly. No text orinformational messages areavailable at this time on thischannel.No XM Signal: The system isworking properly. The vehicle maybe in a location where the XM signalis being blocked. When the vehicleis moved into an open area, thesignal should return.CAT Not Found: The system isworking properly. There are nochannels available for the selectedcategory.XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0,this message alternates with the XMradio eight‐digit radio ID label. Thislabel is needed to activate theservice.Unknown: If this message isreceived when tuned to channel 0,there could be a receiver fault.Consult with your dealer.Check Antenna: If this messagedoes not clear within a short periodof time, the receiver could have afault. Consult with your dealer.XM Not Available: If this messagedoes not clear within a short periodof time, the receiver could have afault. Consult with your dealer.Radio ReceptionFrequency interference andstatic can occur during normalradio reception if items such ascellular phone chargers, vehicleconvenience accessories, andexternal electronic devices areplugged into the accessory poweroutlet. If there is interference orstatic, unplug the item from theaccessory power outlet.FMFM signals only reach about16 to 65 km (10 to 40 mi). Althoughthe radio has a built-in electroniccircuit that automatically works toreduce interference, some staticcan occur, especially around tallbuildings or hills, causing thesound to fade in and out.
Black plate (25,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Infotainment System 7-25AMThe range for most AM stations isgreater than for FM, especially atnight. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interfere witheach other. For better radioreception, most AM radio stationsboost the power levels during theday, and then reduce these levelsduring the night. Static can alsooccur when things like storms andpower lines interfere with radioreception. When this happens, tryreducing the treble on the radio.XM™Satellite Radio ServiceXM satellite radio service givesdigital radio reception from coast tocoast in the 48 contiguous UnitedStates, and in Canada. Just as withFM, tall buildings or hills caninterfere with satellite radio signals,causing the sound to fade in andout. In addition, traveling or standingunder heavy foliage, bridges,garages, or tunnels may cause lossof the XM signal for a period of time.Cellular Phone UsageCellular phone usage may causeinterference with the vehicle's radio.This interference may occur whenmaking or receiving phone calls,charging the phone's battery,or simply having the phone on. Thisinterference can cause an increasedlevel of static while listening to theradio. If static is received whilelistening to the radio, unplug thecellular phone and turn it off.Backglass AntennaThe AM-FM antenna is integratedwith the rear window defogger,located in the rear window. Makesure that the inside surface of therear window is not scratched andthat the lines on the glass are notdamaged. If the inside surface isdamaged, it could interfere withradio reception. For proper radioreception, the antenna connectorneeds to be properly attached to thepost on the glass.If a cellular telephone antennaneeds to be attached to the glass,make sure that the grid lines for theAM-FM antenna are not damaged.There is enough space betweenthe grid lines to attach a cellulartelephone antenna withoutinterfering with radio reception.Notice: Using a razor blade orsharp object to clear the insiderear window can damage the rearwindow antenna and/or the rearwindow defogger. Repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not clear the insiderear window with sharp objects.Notice: Do not apply aftermarketglass tinting with metallic film.The metallic film in some tintingmaterials will interfere with ordistort the incoming radioreception. Any damage caused toyour backglass antenna due tometallic tinting materials will notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty.
Black plate (26,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20127-26 Infotainment SystemSatellite Radio AntennaFor vehicles with XM satellite radioservice, the antenna is located onthe roof of the vehicle. Keep theantenna clear of obstructions forclear radio reception.Audio PlayersCD PlayerThe player can be used for CDand MP3s.With the ignition on, insert a CD intothe slot, label side up. The playerpulls it in and begins playing.The vehicle must be in P (Park) forvideo to display.The system is capable of playing:.Most audio CDs.CD-R.CD-RW.MP3 or unprotected WMAformatsWhen playing any compatiblerecordable disc, the sound qualitycan be reduced due to disc quality,the method of recording, the qualityof the music or video that has beenrecorded, or the way the disc hasbeen handled.To avoid damage to the CD player:.Do not use scratched ordamaged discs.Do not apply labels to discs.The labels could get caught inthe player..Insert only one disc at a time..Keep the loading slot free offoreign materials, liquids anddebris.If a description label is needed, trylabeling the top of the disc using amarking pen.
Black plate (27,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Infotainment System 7-27Loading and Ejecting DiscsTo load a disc:1. Turn the ignition on.2. Insert a disc into the slot. Theplayer pulls it in the rest of theway. If the disc is damaged orimproperly loaded, there is anerror and the disc ejects.The disc automatically plays onceloaded.Press Xto eject a disc from theCD player.Playing a CDA disc must be loaded to select thesource.When a disc is loaded, the disc icondisplays.There are two ways to play a CD:.Insert the disc and playbackstarts automatically..Press the SOURCE repeatedlyto select the disc source.Playing an Audio CD with aColor RadioA track number displays at thebeginning of each track. Song,Artist, and Album informationdisplays when available.Use the following controls to playthe disc:TUNE/ k(Play/Pause): Press tostart, pause, or resume play.l(Seek Next/FWD):.Seeks to the next track..Press and hold to fast forwardthrough a track. Release toreturn to playing speed. Elapsedtime displays.g(Seek Previous/REV):.Seeks to the beginning of thecurrent or previous track.‐If the track has been playingfor less than five seconds, itseeks the previous track.‐If longer than five seconds, thecurrent track starts from thebeginning..Press and hold to fast reversethrough a track. Release thebutton to return to playingspeed. Elapsed time displays.Menu Knob:Turn to:.Enter the menu system..Highlight a menu option..Select a value.SELECT:Press to:.Select or activate the highlightedmenu option..Confirm a set value..Turn a system setting on or off.
Black plate (28,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20127-28 Infotainment SystemControl Buttons for Radio withCD and DVDThe buttons used to control theCD player are:CD/AUX: Press to use theCD player.lor g:Press to select tracks orto fast forward or rewind within atrack.INFO: Press to display additionalinformation about the current trackthat may be available.TUNE: Turn to select tracks.Menu Knob: Turn to enterthe menu.SELECT: Press to select an item.CD MenuCD Menu for Color Radio OnlyPress SELECT to display theCD Menu.Shuffle: Select to play the tracksrandomly rather than in sequence.Select again to stop shuffle. A checkmark indicates shuffle is on.Track List: Select to display the listof tracks on the disc. Select thetrack from the list. The selectedtrack plays and the CD screendisplays.Error MessagesIf Disc Read Error displays and/orthe disc comes out, it could be forone of the following reasons:.The disc has an invalid orunknown format..The disc is not from acorrect region..The disc is very hot. Try the discagain when the temperaturereturns to normal..The road is very rough. Try thedisc again when the road issmoother..The disc is dirty, scratched, wet,or upside down..The air is very humid.Try the disc again later..There was a problem whileburning the disc..The label is caught in theCD player.
Black plate (29,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Infotainment System 7-29If the CD is not playing correctly, forany other reason, try a knowngood CD.If any error continues, contact yourdealer.CD/DVD PlayerThe CD/DVD player can play CDs,DVD‐As, MP3/WMA CDs, MP3/WMA DVDs, and DVD‐Vs.The CD/DVD player will not play8 cm (3 in) discs.Care of CDs and DVDsSound quality can be reduced dueto disc quality, recording method,quality of the music recorded, andhow the disc has been handled.Handle discs carefully and storethem in their original cases or otherprotective cases away from directsunlight and dust. If the bottomsurface of a disc is damaged, thedisc may not play properly or at all.Do not touch the bottom surface ofa disc while handling it; this coulddamage the surface. Pick up discsby grasping the outer edges or theedge of the hole and the outer edge.If the bottom surface of a disc isdirty, take a soft, lint‐free cloth,or dampen a clean, soft cloth in amild neutral detergent solutionmixed with water, and clean it.Wipe the disc from the center tothe outer edge.Care of the CD/DVD PlayerDo not add a label to a disc, as itcould get caught in the CD/DVDplayer. If a label is needed, label thetop of the recorded disc with amarking pen.Do not use disc lens cleanersbecause they could contaminate thelens of the disc optics and damagethe CD/DVD player.Notice: If a label is added to aCD, more than one CD is insertedinto the slot at a time, or anattempt is made to play scratchedor damaged CDs, the CD playercould be damaged.While using the CD player, useonly CDs in good conditionwithout any label, load one CD ata time, and keep the CD playerand the loading slot free offoreign materials, liquids, anddebris.Control ButtonsThe buttons used to control theCD/DVD player are:MEM/DVD/AUX: Press to choosebetween the MEM, CD/DVD,and AUX.l/g:Press to select tracks orto fast forward or rewind within atrack.INFO: Press to display additionalinformation about the disc that maybe available.TUNE: Turn to select tracks.Menu Knob: Turn to enterthe menu.SELECT: Press to select an item.
Black plate (30,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20127-30 Infotainment SystemX(Eject): Press to eject the disc.k:Press to pause a CD, DVD‐A,or DVD‐V; press again to resumeplayback. Press and hold to stop aDVD‐V disc.Inserting a CD or DVDWith the printed side facing up,insert a disc into the slot until it isdrawn in.Removing a CD or DVDPress X.The disc is pushed out of theCD/DVD slot.If the disc is not removed after it isejected, it is pulled back in after afew seconds.Playing a CD or DVD‐A DiscPress the MEM/DVD/AUX button ifthere is a disc in the player.It begins playing.Information about the disc andcurrent track is shown on thedisplay depending on thedata stored.Selecting CD or DVD‐A TracksUsing the control buttons:.Press gor lto select theprevious or next track..Turn the TUNE knob.Using the menu:1. Turn the Menu knob.2. Select Tracks List.3. Select the track.Pausing a CD or DVD‐A TrackPress kto pause a CD or DVD‐Atrack. Press kagain to continueplaying the track.Playing CD or DVD‐A Tracks inRandom OrderTurn the Menu knob and set ShuffleSongs to On.Fast Forward and RewindPress and hold lor gto fastforward or rewind within thecurrent track.Playing an MP3 CD or DVDFiles that are not stored in foldersare displayed in the rootdirectory (disc).The search rate increases if theMenu knob is continuously turnedwhile searching in a list.Selecting an MP3 TrackUsing the control buttons:.Press gor lto select theprevious or next track..Turn the TUNE knob.Using the CD or DVD Menu:1. Turn the Menu knob.2. Select Folder List.3. Select the folder.4. Select the track.
Black plate (31,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Infotainment System 7-31Searching for MP3s on a CDor DVDIt is normal for the search featureto take some time to display theinformation after reading the discdue to the amount of informationstored on the disc. The infotainmentsystem automatically switches toFM while the disc is being read.Files that do not have any metadata stored in the ID3 tag displayas Unknown.Tracks can be searched for by:.Playlists.Artists.Albums.Song Titles.GenresThe number of objects in eachcategory is shown in parenthesesafter the category.To search for tracks:1. Turn the Menu knob.2. Select Search.3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,Song Titles, or Genres.4. Select the track. The search rateincreases if the Menu knob iscontinuously turned whilesearching in a list.Playing MP3 Tracks in RandomOrderTurn the Menu knob and then setShuffle Songs to On.Recording an Audio or MP3CD to MEMSee Mass Storage Media (MEM) onpage 7‑35 for more information.Playing a DVD‐VSee Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)System on page 7‑47 for informationabout how to control a Video DVDusing the wireless remote control.Selecting a ChapterUsing the control buttons:.Press gor lto select theprevious or next chapter..Turn the TUNE knob.Using the DVD menu:1. Turn the Menu knob.2. Select Chapter List.3. Select the chapter.Selecting a Title1. Turn the Menu knob.2. Select Title List.3. Select the title.
Black plate (32,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20127-32 Infotainment SystemChanging the Audio Stream1. Turn the Menu knob.2. Select Audio Stream.3. Select Change Audio Stream.4. Press SELECT to change theselection.Select Cancel to exit the menu.Pausing a DVD1. Turn the Menu knob.2. Select Pause to pause the disc.Select Unpause to startplayback.Navigating the DVD‐V Disc MenuUse the following actions tonavigate the title menu on aDVD‐V Disc..Select/Enter.Cursor UP.Cursor DOWN.Cursor RIGHT.Cursor LEFT.Up MenuUse the following actions tonavigate the menu on a DVD‐V Discwhile playing chapters..Pause (Play).Chapter List.Title List.DVD/DVD.DVD/AUX.AUX/DVD.AUX/AUXTo navigate the menu:1. Turn the Menu knob.2. Select the action.MP3Playing an MP3, CD, and DVDMP3 FormatThere are guidelines that must bemet, when creating an MP3 disc orthe CD might not play.The guidelines are:.Sampling rate: 8 kHz, 16 kHz,22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz,44.1 kHz, and 48 kHz..Bit rates supported: 8, 16, 24,32, 40, 48, 56, 64, 80, 96, 112,128, 144, 160, 192, 224, 256,and 320 kbps..Maximum number of folders is255 with a maximum hierarchyof eight folders..Maximum of 1024 files on a disc.
Black plate (33,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Infotainment System 7-33.Recorded on a CD-R or CD-RWwith a maximum capacity of700 MB..The Artist/Album/Song Titles/Genre information requires aCD to be fully scanned beforethe music navigator works withthese menus. Disc scanningdoes not occur when the disc isbeing played.When an MP3 is loaded in theplayer, MP3 displays.If a disc is already loaded, but youare currently on a map screen orlistening to a different audio source,press SOURCE to switch to thedisc source. A track numberappears on the display wheneach track starts to play.To play a disc:TUNE/ k(Play/Pause): Use tostart, pause, or resume play of aloaded disc.l(Next/FWD): Press to seek tothe next track. Press again tocontinue moving forward throughthe disc.Press and hold to advance quicklythrough playback. Release thebutton to return to playing speed.Elapsed time displays.g(Previous/REV): Press to seekto the beginning of the current orprevious track. If the track hasplayed for less than five seconds, itgoes to the previous track. If longerthan five seconds, the current trackrestarts. Press again to continuemoving back through the disc.Press and hold this button toreverse quickly through playback.Release the button to return toplaying speed. Elapsed timedisplays.Menu Knob:Turn to:.Enter the menu system..Highlight a menu option..Select a value.SELECT:Press to:.Select or activate the highlightedmenu option..Confirm a set value..Turn a system setting on or off.
Black plate (34,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20127-34 Infotainment SystemDisc Music MenuPress SELECT to access theDisc music menu.Turn SELECT to scroll, then pressit to select any of the followingcategory buttons on the MP3 musicmenu to display the correspondingcategory screen:.Folders/PlaylistsSelect to view the folders storedon the disc. Select a folder toview the list of all the songs inthat folder. There might be adelay before the list displays.Select the song from the list andit begins to play..Track List (All Songs)Select to view a list of all songson the disc. There might be adelay before the list displays.Select a song from the list andit begins to play. Songs aredisplayed based on the CDburning application folder andfile structure used..ArtistsSelect to view the list of artiststhat have been stored on thedisc. Select an artist name toview a list of all songs by theartist. There might be a delaybefore the list displays. Selectthe desired song from the listand it begins to play..AlbumsSelect to view the albums on thedisc. Select the album to view alist of all songs on the album.There might be a delay beforethe list displays. Select a songfrom the list and it begins to play..GenresSelect to view the genres on thedisc. Select a genre to view a listof all songs of that genre. Theremight be a delay before the listdisplays. Select a song from thelist and it begins to play..Song TitlesSelect to display a list of allsongs on the disc. There mightbe a delay before the listdisplays. Select a song from thelist and it begins to play. Songsare displayed in alphabeticalorder based on the Song TitleID3 tag, if available.Root DirectoryThe root directory is treated as afolder. All files contained directlyunder the root directory areaccessed prior to any root directoryfolders.
Black plate (35,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Infotainment System 7-35Empty Directory or FolderIf a root directory or folder is emptyor contains only folders, the playeradvances to the next folder in thefile structure that contains acompressed audio file. The emptyfolder(s) are not displayed ornumbered.No FolderWhen the CD only containscompressed audio files without anyfolders or playlists, all files arelocated under the root folder.File System and NamingThe displayed song title is takenfrom the file's ID3 tag. If a song titleis not present in the ID3 tag, theradio displays the file name as thetrack name.Mass StorageMedia (MEM)Infotainment systems with MEMstorage are able to record up to1.1 GB (gigabyte) of music fromaudio CDs, MP3/WMA/AAC discs,and USB storage devices. The MEMplayer can also time shift audio fromAM, FM, and XM radio.Music or content stored in MEM thatyou did not create, or have the rightto distribute, must be deleted beforethe sale or end of lease of thevehicle.Control ButtonsThe buttons used to control theMEM player are:MEM/DVD/AUX: Press to selectthe MEM player.l/g:Press to select tracksor to fast forward or rewind withina track.INFO: Press to display additionalinformation about the MEM trackthat may be available.TUNE/ k:Press to pause thetrack currently playing; press againto resume playback. Turn to selecttracks.OREC: Press to record musicfrom a CD or USB drive.DEL: Press to delete the currenttrack from MEM.FAV (Favorites): Press to displayMEM favorites.1 to 6: Press to select a trackor playlist stored in that numericposition.
Black plate (36,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20127-36 Infotainment SystemRecording from Audio CDsThe infotainment system can recordthe current song playing or all songsfrom an audio CD to MEM. A statusbar appears on the top of thedisplay when the recording processstarts and disappears when theprocess has ended. Copy protectedCDs cannot be recorded to MEM.Recording to MEMPress OREC, then select RecordCurrent Song or Record All Songson Disc. If the track has startedplaying, the system will restart thetrack and begin recording from thebeginning of the track. When thesong recording is completed, themessage Song Recorded to MEMdisplays, and there may be a slightpause.Songs recorded to MEM are storedas the current date, disc, and tracknumber.Re-recording a PreviouslyRecorded DiscIf the disc or track has alreadybeen recorded to MEM, themessage The Song(s) is AlreadyRecorded displays.Stopping the RecordingPress OREC while recording froman audio CD to display the stoprecording option. Select StopRecording Song to MEM.Renaming Recorded DiscsDiscs that have been recorded toMEM can be renamed.1. Turn the Menu knob.2. Select Rename Recorded Discs.3. Select the disc.4. Select Album or Artist to renameeither one.5. Use the Menu knob to enterthe character sequence. SeeOperation on page 7‑12 formore information.Recording from MP3/WMADiscs or USB Storage DevicesUSB Host SupportThe USB connector uses the USBstandards, 1.1 and 2.0.USB Supported Devices.USB Flash Drives.Portable USB Hard DrivesRecording to MEMPress OREC, then select RecordCurrent Song or Record CurrentFolder.The information stored by MEM istitled according to the ID3 tagassociated with it.Re-recording a PreviouslyRecorded DiscIf the disc or track has alreadybeen recorded to MEM, themessage The Song(s) is AlreadyRecorded displays.
Black plate (37,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Infotainment System 7-37Stopping the RecordingPress OREC while recording froman MP3/WMA CD or USB storagedevice to display the stop recordingoption. Select Stop Recording Songto MEM.Deleting Tracks from MEMIndividual tracks and all tracks canbe deleted from MEM.To delete individual tracks, pressand release the DEL button whilethe track is playing.To delete all tracks from MEM,press and hold the DEL button whilea track is playing.Playing from MEMPlaying Back a PreviouslyRecorded CDTurn the TUNE knob to select atrack if MEM is already playing fromthe previously recorded disc.1. Select Recorded Disc List.2. Select the disc.3. Select the track.Searching for a TrackTracks can be searched for by:.Playlists.Artists.Albums.Song Titles.GenresThe number of objects in eachcategory is shown in parenthesesafter the category.To search for tracks:1. Turn the Menu knob.2. Select Search.3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,Song Titles, or Genres.4. Select the track. The search rateincreases if the Menu knob iscontinuously turned whilesearching in a list.Shuffle SongsSelect the Shuffle Songs optionfrom the MEM menu to randomlyplay back tracks stored in MEM.Configuring MEM FavoritesDuring MEM playback, press theFAV button to change betweenfavorite categories. The favoritecategories are:.Playlists.Artists.Albums.GenresTo remove MEM favoritescategories:1. Press the CONFIG button.2. Select Radio Settings.3. Select MEM Favorites.4. Remove the checkmark from thebox to remove that MEMfavorites category.Replace the checkmark to re-addthe removed category.
Black plate (38,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20127-38 Infotainment SystemSaving MEM Tracks asFavoritesFavorites can be saved by pressingand holding one of the 1 to 6buttons. Favorites can be storedaccording to the following list:Playlist: Adds the currently playingtrack to the playlist selected.Artist: Saves the artist associatedwith the currently playing track inthe indicated favorites position.Album: Saves the albumassociated with the currently playingtrack in the indicated favoritesposition.Genre: Saves the genre associatedwith the currently playing track inthe indicated favorites position.Creating PlaylistsTo create a playlist using tracksstored in MEM:1. Select Playlist from the MEMfavorites.2. Select the track to be stored inthe playlist.3. Press and hold one of the 1 to6 buttons until the track can beheard again to store the track.4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 tostore additional tracks in theplaylist.Auxiliary Devices(Radio with CD)The optional AUX input allowsportable devices to connect to thevehicle using the 3.5 mm (1/8 in)input jack or the USB port.Portable devices are controlled byusing the menu system described inOperation on page 7‑12.The AUX input is located in thecenter console.
Black plate (39,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Infotainment System 7-393.5 mm JackConnect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable tothe auxiliary input jack to use aportable audio player.Playback of an audio device that isconnected to the 3.5 mm jack canonly be controlled using the controlson the device.Adjusting the VolumeTurn the VOL/ Oknob to adjust thevolume of the infotainment systemafter the volume level has been seton the portable audio device.USB PortFor vehicles with a USB port, thefollowing devices may be connectedand controlled by the infotainmentsystem..iPods.PlaysForSure Devices (PFDs).USB Drives.ZunesNot all iPods, PFDs, USB Drives,and Zunes are compatible with theinfotainment system.Connecting and Controllingan iPod®Not all iPods can be controlled bythe infotainment system.Connecting an iPodConnect the iPod to the USB port.Searching for a TrackTracks can be searched for by:.Playlists.Artists.Albums.Song Titles.Podcasts.Genres.Audiobooks.ComposersTo search for tracks:1. Turn the Menu knob.2. Select Search.3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,Song Titles, Podcasts, Genres,Audiobooks, or Composers.4. Select the track.ShuffleTurn the Menu knob and set ShuffleSongs (Random) to On or Off, thenpress the /BACK button to returnthe main screen.On: Plays tracks in the currentfolder in random order.Off: Plays tracks in the currentfolder in sequential order.
Black plate (40,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20127-40 Infotainment SystemRepeatTurn the Menu knob and setRepeat to On or Off, then pressthe /BACK button to return themain screen.On: Repeats the current track.Off: Playback starts from thebeginning of the current track afterthe last track finishes.Connecting and Controlling aPlaysForSure Device (PFD)or Zune™Connecting a PFD or ZuneConnect the PFD or Zune to theUSB port.Searching for a TrackTracks can be searched for by:.Playlists.Artists.Albums.Song Titles.Podcasts.GenresTo search for tracks:1. Turn the Menu knob.2. Select Search.3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,Song Titles, Podcasts,or Genres.4. Select the track.Shuffle FunctionalityTurn the Menu knob and set ShuffleSongs (Random) to On or Off.On: Plays current tracks in randomorder.Off: Plays current tracks insequential order.Repeat FunctionalityTurn the Menu knob and set Repeatto On or Off.Repeat On: Repeats the currenttrack.Repeat Off: Playback starts fromthe beginning of the current trackafter the last track finishes.Connecting and Controlling aUSB DriveThe infotainment system can onlyplay back .mp3 and .wma files froma USB drive.Only the first 2,500 songs arerecognized on the device.When a device is not supported, themessage “No supported data found.You can safely disconnect thedevice”appears.Connecting a USB DriveConnect the USB drive to theUSB port.
Black plate (41,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Infotainment System 7-41Searching for a TrackIt is normal for the search featureto take some time to display theinformation after reading the devicedue to the amount of informationstored.Files that do not have any metadata stored in the ID3 tag displayas Unknown.Tracks can be searched for by:.Playlists*.Artists.Albums.Song Titles.Genres.Folder View*This only displays if a playlist isfound on the device.To search for tracks:1. Turn the Menu knob.2. Select Search.3. Select: Playlists, Artists,Albums, Song Titles, Genres,or Folder View.4. Select the track.Shuffle FunctionalityTurn the Menu knob and set ShuffleSongs (Random) to On or Off.On: Plays current tracks inrandom order.Off: Plays current tracks insequential order.Repeat FunctionalityTurn the Menu knob and set Repeatto On or Off.Repeat On: Repeats the currenttrack.Repeat Off: Playback starts fromthe beginning of the current trackafter the last track finishes.Auxiliary Devices(Radio with CD/DVDand MEM)The optional AUX input allowsportable devices to be connectedusing the 3.5 mm (1/8 in) input jackor the USB port.Portable devices are controlled byusing the menu system described inOperation on page 7‑12.The AUX input is located in thecenter console.
Black plate (42,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20127-42 Infotainment System3.5 mm JackConnect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable tothe auxiliary input jack to use aportable audio player.Playback of an audio device that isconnected to the 3.5 mm jack canonly be controlled using the controlson the device.Adjusting the VolumeTurn the VOL/ Oknob to adjust thevolume of the infotainment systemafter the volume level has been seton the portable audio device.USB PortThe following devices may beconnected to the USB port andcontrolled by the infotainmentsystem..iPods.USB Mass Storage DevicesNot all iPods or USB Mass StorageDevices are compatible with theinfotainment system.Connecting and Controllingan iPod®Not all iPods can be controlled bythe infotainment system.Connecting an iPodConnect the iPod to the USB port.Selecting a TrackUsing the control buttons:.Press gor lto select theprevious or next track..Turn the TUNE knob to select atrack in the current submenu.The track will start to play.Playing Tracks in Random OrderTurn the Menu knob and set ShuffleSongs to On or Off.Shuffle On: Plays current tracks inrandom order.Shuffle Off: Plays current tracks insequential order.Searching for a TrackTracks can be searched for by:.Playlists.Artists.Albums.Song Titles.Genres.Composers.AudiobooksThe number of objects in eachcategory is shown in parenthesesafter the category.To search for tracks:1. Turn the Menu knob.2. Select Search.3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,Song Titles, Genres,Composers, or Audiobooks.4. Select the track. The search rateincreases if the Menu knob iscontinuously turned whilesearching in a list.
Black plate (43,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Infotainment System 7-43Connecting and Controlling aUSB DriveFiles that are not stored in foldersare displayed in the rootdirectory (USB).Connecting a USB DriveConnect the USB drive to theUSB port.Disconnecting a USB DriveA USB drive should be ejected fromthe USB port before disconnectingit. To eject a USB drive:1. Turn the Menu knob.2. Select USB Eject.Playing Tracks in Random OrderTurn the Menu knob and then setShuffle Songs to On.Selecting a TrackUsing the control buttons:.Press gor lto select theprevious or next track..Turn the TUNE knob to select atrack in the current submenu.The track will start to play.Selecting a track in a differentfolder:1. Turn the Menu knob.2. Select Folder List.3. Select the folder.4. Select the track.Searching for TracksIt is normal for the search featureto take some time to display theinformation after reading the devicedue to the amount of informationstored.Files that do not have any metadata stored in the ID3 tag displayas Unknown.Tracks can be searched by:.Playlists.Artists.Albums.Song Titles.GenresThe number of objects in eachcategory is shown in parenthesesafter the category.To search for tracks:1. Turn the Menu knob.2. Select Search.3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,Song Titles, or Genres.4. Select the track. The search rateincreases if the Menu knob iscontinuously turned whilesearching in a list.Recording Tracks to MEMSee Mass Storage Media (MEM) onpage 7‑35 for more information.
Black plate (44,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20127-44 Infotainment SystemAuxiliary Devices(Radio with CD andTouchscreen)The optional AUX input allowsportable devices to connect to thevehicle using the 3.5 mm (1/8 in)input jack or the USB port.Portable devices are controlled byusing the menu system describedin Overview (Radio with CD) onpage 7‑4or Overview (Radio withCD/DVD and MEM) on page 7‑6orOverview (Radio with CD andTouchscreen) on page 7‑8.This jack is not an audio output.Do not plug headphones into theauxiliary input jack. Drivers areencouraged to set up any auxiliarydevice while the vehicle is inP (Park).The AUX input is located in thecenter console.3.5 mm JackConnect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable tothe auxiliary input jack to use aportable audio player.Playback of an audio device that isconnected to the 3.5 mm jack canonly be controlled using the controlson the device.If an auxiliary device has alreadybeen connected, but a differentsource is currently active, PressSOURCE repeatedly to cyclethrough all of the available audiosource screens, until the AUXsource screen is selected.Adjusting the VolumeTurn the VOL/ Oknob to adjust thevolume of the infotainment systemafter the volume level has been seton the portable audio device.
Black plate (45,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Infotainment System 7-45USB PortFor vehicles with a USB port, thefollowing devices may be connectedand controlled by the infotainmentsystem..iPods.PlaysForSure Devices (PFDs).USB Drives.Zunes™Not all iPods, PFDs, USB Drives,and Zunes are compatible with theinfotainment system.Connecting and Controllingan iPod®Not all iPods can be controlled bythe infotainment system.Connecting an iPodConnect the iPod to the USB port.Searching for a TrackTracks can be searched for by:.Playlists.Artists.Albums.Song Titles.Podcasts.Genres.Audiobooks.ComposersTo search for tracks:1. Turn the Menu knob.2. Select Search.3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,Song Titles, Podcasts, Genres,Audiobooks, or Composers.4. Select the track.ShuffleTurn the Menu knob and set ShuffleSongs (Random) to On or Off, thenpress the /BACK button to returnthe main screen.On: Plays tracks in the currentfolder in random order.Off: Plays tracks in the currentfolder in sequential order.RepeatTurn the Menu knob and setRepeat to On or Off, then pressthe /BACK button to return to themain screen.On: Repeats the current track.Off: Playback starts from thebeginning of the current track afterthe last track finishes.
Black plate (46,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20127-46 Infotainment SystemConnecting and Controlling aPlaysForSure Device (PFD)or Zune™Connecting a PFD or ZuneConnect the PFD or Zune to theUSB port.Searching for a TrackTracks can be searched for by:.Playlists.Artists.Albums.Song Titles.Podcasts.GenresTo search for tracks:1. Turn the Menu knob.2. Select Search.3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,Song Titles, Podcasts,or Genres.4. Select the track.Shuffle FunctionalityTurn the Menu knob and set ShuffleSongs (Random) to On or Off.On: Plays current tracks inrandom order.Off: Plays current tracks insequential order.Repeat FunctionalityTurn the Menu knob and set Repeatto On or Off.Repeat On: Repeats thecurrent track.Repeat Off: Playback startsfrom the beginning of the currenttrack after the last track finishes.Connecting and Controlling aUSB DriveThe infotainment system can onlyplay back .mp3 and .wma files froma USB drive.Only the first 2,500 songs arerecognized on the device.When a device is not supported, themessage “No supported data found.You can safely disconnect thedevice”appears.Connecting a USB DriveConnect the USB drive to theUSB port.
Black plate (47,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Infotainment System 7-47Searching for a TrackIt is normal for the search featureto take some time to display theinformation after reading the devicedue to the amount of informationstored.Files that do not have any metadata stored in the ID3 tag displayas Unknown.Tracks can be searched for by:.Playlists*.Artists.Albums.Song Titles.Genres.Folder View*This only displays if a playlist isfound on the device.To search for tracks:1. Turn the Menu knob.2. Select Search.3. Select: Playlists, Artists,Albums, Song Titles, Genres,or Folder View.4. Select the track.Shuffle FunctionalityTurn the Menu knob and set ShuffleSongs (Random) to On or Off.On: Plays current tracks in randomorder.Off: Plays current tracks insequential order.Repeat FunctionalityTurn the Menu knob and set Repeatto On or Off.Repeat On: Repeats the currenttrack.Repeat Off: Playback starts fromthe beginning of the current trackafter the last track finishes.Rear SeatInfotainmentRear Seat Entertainment(RSE) SystemThe vehicle may have a DVD RearSeat Entertainment (RSE) system.The RSE system works with thevehicle's infotainment system.The DVD player is part of thefront radio. The RSE systemincludes a radio with a DVD player,two rear seat video display screens,audio/video jacks, two wirelessheadphones, and a remote control.See CD/DVD Player on page 7‑29or the separate navigation systemmanual for more information on thevehicle's DVD system.
Black plate (48,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20127-48 Infotainment SystemBefore DrivingThe RSE is for rear seatpassengers only. The driver cannotsafely view the video screen whiledriving.In severe or extreme weatherconditions, the RSE system may notwork until the temperature is withinthe operating range. The operatingrange is above −20°C (−4°F) andbelow 60°C (140°F). If thetemperature is outside of this range,heat or cool the vehicle until it iswithin the operating range.Global OffDepending on the infotainmentsystem, the RSE system may havea Global Off feature. The Global Offfeature disables all RSE systemfeatures. Press and hold theradio power button for more thanthree seconds for Global Off todisable the RSE features.On some infotainment systems, theGlobal Off feature can be turned offby performing one of the following:.Press and hold the radio powerbutton for more thanthree seconds..Insert or eject any disc..Insert a DVD video disc..Press the remote control powerbutton..Press the MEM/DVD/AUX buttonor kwhen a DVD video disc isin the player..Press the SRC button on thesteering wheel when a DVDvideo disc is in the player..Cycle the ignition.HeadphonesA. Battery CoverB. Channel 1 or 2 SwitchC. Power ButtonD. Volume ControlE. Power Indicator LightRSE includes two 2-channelwireless headphones. Channel 1 isdedicated to the DVD player, andChannel 2 is dedicated to anyexternal auxiliary device connectedto the A/V jacks.
Black plate (49,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Infotainment System 7-49The headphones are used to listento various multi‐media. The wirelessheadphones have a power button,channel 1/2 switch, and a volumecontrol. Turn the headphones offwhen not in use.Push Oto turn on the headphones.A light on the headphones comeson. If the light does not come on,check the batteries. Intermittentsound or static can also indicateweak batteries. See “BatteryReplacement”later in this sectionfor more information.Infrared transmitters are on the topof the left seatback video screen.The headphones shut offautomatically to save the batterypower if the RSE system is shut offor if the headphones are out ofrange of the transmitters for morethan three minutes. Moving too farforward or stepping out of thevehicle can cause the headphonesto lose the signal or have static.To adjust the volume on theheadphones, use the volumecontrol.For optimal audio performance, theheadphones must be worn correctly.Headphones should be worn withthe headband over the top of thehead for best audio reception. Thesymbol L (Left) appears on theoutside bottom edge of the ear cupand should be positioned on the leftear. The symbol R (Right) appearson the outside bottom edge of theear cup and should be positioned onthe right ear.Notice: Do not store theheadphones in heat or directsunlight. This could damage theheadphones and repairs will notbe covered by the warranty.Storage in extreme cold canweaken the batteries. Keep theheadphones stored in a cool,dry place.If the foam ear pads attached to theheadphones become worn ordamaged, the pads can be replacedseparately from the headphone set.To purchase replacement ear pads,call 1‐888‐293‐3332, then promptzero (0), or contact your dealer.Battery ReplacementTo change the batteries:1. Loosen the screw to the batterydoor located on the left side ofthe headphones.2. Slide the battery door open.3. Replace the two AAA batteries.4. Replace the battery door andtighten the screw.Remove the batteries if theheadphones are not going to beused for a long period of time.
Black plate (50,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20127-50 Infotainment SystemAudio/Video (A/V) JacksIf available, the A/V jacks arelocated on the rear of the floorconsole. They allow audio orvideo cables to be connected froman auxiliary device such as acamcorder or a video game system.The A/V jacks are color coded:.Yellow for video input..White for left audio input..Red for right audio input.Power for auxiliary devices is notsupplied by the radio system.To use the auxiliary inputs of theRSE system:1. Connect the auxiliary devicecables to the A/V jacks.2. Power on both the auxiliarydevice and the RSE videoscreen.Changing the Source on the VideoDisplay ScreensThe image from the auxiliary devicecan be switched between the videodisplay screens.To change the display:1. Press the AUX button on theremote control to change thesource of both video screensfrom the DVD player to theauxiliary device.2. Press the AUX button a secondtime to change the left videoscreen source to the DVD playerand the right video screen to theauxiliary device.3. Press the AUX button a thirdtime to change the left videoscreen source to the auxiliarydevice and the right videoscreen to the DVD player.4. Press the AUX button a fourthtime to change the source ofboth video screens to theDVD player.Changing the RSE Video ScreenSettingsThe screen display mode,brightness, and language canbe changed from the setup menuusing the remote control.To change a setting:1. Press z.2. Use n,q,p,o, and rtoselect the settings.3. Press zagain to exit thesetup menu.
Black plate (51,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Infotainment System 7-51Audio OutputAudio from the DVD player orauxiliary inputs can be heardthrough the following:.Wireless Headphones.Vehicle SpeakersThe RSE system transmits theaudio signal to the wirelessheadphones if an audio signal isavailable. See “Headphones”earlierin this section for more information.The front seat passengers are ableto listen to playback from the A/Vjacks through the vehicle speakersby selecting Rear A/V as the sourceon the radio.Video ScreensThe video screens are located inthe back of the driver and frontpassenger seats.To use the video screen:1. Push the release button locatedon the seatback console.2. Move the screen to the desiredviewing position.Push the video screen down into itslocked position when it is not in use.The screen turns off automatically.Only the left RSE seatback consolecontains the infrared transmitters forthe wireless headphones. They maybe visible as eight illuminated LEDs.These LEDs are not on the rightvideo screen.Both seatback consoles contain aninfrared receiver for the remotecontrol. They are located at thetop of each console.Notice: Avoid directly touchingthe video screen, as damage mayoccur. See “Cleaning the VideoScreen”later in this section formore information.Video Screen Input JackEach video screen is equipped witha video input jack to allow videocables to be connected from anauxiliary device such as acamcorder or a video game system.This signal will override any videoprovided by the RSE system; eitherthe DVD or auxiliary A/V jacksource. The RSE system must beon for this input to operate.
Black plate (52,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20127-52 Infotainment SystemRemote ControlTo use the remote control, aim it atthe transmitter window at eitherseatback console and press thebutton. Direct sunlight or very brightlight could affect the ability of theRSE transmitter to receive signalsfrom the remote control.Check the batteries if the remotecontrol does not seem to beworking. See “Battery Replacement”later in this section. Objectsblocking the line of sight could alsoaffect the function of the remotecontrol.If a CD, DVD, or MP3 disc is in theRadio DVD slot, the remote controlObutton can be used to turn on thevideo screen display and start thedisc. The infotainment system canalso turn on the video screendisplay. See CD/DVD Player onpage 7‑29 or the separatenavigation system manual formore information.Notice: Storing the remotecontrol in a hot area or in directsunlight can damage it, and therepairs will not be covered by thewarranty. Storage in extreme coldcan weaken the batteries. Keepthe remote control stored in acool, dry place.Remote Control ButtonsO(Power): Press to turn the videoscreens on and off.P(Illumination): Press to turnthe remote control backlight on.The backlight times out after severalseconds if no other button ispressed.v(Title): Press to return to themain menu of the DVD. Thisfunction could vary for each disc.y(Main Menu): Press to accessthe DVD menu. The DVD menu isdifferent on every DVD. Use thenavigation arrows to move thecursor. After making a selectionpress the enter button. This buttononly operates when using a DVD.n,q,p,o(Menu NavigationArrows): Use the arrow buttons tonavigate through a menu.r(Enter): Press to select thehighlighted choice in any menu.
Black plate (53,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Infotainment System 7-53z(Display Menu): Press to adjustthe brightness and screen displaymode, and display thelanguage menu.q(Return): Press to exit thecurrent active menu and return tothe previous menu. This buttonoperates only when the displaymenu or a DVD menu is active.c(Stop): Press to stop playing,rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD.Press twice to return to thebeginning of the DVD.s(Play/Pause): Press to startplaying a DVD. Press to pause aDVD while it is playing. Press againto continue playing.Depending on the infotainmentsystem in the vehicle, DVDplayback may be slowed down bypressing sthen [. Reverse slowplay by pressing sthen r.Press sagain to cancel slow play.t(Previous Track/Chapter):Press to go to the start of thecurrent track or chapter. Press againto go to the previous track orchapter. This button may not workwhen the DVD is playing thecopyright information or thepreviews.u(Next Track/Chapter): Press togo to the beginning of the nextchapter or track. This button mightnot work when the DVD is playingthe copyright information or thepreviews.r(Fast Reverse): Press toquickly reverse the DVD or CD.To stop fast reversing a DVD video,press s. To stop fast reversing aDVD audio or CD, release r.This button might not work whenthe DVD is playing the copyrightinformation or the previews.[(Fast Forward): Press to fastforward the DVD or CD. To stop fastforwarding a DVD video, press s.To stop fast forwarding a DVD audioor CD, release [. This button mightnot work when the DVD is playingthe copyright information or thepreviews.e(Audio): Press to change audiotracks on DVDs that have thisfeature when the DVD is playing.{(Subtitles): Press to turn ON/OFF subtitles and to move throughsubtitle options when a DVD isplaying.
Black plate (54,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20127-54 Infotainment SystemAUX (Auxiliary): Press to switchthe video display between theDVD player and an auxiliary source.The AUX button also controls thesource display between the left andright video screens as describedin the table below:AuxButtonPressLeftScreenRightScreenDefaultState (NoPress)DVDMediaDVDMediaFirstPressAux VideoSourceAux VideoSourceSecondPressDVDMediaAux VideoSourceThirdPressAux VideoSourceDVDMediaFourthPressReturn toDefaultStateReturn toDefaultState2(Camera): Press to change thecamera angle on DVDs that havethis feature when the DVD isplaying.\(Clear) (If Available): Press thisbutton within three seconds afterinputting a numeric selection, toclear all numeric inputs.}10 (Double Digit Entries)(If Available): Press this button toselect chapter or track numbersgreater than 9. Press this buttonbefore inputting the number.1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad):The numbered keypad provides thecapability of direct chapter or tracknumber selection.Replacing the Remote ControlIf the remote control becomes lostor damaged, a new universalremote control can be purchased.Use a Toshiba®code set forreplacement universal remotecontrols.Battery ReplacementTo change the remote controlbatteries:1. Slide back the rear cover on theremote control.2. Replace the two batteries in thecompartment.3. Replace the battery cover.Remove the batteries from theremote control if unused for anextended period of time.
Black plate (55,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Infotainment System 7-55Tips and Troubleshooting ChartProblem Recommended ActionNo power. The ignition might not be turned to ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY.The picture does not fill the screen. There are blackborders on the top and bottom or both sides, or itlooks stretched out.Check the display mode settings in the setup menu bypressing the display menu button on the remote control.In auxiliary mode, the picture moves or scrolls. Check the auxiliary input connections at both devices.The remote control does not work. Check to make sure there is no obstruction betweenthe remote control and the transmitter window.Check the batteries to make sure they are not dead orinstalled incorrectly.After stopping the player, I push Play but sometimesthe DVD starts where I left off and sometimes atthe beginning.If the Stop button was pressed one time, the DVD playerresumes playing where the DVD was stopped. If theStop button was pressed two times the DVD playerbegins to play from the beginning of the DVD.The auxiliary source is running but there is no pictureor sound.Check that the RSE video screen is in the auxiliarysource mode by pressing the AUX button on theremote control.Check the auxiliary input connections at both devices.
Black plate (56,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20127-56 Infotainment SystemTips and Troubleshooting Chart (cont.)Problem Recommended ActionSometimes the wireless headphone audio cuts outor buzzes.Check for obstructions, low batteries, reception range,and interference from cellular telephone towers orby using a cellular telephone in the vehicle.Check that the headphones are on correctly usingthe L (Left) and R (Right) on the headphones.Check that the headphones are positioned properlywith the headband across the top of the head.I lost the remote and/or the headphones. See your dealer for assistance.The DVD is playing, but there is no picture or sound. Check that the RSE video screen is sourced to theDVD player by pressing the AUX button on theremote control.DVD Display Error MessagesThe DVD display error messagedepends on which radio the vehiclehas. The video screen may displayone of the following:Disc Load/Eject Error orMechanical Error: There are discload or eject problems.Disc Format Error or UnknownFormat: The disc is inserted withthe disc label wrong side up, or thedisc is damaged.Disc Region Error or Disc Error:The disc is not from a correctregion.No Disc Inserted: No disc ispresent when the Xor MEM/DVD/AUX button is pressed on the radio.DVD DistortionVideo distortion can occur whenoperating cellular phones, scanners,CB radios, Global Position Systems(GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile faxmachines, or walkie talkies.It might be necessary to turn off theDVD player when operating one ofthese devices in or near the vehicle.*Excludes the OnStar System.
Black plate (57,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Infotainment System 7-57Cleaning the RSE SeatbackConsoleUse only a clean cloth dampenedwith clean water to clean the RSEseatback console surface.Cleaning the Video ScreenUse only a clean cloth dampenedwith clean water. Use care whentouching or cleaning the screen asdamage could result.PhoneBluetooth (Overview)For vehicles equipped withBluetooth capability, the system caninteract with many cell phones,allowing:.Placement and receipt of callsin a hands-free mode..Sharing of the cell phone’saddress book or contact listwith the vehicle.To minimize driver distraction,before driving, and with thevehicle parked:.Become familiar with thefeatures of the cell phone.Organize the phone book andcontact lists clearly and deleteduplicate or rarely used entries.If possible, program speed dialor other shortcuts..Review the controls andoperation of the infotainmentsystem..Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle.The system may not work withall cell phones. See “Pairing”inthis section for more information..If the cell phone has voicedialing capability, learn to usethat feature to access theaddress book or contact list.See “Voice Pass-Thru”in thissection for more information..See “Storing and Deleting PhoneNumbers”in this section formore information.{WARNINGWhen using a cell phone, it canbe distracting to look too long ortoo often at the screen of thephone or the infotainment(navigation) system. Taking youreyes off the road too long ortoo often could cause a crashresulting in injury or death.Focus your attention on driving.
Black plate (58,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20127-58 Infotainment SystemVehicles with a Bluetooth systemcan use a Bluetooth‐capable cellphone with a Hands‐Free Profile tomake and receive phone calls.The infotainment system and voicerecognition are used to control thesystem. The system can beused while in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY. The range of theBluetooth system can be up to9.1 m (30 ft). Not all phones supportall functions and not all phones workwith the Bluetooth system. Seewww.gm.com/bluetooth for moreinformation about compatiblephones.Bluetooth ControlsUse the buttons located on theinfotainment system and thesteering wheel to operate theBluetooth system.Steering Wheel Controlsb/g(Push To Talk) : Press toanswer incoming calls, confirmsystem information, and start voicerecognition.$/i(End Call/Mute): Press toend a call, reject a call, or cancelan operation.Infotainment System ControlsIf equipped, the infotainment systemallows certain controls to beselected on the infotainment display.For information about how tonavigate the menu system using theinfotainment controls, see Overview(Radio with CD) on page 7‑4orOverview (Radio with CD/DVD andMEM) on page 7‑6or Overview(Radio with CD and Touchscreen)on page 7‑8or AM-FM Radio (Radiowith CD/DVD/MEM) on page 7‑17 orAM-FM Radio (Radio with CD andTouchscreen) on page 7‑19.5(Phone): Press to enter thePhone main menu.Voice RecognitionThe voice recognition system usescommands to control the systemand dial phone numbers.Noise: The system may notrecognize voice commands if thereis too much background noise.When to Speak: A tone sounds toindicate that the system is ready fora voice command. Wait for the toneand then speak.How to Speak: Speak clearly in acalm and natural voice.Audio SystemWhen using the Bluetooth system,sound comes through the vehicle'sfront audio system speakers andoverrides the audio system. Use theVOL/ Oknob during a call tochange the volume level. Theadjusted volume level remains inmemory for later calls. The systemmaintains a minimum volume level.
Black plate (59,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Infotainment System 7-59Other InformationThe Bluetooth®word mark andlogos are owned by the Bluetooth®SIG, Inc. and any use of such marksby General Motors is under license.Other trademarks and trade namesare those of their respective owners.See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑20 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.Bluetooth (InfotainmentControls)For information about how tonavigate the menu system using theinfotainment controls, see Overview(Radio with CD) on page 7‑4orOverview (Radio with CD/DVD andMEM) on page 7‑6or Overview(Radio with CD and Touchscreen)on page 7‑8or AM-FM Radio (Radiowith CD/DVD/MEM) on page 7‑17 orAM-FM Radio (Radio with CD andTouchscreen) on page 7‑19.PairingA Bluetooth‐enabled cell phonemust be paired to the Bluetoothsystem and then connected to thevehicle before it can be used. Seeyour cell phone manufacturer's userguide for Bluetooth functions beforepairing the cell phone. If a Bluetoothphone is not connected, calls will bemade using OnStar Hands‐FreeCalling, if available. See OnStarOverview on page 14‑1for moreinformation.Pairing Information.A Bluetooth phone with MP3capability cannot be paired tothe vehicle as a phone and anMP3 player at the same time..Up to five cell phones can bepaired to the Bluetooth system..The pairing process is disabledwhen the vehicle is moving..Pairing only needs to becompleted once, unless thepairing information on the cellphone changes or the cell phoneis deleted from the system..Only one paired cell phone canbe connected to the Bluetoothsystem at a time..If multiple paired cell phones arewithin range of the system, thesystem connects to the firstavailable paired cell phone in theorder that they were first pairedto the system. To link to adifferent paired phone, see“Linking to a Different Phone”later in this section.
Black plate (60,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20127-60 Infotainment SystemPairing a Phone1. Press the CONFIG button.2. Select Phone Settings orBluetooth Settings (dependingon the radio).3. Select Bluetooth.4. Select Pair Device (Phone).A four‐digit PersonalIdentification Number (PIN)appears on the display.The PIN is used is Step 6.5. Start the pairing process on thecell phone to be paired to thevehicle. See the cell phonemanufacturer's user guide forinformation on this process.6. Locate the device named “YourVehicle”in the list on the cellphone. Follow the instructionson the cell phone to enter thePIN provided in Step 4. After thePIN is successfully entered, thesystem prompts you to provide aname for the paired cell phone.This name will be used toindicate which phones arepaired and connected to thevehicle. The system respondswith “<Phone name> has beensuccessfully paired”after thepairing process is complete.7. Repeat Steps 1 through 6 topair additional phones.Listing All Paired and ConnectedPhones1. Press the CONFIG button.2. Select Phone Settings orBluetooth Settings (dependingon the radio).3. Select Bluetooth.4. Select Device List.Deleting a Paired Phone1. Press the CONFIG button.2. Select Phone Settings orBluetooth Settings (dependingon the radio).3. Select Bluetooth.4. Select Device List.5. Select the phone to delete andfollow the on screen prompts.Linking to a Different PhoneTo link to a different phone, the newphone must be in the vehicle andavailable to be connected to theBluetooth system before theprocess is started.1. Press the CONFIG button.2. Select Phone Settings orBluetooth Settings (dependingon the radio).3. Select Bluetooth.4. Select Device List.5. Select the new phone tolink to and follow the onscreen prompts.If delete is selected, thehighlighted phone willbe deleted.
Black plate (61,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Infotainment System 7-61Making a Call UsingPhone BookFor cell phones that support thephone book feature, the Bluetoothsystem can use the contacts storedon your cell phone to make calls.See your cell phone's owner's guideor contact your wireless provider tofind out if this feature is supportedby your phone.When a cell phone supports thephone book feature, the PhoneBook and Call Lists menus areautomatically available.The Phone Book menu allows youto access the phone book stored inthe cell phone to make a call.The Call Lists menu allows you toaccess the phone numbers from theIncoming Calls, Outgoing Calls, andMissed Calls menus on your cellphone to make a call.Radio with CDTo make a call using the PhoneBook menu:1. Press 5twice.2. Select Phone Book.3. Search through the list byselecting the letter group thephone book entry begins with,or press SELECT to scrollthrough the entire list of names/numbers in the phone book.4. Select the name or number youwant to call.To make a call using the CallLists menu:1. Press 5twice.2. Select Call Lists.3. Select the Incoming Calls,Outgoing Calls, or MissedCalls list.4. Select the name or number youwant to call.Radio with CD/DVD and MEM1. Press 5.2. Select Phone Book.3. Search through the list byselecting the letter group thephone book entry begins with,or press SELECT to scrollthrough the entire list of names/numbers in the phone book.4. Select the name or number youwant to call.To make a call using the CallLists menu:1. Press 5.2. Select Call Lists.3. Select the Incoming Calls,Outgoing Calls, or MissedCalls list.4. Select the name or number youwant to call.
Black plate (62,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20127-62 Infotainment SystemMaking a CallRadio with CD1. Press 5twice.2. Enter the character sequence.See “Entering a CharacterSequence”in Overview (Radiowith CD) on page 7‑4orOverview (Radio with CD/DVDand MEM) on page 7‑6orOverview (Radio with CD andTouchscreen) on page 7‑8formore information.3. Select Call to start dialing thenumber.Radio with CD/DVD and MEM1. Press 5.2. Select Enter number.3. Enter the character sequence.See “Entering a CharacterSequence”in Overview (Radiowith CD) on page 7‑4orOverview (Radio with CD/DVDand MEM) on page 7‑6orOverview (Radio with CD andTouchscreen) on page 7‑8formore information.4. Select Call to start dialing thenumber.Accepting or Declining a CallWhen an incoming call is received,the infotainment system mutes anda ring tone is heard in the vehicle.Accepting a CallTurn the Menu knob to “Answer”and press SELECT to acceptthe call.Declining a CallTurn the Menu knob to “Decline”and press SELECT to declinethe call.Call WaitingCall waiting must be supported onthe Bluetooth phone and enabled bythe wireless service carrier to work.Accepting a CallTurn the Menu knob to “Answer”and press SELECT to acceptthe call.Declining a CallTurn the Menu knob to “Decline”and press SELECT to declinethe call.Switching Between Calls(Call Waiting Calls Only)To switch between calls:1. Turn the Menu Knob andpress SELECT.2. Select Switch Call fromthe menu.
Black plate (63,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Infotainment System 7-63Conference CallingConference calling and three‐waycalling must be supported on theBluetooth phone and enabled by thewireless service carrier to work.To start a conference while in acurrent call:1. Turn the Menu Knob andpress SELECT.2. Select Enter Number.3. Enter the character sequencethen select Call. See “Entering aCharacter Sequence”inOverview (Radio with CD) onpage 7‑4or Overview (Radiowith CD/DVD and MEM) onpage 7‑6or Overview (Radiowith CD and Touchscreen) onpage 7‑8for more information.4. After the call has been placed,turn the Menu Knob to chooseMerge Calls then press SELECT.5. To add more callers to theconference call, repeat Steps 1through 4. The number of callersthat can be added is limited byyour wireless service carrier.Ending a CallTurn the Menu knob to select HangUp, then press SELECT.Muting a CallTo Mute a CallTurn the Menu knob to select MuteCall, then press SELECT.To Cancel MuteTurn the Menu knob to select MuteCall, then press SELECT.Dual Tone Multi-Frequency(DTMF) TonesThe in‐vehicle Bluetooth system cansend numbers during a call. This isused when calling a menu‐drivenphone system.1. Turn the Menu knob toselect Enter Number, thenpress SELECT.2. Enter the character sequence.See “Entering a CharacterSequence”in Overview (Radiowith CD) on page 7‑4orOverview (Radio with CD/DVDand MEM) on page 7‑6orOverview (Radio with CD andTouchscreen) on page 7‑8formore information.
Black plate (64,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20127-64 Infotainment SystemBluetooth(Voice Recognition)Using Voice RecognitionTo use voice recognition, press theb/gbutton located on the steeringwheel. Use the commands belowfor the various voice features.For additional information, say"Help" while you are in a voicerecognition menu.PairingA Bluetooth‐enabled cell phonemust be paired to the Bluetoothsystem and then connected to thevehicle before it can be used. Seeyour cell phone manufacturer's userguide for Bluetooth functions beforepairing the cell phone. If a Bluetoothphone is not connected, calls will bemade using OnStar Hands‐FreeCalling, if available. See OnStarOverview on page 14‑1for moreinformation.Pairing Information.A Bluetooth phone with MP3capability cannot be paired tothe vehicle as a phone and anMP3 player at the same time..Up to five cell phones can bepaired to the Bluetooth system..The pairing process is disabledwhen the vehicle is moving..Pairing only needs to becompleted once, unless thepairing information on the cellphone changes or the cell phoneis deleted from the system..Only one paired cell phone canbe connected to the Bluetoothsystem at a time..If multiple paired cell phones arewithin range of the system, thesystem connects to the firstavailable paired cell phone in theorder that they were first pairedto the system. To link to adifferent paired phone, see“Linking to a Different Phone”later in this section.Pairing a Phone1. Press b/g. The systemresponds “Ready,”followed bya tone.2. Say “Bluetooth.”This commandcan be skipped.3. Say “Pair.”The system respondswith instructions and a four‐digitPersonal Identification Number(PIN). The PIN is used in Step 5.4. Start the pairing process on thecell phone that you want to pair.For help with this process, seeyour cell phone manufacturer'suser guide.5. Locate the device named “YourVehicle”in the list on the cellphone. Follow the instructionson the cell phone to enter thePIN provided in Step 3. After thePIN is successfully entered, thesystem prompts you to provide aname for the paired cell phone.
Black plate (65,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Infotainment System 7-65This name will be used toindicate which phones arepaired and connected to thevehicle. The system respondswith “<Phone name> has beensuccessfully paired”after thepairing process is complete.6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 to pairadditional phones.Listing All Paired and ConnectedPhonesThe system can list all cell phonespaired to it. If a paired cell phone isalso connected to the vehicle, thesystem responds with “is connected”after that phone name.1. Press b/g. The systemresponds “Ready,”followed bya tone.2. Say “Bluetooth.”3. Say “List.”Deleting a Paired PhoneIf the phone name you want todelete is unknown, see “Listing AllPaired and Connected Phones.”1. Press b/g. The systemresponds “Ready,”followed bya tone.2. Say “Bluetooth.”3. Say “Delete.”The system asksfor which phone to delete.4. Say the name of the phone youwant to delete.Connecting to a Different PhoneTo connect to a different cell phone,the Bluetooth system looks for thenext available cell phone in theorder in which all the available cellphones were paired. Depending onwhich cell phone you want toconnect to, you may have to usethis command several times.1. Press b/g. The systemresponds “Ready,”followedby a tone.2. Say “Bluetooth.”3. Say “Change phone.”.If another cell phone isfound, the response will be“<Phone name> is nowconnected.”.If another cell phone is notfound, the original phoneremains connected.Storing and Deleting PhoneNumbersThe system can store up to 30phone numbers as name tags in theHands‐Free Directory that is sharedbetween the Bluetooth and OnStarsystems.The following commands are usedto delete and store phone numbers.Store: This command will store aphone number, or a group ofnumbers as a name tag.Digit Store: This command allowsa phone number to be stored as aname tag by entering the digits oneat a time.
Black plate (66,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20127-66 Infotainment SystemDelete: This command is used todelete individual name tags.Delete All Name Tags: Thiscommand deletes all stored nametags in the Hands‐Free CallingDirectory and the DestinationsDirectory.Using the “Store”Command1. Press b/g. The systemresponds “Ready,”followed bya tone.2. Say “Store.”3. Say the phone number or groupof numbers you want to store allat once with no pauses, thenfollow the directions given by thesystem to save a name tag forthis number.Using the “Digit Store”CommandIf an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear”at any time to clear thelast number.To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify”at any time.1. Press b/g. The systemresponds “Ready,”followed bya tone.2. Say “Digit Store.”3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to store. Aftereach digit is entered, the systemrepeats back the digit it heardfollowed by a tone. After the lastdigit has been entered, say“Store,”and then follow thedirections given by the system tosave a name tag for this number.Using the “Delete”Command1. Press b/g. The systemresponds “Ready,”followed bya tone.2. Say “Delete.”3. Say the name tag you want todelete.Using the “Delete All Name Tags”CommandThis command deletes all storedname tags in the Hands‐FreeCalling Directory and theDestinations Directory.To delete all name tags:1. Press b/g. The systemresponds “Ready,”followed bya tone.2. Say “Delete all name tags.”Listing Stored NumbersThe list command will list all thestored numbers and name tags.Using the “List”Command1. Press b/g. The systemresponds “Ready,”followed bya tone.2. Say “Directory.”3. Say “Hands Free Calling.”4. Say “List.”
Black plate (67,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Infotainment System 7-67Making a CallCalls can be made using thefollowing commands.Dial or Call: The dial or callcommand can be usedinterchangeably to dial a phonenumber or a stored name tag.Digit Dial: This command allowsa phone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.Re‐dial: This command is used todial the last number used on thecell phone.Using the “Dial”or “Call”Command1. Press b/g. The systemresponds “Ready,”followed bya tone.2. Say “Dial”or “Call.”3. Say the entire number withoutpausing or say the name tag.Once connected, the person calledwill be heard through the audiospeakers.Using the “Digit Dial”CommandThe digit dial command allows aphone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.After each digit is entered, thesystem repeats back the digit itheard followed by a tone.If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear”at any time to clear thelast number.To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify”at any time.1. Press b/g. The systemresponds “Ready,”followed bya tone.2. Say “Digit Dial.”3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to dial. After eachdigit is entered, the systemrepeats back the digit it heardfollowed by a tone. After thelast digit has been entered,say “Dial.”Once connected, the person calledwill be heard through the audiospeakers.Using the “Re‐dial”Command1. Press b/g. The systemresponds “Ready,”followed bya tone.2. After the tone, say “Re‐dial.”The system dials the lastnumber called from theconnected cell phone.Once connected, the person calledwill be heard through the audiospeakers.Receiving a CallWhen an incoming call is received,the audio system mutes and a ringtone is heard in the vehicle..Press b/gto answer the call..Press 0/cto ignore a call.
Black plate (68,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20127-68 Infotainment SystemCall WaitingCall waiting must be supported onthe cell phone and enabled by thewireless service carrier..Press b/gto answer anincoming call when another callis active. The original call isplaced on hold..Press b/gagain to return tothe original call..To ignore the incoming call, noaction is required..Press 0/cto disconnect thecurrent call and switch to thecall on hold.Three‐Way CallingThree‐way calling must besupported on the cell phone andenabled by the wireless servicecarrier.1. While on a call, press b/g.2. Say “Three‐way call.”3. Use the dial or call command todial the number of the third partyto be called.4. Once the call is connected,press b/gto link all callerstogether.Ending a CallPress 0/cto end a call.Muting a CallDuring a call, all sounds from insidethe vehicle can be muted so that theperson on the other end of the callcannot hear them.To mute a call, press b/g, andthen say “Mute Call.”To cancel mute, press b/g, andthen say “Un‐mute Call.”Transferring a CallAudio can be transferred betweenthe Bluetooth system and thecell phone.The cell phone must be paired andconnected with the Bluetoothsystem before a call can betransferred. The connection processcan take up to two minutes after theignition is turned to ON/RUN.To Transfer Audio from theBluetooth System to a Cell PhoneDuring a call with the audio inthe vehicle:1. Press b/g.2. Say “Transfer Call.”To Transfer Audio to the BluetoothSystem from a Cell PhoneDuring a call with the audio on thecell phone, press b/g. The audiotransfers to the vehicle. If the audiodoes not transfer to the vehicle, usethe audio transfer feature on thecell phone. See your cell phonemanufacturer's user guide formore information.
Black plate (69,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Infotainment System 7-69Voice Pass-ThruVoice pass‐thru allows access to thevoice recognition commands on thecell phone. See your cell phonemanufacturer's user guide to see ifthe cell phone supports this feature.To access contacts stored in thecell phone:1. Press b/g. The systemresponds “Ready,”followed bya tone.2. Say “Bluetooth.”This commandcan be skipped.3. Say “Voice.”The systemresponds “OK, accessing<phone name>.”The cell phone's normal promptmessages will go through their cycleaccording to the phone's operatinginstructions.Dual Tone Multi-Frequency(DTMF) TonesThe Bluetooth system can sendnumbers and the numbers stored asname tags during a call. You canuse this feature when calling amenu‐driven phone system.Account numbers can also bestored for use.Sending a Number or Name TagDuring a Call1. Press b/g. The systemresponds “Ready,”followed bya tone.2. Say “Dial.”3. Say the number or name tagto send.Clearing the SystemUnless information is deleted out ofthe in‐vehicle Bluetooth system, itwill be retained indefinitely. Thisincludes all saved name tags in thephone book and phone pairinginformation. For information on howto delete this information, see theprevious sections on “Deleting aPaired Phone”and “DeletingName Tags.”
Black plate (70,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20127-70 Infotainment SystemBluetooth(UHP Mexico Only)General InformationVehicles with a UniversalHands‐free Phone (UHP) systemcan use a Bluetooth®capablemobile phone with a Hands-FreeProfile to make and receive phonecalls. The infotainment system andvoice control are used to control thesystem. The system can be usedwhile the ignition is in ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY. The range ofthe UHP system can be up to10 m (33 ft). Not all phones supportall functions and not all phones workwith the UHP system.Other InformationThe Bluetooth word mark and logosare owned by the Bluetooth®SIG,Inc. and any use of such marks byGeneral Motors is under license.Other trademarks and trade namesare those of their respective owners.UHP ControlsUse the buttons located on theinfotainment system and thesteering wheel to operate theUHP system.Steering Wheel ControlsSteering wheel controls can beused to:.Answer incoming calls.Confirm system information.Start voice recognition.End a call.Reject a call.Cancel an operation.Make outgoing calls using thecall listb/g(Push To Talk) : Press toanswer incoming calls, to confirmsystem information, and to startvoice control. Press and hold fortwo to three seconds to accessthe call list.$/i(End call/Mute) : Press toend a call, reject a call, or to cancelan operation.To make outgoing calls using thecall list.1. Press the b/gbutton.2. Highlight the phone number bytoggling the SRC switch upor down.3. Dial the highlighted number bypressing the b/gbutton.Infotainment System ControlsFor information about how tonavigate the menu system using thenavigation system controls, see theseparate Navigation SystemManual.PHONE : Press to enter the Phonemain menu.Voice ControlThe voice control system usescommands to control the systemand dial phone numbers.
Black plate (71,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Infotainment System 7-71Noise: The system may notrecognize voice commands if thereis too much background noise.When to Speak: A tone sounds toindicate that the system is ready fora voice command. Wait for the toneand then speak.How to Speak: Speak clearly in acalm and natural voice.Audio SystemWhen using the UHP system, soundcomes through the vehicle's frontaudio system speakers andoverrides the audio system.Use the VOL/ Oknob during a callto change the volume level. Theadjusted volume level remains inmemory for later calls. The systemmaintains a minimum volume level.Turning Bluetooth On or Off1. Press the CONFIG button.2. Select Phone Settings, or touchPhone on a navigation radio.3. Select Bluetooth.4. Select Activation.Changing Bluetooth CodeThe default Bluetooth code shouldwork with most mobile phones.If you are having difficulty pairingyour mobile phone, you can changethe code at any time.1. Press the CONFIG button.2. Select Phone Settings, or touchPhone on a navigation radio.3. Select Bluetooth.4. Select Change Bluetooth Code.5. Enter a new four-digit code, thenselect OK.Ring ToneThere are three different ring tonesavailable for the UHP system.To change the ring tone:1. Press the CONFIG button.2. Select Phone Settings, or touchPhone on a navigation radio.3. Select Ring Tones.4. Select Ring Tone 1, 2, or 3.Default SettingsSelecting this option will reset thering tones and the Bluetooth code.PairingA Bluetooth enabled mobile phonemust be paired to the UHP systemfirst and then connected to thevehicle before it can be used. Seethe mobile phone manufacturer'suser guide for Bluetooth functionsbefore pairing the mobile phone.Pairing Information:.Up to five mobile phones can bepaired to the UHP system.The pairing process is disabledwhen the vehicle is moving.The UHP system connects withthe first available paired mobilephone in the order the phonewas paired
Black plate (72,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20127-72 Infotainment System.Only one paired mobile phonecan be connected to the UHPsystem at a time.Pairing should only need to becompleted once, unless changesto the pairing information havebeen made or the mobile phoneis deletedUsing UHP with InfotainmentControlsPairing a PhoneIf your mobile phone has simplepairing or auto discovery features,they need to be turned off beforethe mobile phone can be paired tothe UHP system. Reference themobile phone manufacturer's userguide for information on thesefeatures.1. Press the CONFIG button.2. Select Phone Settings, or touchPhone on a navigation radio.3. Select Bluetooth.4. Select Pair Device or Add newHands‐free (HF) device on anavigation radio. A four-digitnumber appears on the displayand the UHP system goes intodiscovery mode.5. Start the pairing process on themobile phone that will be pairedto the vehicle. Reference themobile phone manufacturer'suser guide for information on thisprocess.Locate the device named UHPfollowed by a four‐digit numberin the list on the mobile phoneand follow the instructions on themobile phone and enter thefour-digit code provided by thesystem if necessary, then followthe instructions on theinfotainment display screen.6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 to pairadditional mobile phones.Viewing All Paired and ConnectedPhonesTo view all available mobile phonesthat are paired to the UHP system:1. Press the CONFIG button.2. Select Phone Settings, or touchPhone on a navigation radio.3. Select Bluetooth.4. Select Device List.5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 to pairadditional mobile phones.Deleting a Paired PhoneTo remove a paired mobile phonefrom the UHP system:1. Press the CONFIG button.2. Select Phone Settings, or touchPhone on a navigation radio.3. Select Bluetooth.4. Select Device List.5. Select the mobile phone todelete and follow the on screenprompts.
Black plate (73,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Infotainment System 7-73Connecting to a Different PhoneTo connect to a different pairedmobile phone, the new mobilephone must be in the vehicle andavailable to be connected to theUHP system before the process isstarted.To connect to a different phone:1. Press the CONFIG button.2. Select Phone Settings, or touchPhone on a navigation radio.3. Select Bluetooth.4. Select Device List.5. Select the new mobile phone tolink to and follow the on screenprompts.If delete is selected, the highlightedmobile phone will be deleted.Making a Call Using Phone Bookand Call ListFor mobile phones that support thephone book and call list features,the UHP system can use thecontacts and call lists stored onyour mobile phone to make calls.See your mobile phonemanufacturer's user guide orcontact your wireless provider tofind out if this feature is supportedby your mobile phone.The time it takes to download thephone book and call list from yourmobile phone to the UHP systemcan vary depending on the size ofthe phone book and call list storedon your mobile phone.When a mobile phone supports thephone book and call list features,the Phone Book, and Call Listsmenus are automatically available.The Phone Book menu allows youto access the phone book stored inthe mobile phone to make a call.The Call Lists menu allows you toaccess the phone numbers from theIncoming Calls, Outgoing Calls, andMissed Calls menus on your mobilephone to make a call.To make a call using the PhoneBook menu:1. Press the PHONE button twice,or press the PHONE buttononce on vehicles with anavigation system.2. Select Phone Book.3. You can search through the listby selecting the letter group thephone book entry begins with, tocontinue scrolling through theentire list, turn the Menu knob.4. Select the name or number youwant to call.
Black plate (74,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20127-74 Infotainment SystemTo make a call using the CallLists menu:1. Press the PHONE button twice,or press the PHONE buttononce on vehicles with anavigation system.2. Select Call Lists.3. Select the Incoming Calls,Outgoing Calls, or MissedCalls list.4. Select the name or number youwant to call.Making a CallTo make a call:1. Press the PHONE button twice,or press the PHONE buttononce on vehicles with anavigation system.2. Select Enter Number for vehicleswithout a navigation system.3. Select the numbers to be dialed.For vehicles with a navigationsystem, touch the numbers onthe infotainment screen. Forvehicles without a navigationsystem, see “Entering aCharacter Sequence”in formore information.4. Select Call to start dialing thenumber.Accepting or Declining a CallWhen an incoming call is received,the infotainment system mutes anda ring tone is heard in the vehicle.To accept the incoming call, turn theMenu knob to “Answer”and pressSELECT, or press the b/gbuttonon the steering wheel controls.To decline the incoming call, turnthe Menu knob to “Decline”andpress SELECT, or press theb/gbutton on the steeringwheel controls.Call WaitingCall waiting must be supported onthe mobile phone and enabled bythe wireless service carrier to work.To accept the incoming call, turn theMenu knob to “Answer”and pressSELECT, or press the b/gbuttonon the steering wheel controls.To decline the incoming call,turn the Menu knob to “Decline”and press SELECT, or pressthe $/ibutton on thesteering wheel controls.1. Press the PHONE button.2. Select Switch Call fromthe menu.
Black plate (75,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Infotainment System 7-75Conference CallingConference calling and three waycalling must be supported on themobile phone and enabled by thewireless service carrier to work.To start a conference calling whilein a call:1. Press SELECT and select EnterNumber.2. Enter the character sequencethen select call.3. After the call has been placed,press SELECT and chooseMerge Calls.4. To add more callers to theconference call, repeat steps 1through 3. The number of callersthat can be added are limited byyour wireless service carrier.To disconnect from one caller whilein a conference call, select DetachNumber from the menu and selectthe number to hang up on.Ending a CallPress SELECT and select Hang Up,or press the $/ibutton on thesteering wheel controls.To Mute a CallPress SELECT and selectMute Call.To Cancel MutePress SELECT and selectMute Call.Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF)TonesThe UHP system can send numbersduring a call. This is used whencalling a menu driven phonesystem.To access this system:1. Press SELECT and select EnterNumber.2. Enter the character sequence.Operating UHP Using VoiceControlThe voice control of the UHPsystem enables you to operateseveral functions of the mobilephone using your voice. The UHPsystem uses voice commands tocontrol the system and dial phonenumbers. After input of thecommand the infotainment systemguides you through the dialoguewith appropriate questions andfeedback to achieve the desiredaction. The commands andnumbers can be spoken without apause between the individual words.In addition you can save telephonenumbers under a name tag that isselectable by you. The telephoneconnection can be set up withthis name.In the event of incorrect operation orincorrect codes, the voice controlgives you voice feedback andrequests you to re-enter thedesired command.
Black plate (76,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20127-76 Infotainment SystemApart from this, the voice controlacknowledges important commandsand will ask if necessary.In order that calls are madeinside the vehicle do not lead tounintentional triggering of the mobilephone, the voice control does notstart until it has been activated.Activating the Voice ControlFor vehicles without a navigationsystem, press the b/gbutton onthe steering wheel to activate thevoice control of the UHP system.For vehicles with a navigationsystem, press the b/gbutton onthe steering wheel to activate thevoice control of the UHP systemThe system responds with a tone.After the tone, say ”Phone.“For the duration of the dialogue anyaudio source that is active is mutedand any traffic news fade-in iscancelled.Adjusting the Volume forVoice OutputTurn the volume knob of theInfotainment system or pressthe + / - buttons on thesteering wheel.Canceling DialogueThere are various possibilities ofdeactivating the voice control andcancelling the dialogue:.Press the $/ibutton onthe steering wheel controls..Enter the command “Cancel.”.Do not enter a command forsome time..The command is unrecognizedafter three tries.Main Menu CommandsThe UHP system has a set of mainmenu commands that are availablewhen voice control is first started.After the voice control is activated,a short tone indicates that thevoice control system is waitingfor a command.Available commands:.“Dial”.“Call”.“Re-dial”.“Save”.“Delete”.“Directory”.“Pair”.“Select device”.“Voice feedback”.“Help”.“Cancel”
Black plate (77,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Infotainment System 7-77Frequently Used CommandsHere is a list of frequently usedcommands:.“Help”: the dialogue isterminated and all commandsavailable in the current contextare enumerated..“Cancel”: the voice control isdeactivated..“Yes”: a suitable action istriggered depending on thecontext..“No”: a suitable action istriggered depending on thecontext.Voice FeedbackEach voice input is answered orcommented on by the infotainmentsystem by way of a voice outputthat is adapted to the situation.To switch the voice output on or off,enter “Voice feedback”or pressthe b/gbutton.Pairing, Saving, or Deleting PhoneFrom Device ListWith the command “Pair”a mobilephone can be saved to or deletedfrom the device list of the UHPsystem. A device number will beassigned by the UHP system to themobile phone when it is paired.Available commands:.“Add”.“Delete”.“Help”.“Cancel”Example of a DialogueUser: “Pair.”Voice output: “Do you want toadd or delete a device?”User: “Add.”Voice output: “Using the pairfunction in the external device,enter <1234> to pair.”(At this time, start the pairingprocess on the mobile phone thatwill be paired to the vehicle.Reference the mobile phonemanufacturer's user guide forinformation on this process. Locatethe device named UHP followed bya four‐digit number in the list on themobile phone and follow theinstructions on the mobile phoneand enter the four-digit codeprovided by the system.)Voice output: “Do you want to pairthe device?”User: “Yes.”Voice output: “Paired, endingsession.”Selecting Phone from Device ListThe “Select device”command canbe used to select a different pairedmobile phone. The UHP systemasks for a device number that wasassigned by the UHP system to themobile phone when it was paired.
Black plate (78,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20127-78 Infotainment SystemExample of a DialogueUser: “Select device.”Voice output: “Please, say a devicenumber to select.”User: “device number.”Voice output: “Do you want to selectthe device number “device number.”(The device name appears on theinfotainment display screen)User: “Yes.”Voice output: “One moment please,the system searches for theselected device.”Voice output: “Device number“device number”is selected, endingsession.”Telephone Number DialingAfter the “Dial”command, the voicecontrol requests input of a number.The telephone number must bespoken in your normal speechwithout any artificial pausesbetween the numbers.Recognition is best, if a pause of atleast half a second is made afterevery three to five digits. Theinfotainment system then repeatsthe numbers recognized.Available Commands:.“Dial”: the inputs are accepted..“Digit”: a numeric value between“0-9”is entered..“Delete”: the number lastentered or the block of numberslast entered is deleted..“Plus”: a preceding “+”is enteredfor a call abroad..“Verify”: the inputs are repeatedby the voice output..“Asterisk”: an asterisk “*”isentered..“Hash”: a hash character “#”isentered..“Pause”: a pause is entered intothe character sequence..“Help”.“Cancel”The telephone number entered canhave a maximum length of 25 digits.To be able to make a call abroadyou can say the word “Plus”(+) atthe beginning of your number. Theplus allows you to call from anycountry without knowing the prefixfor calls made abroad in thatcountry. Then say the requiredcountry code.Example of a DialogueUser: “Dial.”Voice output: “Please, say thenumber to dial.”User: “Plus four nine.”User: “Seven three one.”Voice output: “Seven three one.”User: “One one nine nine.”Voice output: “One one nine nine.”User: “Dial.”Voice output: “The number is beingdialled.”
Black plate (79,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Infotainment System 7-79Making a Call Using Name TagWhen the “Call”command is used,a telephone number is entered thathas been stored in the telephonebook as a name tag.Available commands:.“Yes”.“No”.“Help”.“Cancel”Example of a DialogueUser: “Call.”Voice output: “Please, say the nametag to call.”(for name tag information, see“Saving a Name Tag”later in thissection)User: ”Name tag.“Voice output: “Seven three one.”User: “Yes.”Voice output: “Calling.”Starting a Second CallPress the button b/gto start asecond call during an activetelephone call.Available commands:.“Send”: activate manual DTMF(touch-tone dialling), e.g. forvoice mail or telephone banking..“Send name tag”: activate DTMF(touch-tone dialling) by enteringa name tag..“Dial”.“Call”.“Re-dialing”.“Help”.“Cancel”Example of a DialogueUser: Press the b/gbutton if atelephone call is active.User: “Send.”Voice output: “Please, say thenumber to send.”(for number input information, seethe dialogue example for “Making aCall Using a Telephone Number”earlier in this section)User: “Send.”Re-dialingThe “Re-dialing”command re-dialsthe last number dialed.Saving a Name TagThe “Save”command is used tostore a telephone number in thetelephone book under as aname tag.The name entered must berepeated once. The pitch andpronunciation must be as identicalas possible for both name inputs,otherwise the voice control willreject the inputs.A maximum of 50 name tags can bestored in the telephone book.
Black plate (80,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20127-80 Infotainment SystemName tags are speaker-dependent,i.e. only the person who recorded aname tag can open it. To avoid thestart of the recording of a savedname from being cut off, a shortpause should be left after aninput request.To be able to use the name tagindependently of the location,i.e. including other countries, alltelephone numbers should beentered with a “plus”characterand a country code.Available commands:.“Save”: the inputs are accepted..“Re-dialing”: the last input isrepeated..“Help”.“Cancel”Example of a DialogueUser: “Save.”Voice output: “Please, say thenumber to save.”User: Say number to save.(for number input information, seethe dialogue example for “Making aCall Using a Telephone Number”earlier in this section)User: “Save.”User: “Name Tag”(give name tag).Voice output: “Please, repeat thename tag to confirm.”User: “Name Tag”Voice output: “Saving thename tag.”Deleting a Name TagThe “Delete”command is used todelete a previously saved name tag.Available commands:.“Yes”.“No”.“Help”.“Cancel”Listening to Stored Name TagsThe “Directory”command is used tolisten to all stored name tags.Available commands:.“Call”: the telephone number ofthe voice tag last read aloud isselected..“Delete”: the entry of the voicetag last read aloud is deleted.
Black plate (81,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Infotainment System 7-81Trademarks andLicense AgreementsManufactured under licenseunder U.S. Patent #'s: 5,451,942;5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762;6,487,535 & other U.S. andworldwide patents issued &pending. DTS and the Symbol areregistered trademarks and DTSDigital Surround and the DTS logosare trademarks of DTS, Inc.Product includes software.All Rights Reserved.Manufactured under license fromDolby®Laboratories. Dolby and thedouble-D symbol are registeredtrademarks of Dolby Laboratories.This product incorporates copyrightprotection technology that isprotected by U.S. patents and otherintellectual property rights. Use ofthis copyright protection technologymust be authorized by Macrovision,and is intended for home and otherlimited viewing uses only unlessotherwise authorized byMacrovision. Reverse engineeringor disassembly is prohibited."Made for iPod" means that anelectronic accessory has beendesigned to connect specificallyto iPod and has been certifiedby the developer to meetApple performance standards.Apple is not responsible for theoperation of this device or itscompliance with safety andregulatory standards.iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano,and iPod touch are trademarksof Apple Inc., registered in theU.S. and other countries.
Black plate (82,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20127-82 Infotainment System2NOTES
Black plate (1,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Climate Controls 8-1Climate ControlsClimate Control SystemsAutomatic Climate ControlSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4Air VentsAir Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9MaintenanceAir Intake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10Passenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10Climate Control SystemsAutomatic Climate Control SystemFor vehicles with this system, it controls the heating, cooling, and ventilation.A. PowerB. Temperature ControlC. Fan ControlD. Air Delivery Mode ControlE. RecirculationF. AUTO (Automatic Operation)G. DefrostH. Air ConditioningI. Rear Window Defogger
Black plate (2,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20128-2 Climate ControlsAutomatic OperationThe system automatically controlsthe fan speed, air delivery, airconditioning, and recirculation inorder to heat or cool the vehicle tothe desired temperature.When the AUTO indicator light ison, the system is in full automaticoperation. If the air delivery mode,fan speed, recirculation, or airconditioning setting is adjusted, theAUTO indicator turns off and theselected settings will appear onthe display.To place the system in automaticmode do the following:1. Press AUTO.2. Set the temperature. Allow thesystem time to stabilize. Adjustthe temperature as needed forbest comfort.To improve fuel efficiency and tocool the vehicle faster, recirculationmay be automatically selected inwarm weather.The recirculation light will not comeon. Press >to select recirculation;press it again to select outside air.QTEMP R(TemperatureControl): Press to increase ordecrease the temperature.Manual OperationO(Power): Press to turn the fanon or off.QAR(Fan Control): Press toincrease or decrease the fan speed.The fan speed setting appears onthe main display. Pressing eitherbutton cancels automatic fan controland the fan can be controlledmanually. Press AUTO to return toautomatic operation.Q N R (Air Delivery ModeControl): Press to change thedirection of the airflow. The currentmode appears in the display screen.Pressing either button cancelsautomatic air delivery control andthe direction of the airflow can becontrolled manually. Press AUTO toreturn to automatic operation.To change the current mode, selectone of the following:Y(Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.\(Bi-Level): Air is dividedbetween the instrument paneloutlets and the floor outlets.C(Tri‐Level): Air is dividedbetween the windshield, instrumentpanel, and floor outlets.[(Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets.-(Defog): Clears the windows offog or moisture. Air is directed to thewindshield and floor outlets.0(Defrost): Clears thewindshield of fog or frost morequickly. Air is directed to thewindshield. Selecting defrost willdisable automatic control.For best results, clear all snow andice from the windshield beforedefrosting.
Black plate (3,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Climate Controls 8-3#(Air Conditioning): Press toturn the air conditioning system onor off. If the fan is turned off or theoutside temperature falls belowfreezing, the air conditioning systemwill not run.Pressing this button cancelsautomatic air conditioning and turnsoff the air conditioner. Press AUTOto return to automatic operation andthe air conditioner runsautomatically as needed. When theindicator light is on, the airconditioner runs automatically tocool the air inside the vehicle or todry the air needed to defog thewindshield faster.>(Recirculation): Press toalternate between recirculating airinside the vehicle or pulling inoutside air. When the indicator lightis on, air is being recirculated insidethe vehicle. This helps to quicklycool the air inside the vehicle orprevent outside air and odorsfrom entering.Pressing this button cancelsautomatic recirculation. Press AUTOto return to automatic operation andrecirculation runs automatically asneeded.Rear Window Defogger=(Rear Window Defogger):Press to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off.The rear window defogger turns offautomatically after about10 minutes. If turned on again itruns for about five minutes beforeturning off. The defogger can alsobe turned off by turning the ignitionto ACC/ACCESSORY orLOCK/OFF.The rear window defogger can beset to automatic operation. See“Climate and Air Quality”underVehicle Personalization onpage 5‑40. When auto rear defog isselected, the rear window defoggerturns on automatically when theinterior temperature is cold andthe outside temperature is about4°C (40°F) and below.The auto rear defogger turnsoff automatically after about10 minutes, or after five minutes ifthe outside temperature is notas cold.For vehicles with heated outsiderearview mirrors, they turn on whenthe rear window defogger button ison and help to clear fog or frost fromthe surface of the mirror. SeeHeated Mirrors on page 2‑17.Notice: Do not try to clear frostor other material from the insideof the front windshield and rearwindow with a razor blade oranything else that is sharp. Thismay damage the rear windowdefogger grid and affect yourradio's ability to pick up stationsclearly. The repairs would not becovered by your warranty.Remote Start Climate ControlOperation (if equipped): When thevehicle is started remotely, theclimate control system will use thelast setting before the vehicle wasshut off.
Black plate (4,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20128-4 Climate ControlsIf Automatic Operation was set, thefan speed will adjust to maximizeheating or cooling. If ManualOperation was set, the fan speedwill be limited to the last setting. Inextreme temperatures, the systemmay not be able to heat or cool thevehicle to the preset temperatureduring the remote start run time.The rear window defogger turns onif it is cold outside.SensorThe solar sensor, located on top ofthe instrument panel near thewindshield, monitors the solar heat.The climate control system uses thesensor information to adjust thetemperature, fan speed,recirculation, and air delivery modefor best comfort.Do not cover the sensor; otherwisethe automatic climate control systemmay not work properly.Dual Automatic Climate Control SystemFor vehicles with this system, it controls the heating, cooling, and ventilation.Non-eAssist VehiclesA. PowerB. Driver Temperature ControlC. DefrostD. Fan ControlE. Air Delivery Mode ControlF. Recirculation/AutomaticRecirculationG. Passenger Temperature ControlH. AUTO (Automatic Operation)I. Rear Window DefoggerJ. Heated Steering WheelK. Air ConditioningL. ZONE
Black plate (5,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Climate Controls 8-5eAssist VehiclesA. PowerB. Driver Temperature ControlC. DefrostD. Fan ControlE. Air Delivery Mode ControlF. Recirculation/AutomaticRecirculationG. Passenger Temperature ControlH. AUTO (Automatic Operation)I. Rear Window DefoggerJ. Eco Air ConditioningK. Comfort Air ConditioningL. ZONEClimate Control Influence oneAssist Operation and FuelEconomy (If Equipped)The climate control system isdependent upon other vehiclesystems for heat and power input.Certain climate control settings canlead to higher fuel usage and/orfewer auto stops.The following are climate controlsettings that use more fuel:.Comfort air conditioning mode..The Defrost mode..Extreme temperature settings,such as 15°C (60°F) or32°C (90°F)..High fan speed settings.To help reduce fuel usage:.Use the full automatic control asdescribed under “AutomaticOperation”..Use eco air conditioning, insteadof the comfort air conditioning..Select a temperature setting thatis higher in hot weather andlower in cold weather..Turn off the air conditioningwhen it is not needed..Only use defrost to clear thewindows.
Black plate (6,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20128-6 Climate ControlsAutomatic OperationThe system automatically controlsthe fan speed, air delivery, airconditioning, and recirculation inorder to heat or cool the vehicle tothe desired temperature.When the AUTO indicator light ison, the system is in full automaticoperation. If the air delivery mode,fan speed, recirculation, or airconditioning setting is adjusted, theAUTO indicator turns off and theselected settings will appear on thedisplay.To place the system in automaticmode do the following:1. Press AUTO.2. Set the temperature. Allow thesystem time to stabilize. Adjustthe temperature as needed forbest comfort.To improve fuel efficiency and tocool the vehicle faster, recirculationmay be automatically selected inwarm weather.The recirculation light will not comeon. Press >to select recirculation;press it again to select outside air.QTEMP R(Driver and PassengerTemperature Control): Thetemperature can be adjustedseparately for the driver and thepassenger. Press to increase ordecrease the temperature.ZONE: Press to link all climatezone settings to the driver settings.The ZONE indicator light will turnoff. When the passenger settingsare adjusted, the ZONE indicatorlight is on.Manual OperationO(Power): Press to turn the fan offor on.QAR(Fan Control): Press toincrease or decrease the fan speed.The fan speed setting appears onthe main display. Pressing eitherbutton cancels automatic fan controland the fan is controlled manually.Press AUTO to return to automaticoperation.Q N R (Air Delivery ModeControl): Press to change thedirection of the airflow. The currentmode appears in the display screen.Pressing either button cancelsautomatic air delivery control andthe direction of the airflow iscontrolled manually. Press AUTO toreturn to automatic operation.To change the current mode, selectone of the following:Y(Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.\(Bi-Level): Air is dividedbetween the instrument paneloutlets and the floor outlets.C(Tri‐Level): Air is dividedbetween the windshield, instrumentpanel, and floor outlets.[(Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets.-(Defog): Clears the windows offog or moisture. Air is directed to thewindshield and floor outlets.
Black plate (7,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Climate Controls 8-70(Defrost): Clears thewindshield of fog or frost morequickly. Air is directed to thewindshield.For best results, clear all snow andice from the windshield beforedefrosting.For eAssist vehicles that have theauto defog feature, auto stops canoccur in defrost mode. In this mode,the auto stops are shorter and lessfrequent than other air deliverymodes to prevent instant fogging.#(Comfort Air Conditioning):Press to turn the air conditioningsystem on or off. If the climatecontrol system is turned off or theoutside temperature falls belowfreezing, the air conditioner willnot run.Pressing this button cancelsautomatic air conditioning andturns off the air conditioner.Press AUTO to return to automaticoperation and the air conditionerruns automatically as needed.When the indicator light is on, theair conditioner runs automatically tocool the air inside the vehicle or todry the air needed to defog thewindshield faster.For eAssist vehicles, an auto stopmay occur if the climate controlsystem determines the a/ccompressor can be shut off and stillmaintain comfort levels with minimalwindshield fogging.Eco #(Eco Air Conditioning,If Equipped): This setting balancesfuel economy and air conditioningcomfort. In warm weatherconditions, auto stops may occurmore frequently and the vehicleinterior may be warmer ascompared to the comfort airconditioning. The eco a/c settingallows higher humidity inside thevehicle and window fogging beforethe engine restarts.Pressing the 0button during anauto stop will restart the engine toprevent window fogging. To reachcomfort levels quickly during anauto stop, the engine will restart ifthe air conditioner is off and theAUTO, eco #, or Comfort #isselected. The engine also restartsif the Ois pressed on and thesystem is set to AUTO, eco #,or Comfort #.If temperature controls are adjustedcooler by more than 1°C (1°F)during an auto stop, the engine willrestart to ensure that comfort isreached.>//(Recirculation/AutoRecirculation): Press to change toautomatic control of air recirculationinside the vehicle. When the autorecirculation indicator light is on, theair is automatically recirculated asneeded to help quickly cool the airinside the vehicle.In auto recirculation control, the AirQuality Control system may operatewhen pollution is detected. To adjustthe sensitivity of the Air QualityControl, see “Climate and AirQuality”under VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑40.
Black plate (8,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20128-8 Climate ControlsWhen the >indicator light is on, airis recirculated inside the vehicle.If both indicator lights are off,outside air will flow into the vehicle.Press AUTO or /to return toautomatic operation.Auto Defog: The climate controlsystem may have a sensor toautomatically detect high humidityinside the vehicle. When highhumidity is detected, the climatecontrol system may adjust tooutside air supply and turn on theair conditioner. The fan speed mayslightly increase to help preventfogging. If the climate controlsystem does not detect possiblewindow fogging, it returns to normaloperation. To turn Auto Defog off oron, see “Climate and Air Quality”under Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑40.Rear Window Defogger=(Rear Window Defogger):Press to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off.The rear window defogger turnsoff automatically after about10 minutes. If turned on again itruns for about five minutes beforeturning off. The defogger can alsobe turned off by turning the ignitionto ACC/ACCESSORY orLOCK/OFF.The rear window defogger can beset to automatic operation. See“Climate and Air Quality”underVehicle Personalization onpage 5‑40. When auto rear defog isselected, the rear window defoggerturns on automatically when theinterior temperature is cold andthe outside temperature is about4°C (40°F) and below. The autorear defogger turns off automaticallyafter about 10 minutes, or afterfive minutes if the outsidetemperature is not as cold.For vehicles with heated outsiderearview mirrors, they turn on whenthe rear window defogger button ison and help to clear fog or frost fromthe surface of the mirror. SeeHeated Mirrors on page 2‑17.Notice: Do not try to clear frostor other material from the insideof the front windshield and rearwindow with a razor blade oranything else that is sharp. Thismay damage the rear windowdefogger grid and affect yourradio's ability to pick up stationsclearly. The repairs would not becovered by your warranty.((Heated Steering Wheel):For vehicles with this feature, pressto turn on or off. See HeatedSteering Wheel on page 5‑3.Remote Start Climate ControlOperation (if equipped): When thevehicle is started remotely, theclimate control system will use thelast setting before the vehicle wasshut off. If Automatic Operation wasset, the fan speed will adjust to
Black plate (9,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Climate Controls 8-9maximize heating or cooling. IfManual Operation was set, the fanspeed will be limited to the lastsetting. In extreme temperatures,the system may not be able to heator cool the vehicle to the presettemperature during the remote startrun time.The rear window defogger turns onif it is cold outside.SensorThe solar sensor, located on top ofthe instrument panel near thewindshield, monitors the solar heat.The climate control system uses thesensor information to adjust thetemperature, fan speed,recirculation, and air delivery modefor best comfort.Do not cover the sensor; otherwisethe automatic climate control systemmay not work properly.Air VentsUse the louvers located on theair vents to change the directionof the airflow.To open the vent, move thethumbwheel to t. To close the vent,move the thumbwheel to l.For vehicles with eAssist, there is abattery cooling air vent located onthe shelf behind the rear passengerseats below the rear window. Keepthis air inlet clear from items thatmay block air flow. Proper airflow isrequired to keep the eAssist batteryand control system cool.Operation Tips.Keep all outlets open wheneverpossible for best systemperformance..Keep the path under all seatsclear of objects to help circulatethe air inside the vehicle moreeffectively..Use of non-GM approved hooddeflectors can adversely affectthe performance of the system.
Black plate (10,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20128-10 Climate ControlsMaintenanceAir IntakeClear away any ice, snow, or leavesfrom the air intake at the base of thewindshield that can block the flow ofair into the vehicle.Passenger CompartmentAir FilterThe filter removes dust, pollen, andother airborne irritants from outsideair that is pulled into the vehicle.The filter should be replaced as partof routine scheduled maintenance.See Maintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3for replacement intervals.For more information, see yourdealer.
Black plate (1,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Driving and Operating 9-1Driving andOperatingDriving InformationDistracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-6Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-7Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . 9-10Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-10Starting and OperatingNew Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-15Ignition Positions(Key Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16Ignition Positions(Keyless Access) . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-20Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-26Parking over ThingsThat Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27Engine ExhaustEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28Running the Vehicle WhileParked ..................... 9-28Automatic TransmissionAutomatic Transmission . . . . . 9-29Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31Drive SystemsAll-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32BrakesAntilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . 9-36Ride Control SystemsTraction ControlSystem (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36StabiliTrak®System . . . . . . . . . 9-37Limited-Slip Differential . . . . . . 9-39Selective Ride Control . . . . . . . 9-39Cruise ControlCruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40Object Detection SystemsUltrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 9-42Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44Rear VisionCamera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46
Black plate (2,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20129-2 Driving and OperatingFuelFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-49Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-49Gasoline Specifications (U.S.and Canada Only) . . . . . . . . . . 9-50California FuelRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-50Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53TowingGeneral TowingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54Trailer Towing (ExcepteAssist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57Trailer Towing (eAssist) . . . . . . 9-59Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59Conversions and Add-OnsAdd-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-60Driving InformationDistracted DrivingDistraction comes in many formsand can take your focus from thetask of driving. Exercise goodjudgment and do not let otheractivities divert your attentionaway from the road. Many localgovernments have enacted lawsregarding driver distraction.Become familiar with the local lawsin your area.To avoid distracted driving, alwayskeep your eyes on the road, handson the wheel, and mind on the drive..Do not use a phone indemanding driving situations.Use a hands-free method toplace or receive necessaryphone calls..Watch the road. Do not read,take notes, or look upinformation on phones orother electronic devices..Designate a front seatpassenger to handle potentialdistractions..Become familiar with vehiclefeatures before driving, such asprogramming favorite radiostations and adjusting climatecontrol and seat settings.Program all trip information intoany navigation device prior todriving..Wait until the vehicle is parkedto retrieve items that have fallento the floor..Stop or park the vehicle to tendto children..Keep pets in an appropriatecarrier or restraint..Avoid stressful conversationswhile driving, whether with apassenger or on a cell phone.
Black plate (3,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Driving and Operating 9-3{WARNINGTaking your eyes off the road toolong or too often could cause acrash resulting in injury or death.Focus your attention on driving.Refer to the Infotainment section formore information on using thatsystem, including pairing and usinga cell phone.If equipped, refer to the navigationmanual for information on thatsystem, including pairing and usinga cell phone.Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “alwaysexpect the unexpected.”The firststep in driving defensively is to wearthe safety belt. See Safety Belts onpage 3‑13..Assume that other road users(pedestrians, bicyclists, andother drivers) are going to becareless and make mistakes.Anticipate what they might doand be ready..Allow enough following distancebetween you and the driver infront of you..Focus on the task of driving.Drunk DrivingDeath and injury associated withdrinking and driving is a globaltragedy.{WARNINGDrinking and then driving isvery dangerous. Your reflexes,perceptions, attentiveness, andjudgment can be affected by evena small amount of alcohol. Youcan have a serious —or evenfatal —collision if you driveafter drinking.(Continued)WARNING (Continued)Do not drink and drive or ride witha driver who has been drinking.Ride home in a cab; or if you arewith a group, designate a driverwho will not drink.Control of a VehicleBraking, steering, and acceleratingare important factors in helping tocontrol a vehicle while driving.BrakingBraking action involves perceptiontime and reaction time. Deciding topush the brake pedal is perceptiontime. Actually doing it isreaction time.Average driver reaction time isabout three‐fourths of a second.In that time, a vehicle moving at100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m(66 ft), which could be a lot ofdistance in an emergency.
Black plate (4,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20129-4 Driving and OperatingHelpful braking tips to keep in mindinclude:.Keep enough distance betweenyou and the vehicle in frontof you..Avoid needless heavy braking..Keep pace with traffic.If the engine ever stops while thevehicle is being driven, brakenormally but do not pump thebrakes. Doing so could make thepedal harder to push down. If theengine stops, there will be somepower brake assist but it will beused when the brake is applied.Once the power assist is used up, itcan take longer to stop and thebrake pedal will be harder to push.SteeringElectric Power SteeringIf your vehicle has electric powersteering it does not have powersteering fluid. Regular maintenanceis not required.If power steering assist is lost dueto a system malfunction, the vehiclecan be steered, but may requireincreased effort.If the steering wheel is turned ineither direction several times until itstops, or it is held until it is stoppedfor an extended time, powersteering assist should return shortlyafter a few normal steeringmovements.See specific vehicle steeringmessages under Vehicle Messageson page 5‑33.See your dealer if there is aproblem.Variable Effort SteeringSome vehicles have a steeringsystem that varies the amount ofeffort required to steer the vehicle inrelation to the speed of the vehicle.The amount of steering effortrequired is less at slower speeds tomake the vehicle moremaneuverable and easier to park.At faster speeds, the steering effortincreases to provide a sport-like feelto the steering. This providesmaximum control and stability.If the vehicle seems harder to steerthan normal when parking or drivingslowly, there may be a problem withthe system. You will still have powersteering, but steering will be stifferthan normal at slow speeds. Seeyour dealer for service.Hydraulic Power SteeringIf your vehicle has hydraulic powersteering, it may requiremaintenance. See Power SteeringFluid Power Steering Fluid (2.4L L4Engine) on page 10‑21 or PowerSteering Fluid (3.6L V6 Engine) onpage 10‑21.If power steering assist is lostbecause the engine stops or thepower steering system is notfunctioning, the vehicle can besteered but may require increasedeffort. See your dealer if there isa problem.
Black plate (5,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Driving and Operating 9-5Curve Tips.Take curves at a reasonablespeed..Reduce speed before entering acurve..Maintain a reasonable steadyspeed through the curve.Wait until the vehicle is out ofthe curve before acceleratinggently into the straightaway.Steering in Emergencies.There are some situations whensteering around a problem maybe more effective than braking..Holding both sides of thesteering wheel allows you to turn180 degrees without removinga hand..Antilock Brake System (ABS)allows steering while braking.Off-Road RecoveryThe vehicle's right wheels can dropoff the edge of a road onto theshoulder while driving. Followthese tips:1. Ease off the accelerator andthen, if there is nothing in theway, steer the vehicle so that itstraddles the edge of thepavement.2. Turn the steering wheel aboutone-eighth of a turn, until theright front tire contacts thepavement edge.3. Then turn the steering wheel togo straight down the roadway.Loss of ControlSkiddingThere are three types of skids thatcorrespond to the vehicle's threecontrol systems:.Braking Skid —wheels are notrolling..Steering or CorneringSkid —too much speed orsteering in a curve causes tiresto slip and lose cornering force..Acceleration Skid —too muchthrottle causes the drivingwheels to spin.Defensive drivers avoid most skidsby taking reasonable care suitedto existing conditions, and by notoverdriving those conditions.But skids are always possible.
Black plate (6,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20129-6 Driving and OperatingIf the vehicle starts to slide, followthese suggestions:.Ease your foot off theaccelerator pedal and quicklysteer the way you want thevehicle to go. The vehicle maystraighten out. Be ready for asecond skid if it occurs..Slow down and adjust yourdriving according to weatherconditions. Stopping distancecan be longer and vehiclecontrol can be affected whentraction is reduced by water,snow, ice, gravel, or othermaterial on the road. Learn torecognize warning clues —suchas enough water, ice, or packedsnow on the road to make amirrored surface —and slowdown when you have any doubt..Try to avoid sudden steering,acceleration, or braking,including reducing vehicle speedby shifting to a lower gear. Anysudden changes could causethe tires to slide.Remember: Antilock brakes helpavoid only the braking skid.Driving on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can reducevehicle traction and affect yourability to stop and accelerate.Always drive slower in these typesof driving conditions and avoiddriving through large puddles anddeep‐standing or flowing water.{WARNINGWet brakes can cause crashes.They might not work as well in aquick stop and could causepulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.After driving through a largepuddle of water or a car/vehiclewash, lightly apply the brakepedal until the brakes worknormally.(Continued)WARNING (Continued)Flowing or rushing water createsstrong forces. Driving throughflowing water could cause thevehicle to be carried away. If thishappens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and bevery cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.HydroplaningHydroplaning is dangerous. Watercan build up under the vehicle'stires so they actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the road iswet enough and you are going fastenough. When the vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or nocontact with the road.There is no hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is toslow down when the road is wet.
Black plate (7,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Driving and Operating 9-7Other Rainy Weather TipsBesides slowing down, other wetweather driving tips include:.Allow extra following distance..Pass with caution..Keep windshield wipingequipment in good shape..Keep the windshield washer fluidreservoir filled..Have good tires with propertread depth. See Tires onpage 10‑44..Turn off cruise control.Highway HypnosisAlways be alert and pay attentionto your surroundings while driving.If you become tired or sleepy, find asafe place to park the vehicleand rest.Other driving tips include:.Keep the vehicle well ventilated..Keep the interiortemperature cool..Keep your eyes moving —scanthe road ahead and to the sides..Check the rearview mirror andvehicle instruments often.Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or throughmountains is different than drivingon flat or rolling terrain. Tips fordriving in these conditions include:.Keep the vehicle serviced and ingood shape..Check all fluid levels and brakes,tires, cooling system, andtransmission..Shift to a lower gear when goingdown steep or long hills.{WARNINGIf you do not shift down, thebrakes could get so hot that theywould not work well. You wouldthen have poor braking or evennone going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let the engineassist the brakes on a steepdownhill slope.
Black plate (8,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20129-8 Driving and Operating{WARNINGCoasting downhill in N (Neutral)or with the ignition off isdangerous. The brakes will haveto do all the work of slowing downand they could get so hot thatthey would not work well. Youwould then have poor braking oreven none going down a hill. Youcould crash. Always have theengine running and the vehicle ingear when going downhill..Stay in your own lane. Do notswing wide or cut across thecenter of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in yourown lane..Be alert on top of hills,something could be in your lane(stalled car, accident)..Pay attention to special roadsigns (falling rocks area, windingroads, long grades, passing orno-passing zones) and takeappropriate action.Winter DrivingDriving on Snow or IceDrive carefully when there is snowor ice between the tires and theroad, creating less traction or grip.Wet ice can occur at about 0°C(32°F) when freezing rain begins tofall, resulting in even less traction.Avoid driving on wet ice or infreezing rain until roads can betreated with salt or sand.Drive with caution, whatever thecondition. Accelerate gently sotraction is not lost. Accelerating tooquickly causes the wheels to spinand makes the surface under thetires slick, so there is even lesstraction.Try not to break the fragile traction.If you accelerate too fast, the drivewheels will spin and polish thesurface under the tires even more.The Antilock Brake System (ABS)on page 9‑33 improves vehiclestability during hard stops onslippery roads, but apply the brakessooner than when on dry pavement.Allow greater following distance onany slippery road and watch forslippery spots. Icy patches canoccur on otherwise clear roads inshaded areas. The surface of acurve or an overpass can remain icywhen the surrounding roads areclear. Avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers and braking whileon ice.Turn off cruise control on slipperysurfaces.
Black plate (9,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Driving and Operating 9-9Blizzard ConditionsBeing stuck in snow can be aserious situation. Stay with thevehicle unless there is help nearby.If possible, use the RoadsideAssistance Program (U.S. andCanada) on page 13‑7or RoadsideAssistance Program (Mexico) onpage 13‑9. To get help and keepeveryone in the vehicle safe:.Turn on the hazard warningflashers..Tie a red cloth to an outsidemirror.{WARNINGSnow can trap engine exhaustunder the vehicle. This maycause exhaust gases to getinside. Engine exhaust containscarbon monoxide (CO) whichcannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousnessand even death.(Continued)WARNING (Continued)If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:.Clear away snow from aroundthe base of your vehicle,especially any that is blockingthe exhaust pipe..Check again from time totime to be sure snow doesnot collect there..Open a window about 5 cm(2 in) on the side of thevehicle that is away from thewind to bring in fresh air..Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel..Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatcirculates the air inside thevehicle and set the fan speedto the highest setting. See“Climate Control System”inthe Index.(Continued)WARNING (Continued)For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑28.Run the engine for short periodsonly as needed to keep warm, butbe careful.To save fuel, run the engine for onlyshort periods as needed to warmthe vehicle and then shut the engineoff and close the window most ofthe way to save heat. Repeat thisuntil help arrives but only when youfeel really uncomfortable from thecold. Moving about to keep warmalso helps.If it takes some time for help toarrive, now and then when you runthe engine, push the acceleratorpedal slightly so the engine runsfaster than the idle speed. Thiskeeps the battery charged to restartthe vehicle and to signal for helpwith the headlamps. Do this as littleas possible to save fuel.
Black plate (10,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20129-10 Driving and OperatingIf the Vehicle Is StuckSlowly and cautiously spin thewheels to free the vehicle whenstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.If stuck too severely for the tractionsystem to free the vehicle, turn thetraction system off and use therocking method.{WARNINGIf the vehicle's tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and youor others could be injured. Thevehicle can overheat, causing anengine compartment fire or otherdamage. Spin the wheels as littleas possible and avoid goingabove 55 km/h (35 mph).For information about using tirechains on the vehicle, see TireChains on page 10‑64.Rocking the Vehicle to Getit OutTurn the steering wheel left andright to clear the area around thefront wheels. Turn off any tractionsystem. Shift back and forthbetween R (Reverse) and a forwardgear, spinning the wheels as little aspossible. To prevent transmissionwear, wait until the wheels stopspinning before shifting gears.Release the accelerator pedal whileshifting, and press lightly on theaccelerator pedal when thetransmission is in gear. Slowlyspinning the wheels in the forwardand reverse directions causes arocking motion that could free thevehicle. If that does not get thevehicle out after a few tries, it mightneed to be towed out. If the vehicledoes need to be towed out, seeTowing the Vehicle on page 10‑94.Vehicle Load LimitsIt is very important to know howmuch weight the vehicle cancarry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight andincludes the weight of alloccupants, cargo and allnonfactory‐installed options.Two labels on the vehicle showhow much weight it mayproperly carry, the Tire andLoading Information label andthe Certification label.
Black plate (11,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Driving and Operating 9-11{WARNINGDo not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way thevehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoshorten the life of the vehicle.Tire and Loading InformationLabelLabel ExampleA vehicle-specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to the vehicle's centerpillar (B-pillar). The Tire andLoading Information label showsthe number of occupant seatingpositions (A), and the maximumvehicle capacity weight (B) inkilograms and pounds.The Tire and LoadingInformation label also showsthe tire size of the originalequipment tires (C) and therecommended cold tire inflationpressures (D). For moreinformation on tires and inflationsee Tires on page 10‑44 andTire Pressure on page 10‑51.There is also important loadinginformation on the Certificationlabel. It tells you the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)and the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) for the front andrear axle. See “CertificationLabel”later in this section.
Black plate (12,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20129-12 Driving and OperatingSteps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit1. Locate the statement“The combined weight ofoccupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kg orXXX lbs”on your vehicle'splacard.2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.3. Subtract the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers from XXX kg orXXX lbs.4. The resulting figure equalsthe available amount of cargoand luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX”amount equals 1400 lbs andthere will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle,the amount of available cargoand luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 −750 (5 x 150)= 650 lbs).5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage and cargobeing loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safelyexceed the available cargoand luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.6. If your vehicle will be towinga trailer, the load from yourtrailer will be transferred toyour vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine how thisreduces the available cargoand luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.See Trailer Towing (ExcepteAssist) on page 9‑57 or TrailerTowing (eAssist) on page 9‑59for important information ontowing a trailer, towing safetyrules, and trailering tips.Example 1A. Vehicle Capacity Weightfor Example 1 =453 kg (1,000 lbs).B. Subtract Occupant Weight@ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 =136 kg (300 lbs).C. Available Occupant andCargo Weight =317 kg (700 lbs).
Black plate (13,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Driving and Operating 9-13Example 2A. Vehicle Capacity Weight forExample 2 =453 kg (1,000 lbs).B. Subtract Occupant Weight@ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 =340 kg (750 lbs).C. Available Cargo Weight =113 kg (250 lbs).Example 3A. Vehicle Capacity Weightfor Example 3 =453 kg (1,000 lbs).B. Subtract Occupant Weight@ 91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 =453 kg (1,000 lbs).C. Available Cargo Weight =0 kg (0 lbs).Refer to the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information label forspecific information about thevehicle's capacity weight andseating positions. The combinedweight of the driver, passengers,and cargo should never exceedthe vehicle's capacity weight.Certification LabelLabel ExampleA vehicle-specific Certificationlabel is attached to the vehicle'scenter pillar (B-pillar). The labeltells the gross weight capacity ofthe vehicle, called the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).
Black plate (14,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20129-14 Driving and OperatingThe GVWR includes the weightof the vehicle, all occupants,fuel, and cargo. Never exceedthe GVWR for the vehicle, orthe Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR) for either the front orrear axle.And, if there is a heavy load, itshould be spread out. See“Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit”earlier in thissection.{WARNINGDo not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the waythe vehicle handles.(Continued)WARNING (Continued)This could cause loss ofcontrol and a crash.Overloading can also shortenthe life of the vehicle.If you put things inside thevehicle —like suitcases, tools,packages, or anythingelse —they will go as fast as thevehicle goes. If you have to stopor turn quickly, or if there is acrash, they will keep going.{WARNINGThings inside the vehiclecan strike and injure peoplein a sudden stop or turn, orin a crash..Put things in the cargoarea of the vehicle. In thecargo area, put them as(Continued)WARNING (Continued)far forward as possible.Try to spread the weightevenly..Never stack heavierthings, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are abovethe tops of the seats..Do not leave anunsecured child restraintin the vehicle..Secure loose items inthe vehicle..Do not leave a seat foldeddown unless needed.
Black plate (15,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Driving and Operating 9-15Starting andOperatingNew Vehicle Break-InNotice: The vehicle does notneed an elaborate break-in. But itwill perform better in the long runif you follow these guidelines:.Do not drive at any oneconstant speed, fast or slow,for the first 805 km (500 mi).Do not make full-throttlestarts. Avoid downshifting tobrake or slow the vehicle..During the first 1 000 km(600 mi), avoid using morethan moderate accelerationin lower gears and avoidvehicle speeds above110 km/h (68 mph)..Between the first 1 000 km(600 mi) and 5 000 km(3,000 mi), heavyacceleration in lower gearscan be used. Vehicle speedsabove 110 km/h (68 mph)should be limited tofive minutes per use..Avoid making hard stops forthe first 322 km (200 mi) orso. During this time the newbrake linings are not yetbroken in. Hard stops withnew linings can meanpremature wear and earlierreplacement. Follow thisbreaking-in guideline everytime you get new brakelinings..Do not tow a trailer duringbreak-in. See DrivingCharacteristics and TowingTips on page 9‑54 for thetrailer towing capabilities ofyour vehicle and moreinformation.Following break‐in, engine speedand load can be graduallyincreased.
Black plate (16,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20129-16 Driving and OperatingIgnition Positions(Key Access)The ignition switch has four differentpositions.Notice: Using a tool to force thekey to turn in the ignition couldcause damage to the switch orbreak the key. Use the correctkey, make sure it is all the way in,and turn it only with your hand.If the key cannot be turned byhand, see your dealer.The key must be fully extended tostart the vehicle.To shift out of P (Park), turn theignition to ON/RUN and apply thebrake pedal.A (STOPPING THE ENGINE/LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle isstopped, turn the ignition switch toLOCK/OFF to turn the engine off.Retained Accessory Power (RAP)will remain active. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 9‑25 for more information.This is the only position from whichthe key can be removed. This locksthe ignition and automatictransmission.Do not turn the engine off when thevehicle is moving. This will cause aloss of power assist in the brakeand steering systems and disablethe airbags.If the vehicle must be shut off in anemergency:1. Brake using a firm and steadypressure. Do not pump thebrakes repeatedly. This maydeplete power assist, requiringincreased brake pedal force.2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral).This can be done while thevehicle is moving. After shiftingto N (Neutral), firmly apply thebrakes and steer the vehicle to asafe location.3. Come to a complete stop, shiftto P (Park), and turn the ignitionto LOCK/OFF. On vehicles withan automatic transmission, theshift lever must be in P (Park) toturn the ignition switch to theLOCK/OFF position.4. Set the parking brake. SeeParking Brake on page 9‑34.
Black plate (17,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Driving and Operating 9-17{WARNINGTurning off the vehicle whilemoving may cause loss of powerassist in the brake and steeringsystems and disable the airbags.While driving, only shut thevehicle off in an emergency.If the vehicle cannot be pulled over,and must be shut off while driving,turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY.The ignition switch can bind in theLOCK/OFF position with the wheelsturned off center. If this happens,move the steering wheel from rightto left while turning the key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If this does not work,then the vehicle needs service.B (ACC/ACCESSORY): Thisposition provides power to some ofthe electrical accessories. It unlocksthe ignition. To move the key fromACC/ACCESSORY to LOCK/OFF,the shift lever must be in P (Park).C (ON/RUN): The ignition switchstays in this position when theengine is running. This position canbe used to operate the electricalaccessories, including theventilation fan and 12‐volt poweroutlet, as well as to display somewarning and indicator lights. Thisposition can also be used forservice and diagnostics, and toverify the proper operation of themalfunction indicator lamp as maybe required for emission inspectionpurposes. The transmission is alsounlocked in this position.The battery could be drained if thekey is left in the ACC/ACCESSORYor ON/RUN position with the engineoff. The vehicle might not restart ifthe battery is allowed to drain for anextended period of time.D (START): This position starts theengine. When the engine starts,release the key. The ignition switchwill return to ON/RUN for normaldriving.A warning tone sounds when thedriver door is opened when theignition is still in ACC/ACCESSORYand the key is in the ignition.
Black plate (18,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20129-18 Driving and OperatingIgnition Positions(Keyless Access)The vehicle has an electronickeyless ignition with pushbuttonstart.Pressing the button cycles it throughthree modes, ACC/ACCESSORY,ON/RUN/START, and Stopping theEngine/OFF.The transmitter must be in thevehicle for the system to operate.If the pushbutton start is notworking, the vehicle may be near astrong radio antenna signal causinginterference to the keyless accesssystem. See Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation onpage 2‑3for more information.To shift out of P (Park), the vehiclemust be in ACC/ACCESSORY orON/RUN and the brake pedal mustbe applied.Stopping the Engine/OFF(No LED Lights): When thevehicle is stopped, press the engineSTART/STOP button once to turnthe engine off.If the vehicle is in P (Park), theignition will turn off, and RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) will remainactive. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 9‑25 for moreinformation.If the vehicle is not in P (Park), theignition will return to ACC/ACCESSORY and display themessage SHIFT TO PARK in theDriver Information Center (DIC).See Transmission Messages onpage 5‑39 for more information.When the vehicle is shifted intoP (Park), the ignition system willswitch to OFF.Do not turn the engine off when thevehicle is moving. This will cause aloss of power assist in the brakeand steering systems and disablethe airbags.If the vehicle must be shut off in anemergency:1. Brake using a firm and steadypressure. Do not pump thebrakes repeatedly. This maydeplete power assist, requiringincreased brake pedal force.2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral).This can be done while thevehicle is moving.
Black plate (19,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Driving and Operating 9-19After shifting to N (Neutral),firmly apply the brakes and steerthe vehicle to a safe location.3. Come to a complete stop, shiftto P (Park), and turn the ignitionto LOCK/OFF. On vehicles withan automatic transmission, theshift lever must be in P (Park) toturn the ignition switch to theLOCK/OFF position.4. Set the parking brake. SeeParking Brake on page 9‑34.{WARNINGTurning off the vehicle whilemoving may cause loss of powerassist in the brake and steeringsystems and disable the airbags.While driving, only shut thevehicle off in an emergency.If the vehicle must be shut off whiledriving, switch the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY.ACC/ACCESSORY (Amber LEDLight): This mode allows you touse some electrical accessorieswhen the engine is off.With the ignition off, pressing thebutton one time without the brakepedal applied will place the ignitionsystem in ACC/ACCESSORY.The ignition will switch fromACC/ACCESSORY to OFF afterfive minutes to prevent batteryrundown.ON/RUN/START (Green LEDLight): This mode is for driving andstarting. With the ignition off, andthe brake pedal applied, pressingthe button once will place theignition system in ON/RUN/START.Once engine cranking begins,release the button. Engine crankingwill continue until the engine starts.See Starting the Engine onpage 9‑20 for more information.The ignition will then remainin ON/RUN.Service Only ModeThis power mode is available forservice and diagnostics, and toverify the proper operation of themalfunction indicator lamp as maybe required for emission inspectionpurposes. With the vehicle off, andthe brake pedal not applied,pressing and holding the button formore than five seconds will placethe vehicle in Service Only Mode.The instruments and audio systemswill operate as they do in ON/RUN,but the vehicle will not be able to bedriven. The engine will not start inService Only Mode. Push the buttonagain to turn the vehicle off.
Black plate (20,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20129-20 Driving and OperatingStarting the EngineMove the shift lever to P (Park) orN (Neutral). The engine will not startin any other position. To restart theengine when the vehicle is alreadymoving, use N (Neutral) only.Notice: Do not try to shift toP (Park) if the vehicle is moving.If you do, you could damage thetransmission. Shift to P (Park)only when the vehicle is stopped.Notice: The engine is designed towork with the electronics in thevehicle. If you add electrical partsor accessories, you could changethe way the engine operates.Before adding electricalequipment, check with yourdealer. If you do not, the enginemight not perform properly. Anyresulting damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Starting Procedure (Key Access)1. With your foot off the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition key toSTART. When the engine starts,let go of the ignition.The idle speed will go down asyour engine gets warm. Do notrace the engine immediatelyafter starting it. Operate theengine and transmission gentlyto allow the oil to warm up andlubricate all moving parts.The vehicle has aComputer-Controlled CrankingSystem. This feature assists instarting the engine and protectscomponents. If the ignition key isturned to the START position,and then released when theengine begins cranking, theengine will continue cranking fora few seconds or until thevehicle starts. If the engine doesnot start and the key is held inSTART for many seconds,cranking will be stopped after15 seconds to prevent crankingmotor damage. To prevent geardamage, this system alsoprevents cranking if the engineis already running. Enginecranking can be stopped byturning the ignition switch toACC/ACCESSORY orLOCK/OFF.Notice: Cranking the engine forlong periods of time, by returningthe key to the START positionimmediately after cranking hasended, can overheat and damagethe cranking motor, and drain thebattery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.2. If the engine does not start afterfive to 10 seconds, especially invery cold weather (below −18°Cor 0°F), it could be flooded withtoo much gasoline. Try pushingthe accelerator pedal all the wayto the floor and holding it thereas you hold the key in START,or press the START button, forup to a maximum of 15 seconds.
Black plate (21,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Driving and Operating 9-21Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to allow thecranking motor to cool down.When the engine starts, let go ofthe key or button, and theaccelerator. If the vehicle startsbriefly but then stops again, dothe same thing. This clears theextra gasoline from the engine.Do not race the engineimmediately after starting it.Operate the engine andtransmission gently until the oilwarms up and lubricates allmoving parts.Starting Procedure (KeylessAccess)1. If the vehicle has the keylessaccess system, the transmittermust be in the vehicle. Put yourfoot on the brake pedal andpush the START button. Whenthe engine begins cranking, letgo of the button.The idle speed will go down asyour engine gets warm. Do notrace the engine immediatelyafter starting it. Operate theengine and transmission gentlyto allow the oil to warm up andlubricate all moving parts.If the transmitter is not in thevehicle or something isinterfering with the transmitter,the Driver Information Center(DIC) will display NO REMOTEDETECTED. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑25 for more information.If the battery in the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitterneeds replacing, the DICdisplays REPLACE BATTERYIN REMOTE KEY. The vehiclecan still be driven. See “Startingthe Vehicle with a LowTransmitter Battery”in RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2‑3for moreinformation.The vehicle has aComputer-Controlled CrankingSystem. This feature assists instarting the engine and protectscomponents. If the STARTbutton is pressed, and thenreleased when the enginebegins cranking, the engine willcontinue cranking for a fewseconds or until the vehiclestarts. If the engine does notstart and the button is pressedfor many seconds, cranking willbe stopped after 15 seconds toprevent cranking motor damage.To prevent gear damage, thissystem also prevents cranking ifthe engine is already running.Engine cranking can be stoppedby pressing the START button asecond time.Notice: Cranking the engine forlong periods of time, by returningthe key to the START positionimmediately after cranking hasended, can overheat and damagethe cranking motor, and drain thebattery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.
Black plate (22,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20129-22 Driving and Operating2. If the engine does not start afterfive to 10 seconds, especially invery cold weather (below −18°Cor 0°F), it could be flooded withtoo much gasoline. Try pushingthe accelerator pedal all the wayto the floor and holding it thereas you hold the key in START,or press the START button, forup to a maximum of 15 seconds.Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to allow thecranking motor to cool down.When the engine starts, let go ofthe key or button, and theaccelerator. If the vehicle startsbriefly but then stops again, dothe same thing. This clears theextra gasoline from the engine.Do not race the engineimmediately after starting it.Operate the engine andtransmission gently until the oilwarms up and lubricates allmoving parts.eAssist Automatic EngineStart/Stop{WARNINGExiting the vehicle, without firstshifting into P (Park), may causethe vehicle to move, you or othersmay be injured. Because thevehicle has the Automatic EngineStart/Stop feature, the vehicle'sengine might seem to be shut off,however, once the brake pedal isreleased, the engine will startup again.Shift to P (Park) and turn theignition to LOCK/OFF, beforeexiting the vehicle.Vehicles with eAssist have anautomatic engine start/stop feature.After the engine is started and hasreached operating temperature, theauto stop feature may cause theengine to turn off when the brakesare applied and the vehicle comesto a complete stop.The vehicle may remain in auto stopfor up to two minutes. When thebrake is released or the acceleratorpedal applied, the engine will start.The engine will continue to run untilthe next auto stop.AUTO STOP on the tachometersignifies that the engine is in autostop mode. See Tachometer onpage 5‑11 for more information.When the vehicle is turned off, thetachometer will move to OFF. If thedriver door is opened while in autostop mode, a chime will sound.To restart the engine during autostop, release the brake pedal orpress the accelerator pedal. Theengine starts immediately. Thevehicle continues to run until thenext stop.There are several conditions whichmay prevent an auto stop or causean auto start.
Black plate (23,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Driving and Operating 9-23The Engine Will RemainRunning When:.The engine, transmission,or high voltage battery is notwarmed up yet..The outside temperature is lessthan −20°C (−4°F)..The air conditioning or defrostsystem need the compressor tomaintain vehicle comfort. SeeDual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8‑4for moreinformation..The shift lever is in P (Park),N (Neutral), R (Reverse),or M (Manual Mode)..The high voltage battery packcharge is low..The hood is not fully closed..Brake pedal pressure is high..If the MIL is on, auto stop maybe prevented.The Engine Will Restart When:.The brake pedal is released..The accelerator pedal is applied..Shifting out of D (Drive) to anyother gear..If the eco air conditioning buttonis selected, the duration of theauto stop will depend on theoutside temperature. Thiseconomy mode improves fueleconomy by limiting the effectsof the air conditioning. Thewarmer it is outside, the shorterthe time before the engine isrestarted to provide cabincooling..The climate control system isturned from off to normal airconditioning or defrost. See DualAutomatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8‑4for moreinformation..The engine is required to run foreither heater or climate controlperformance. See DualAutomatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8‑4for moreinformation..The high voltage battery packcharge is low and requiresrecharging..Auto stop time is greater thantwo minutes..The hood is opened.
Black plate (24,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20129-24 Driving and OperatingEngine HeaterThe engine coolant heater,if available, can help in cold weatherconditions at or below −18°C (0°F)for easier starting and better fueleconomy during engine warm-up.Plug in the coolant heater at leastfour hours before starting thevehicle. An internal thermostat inthe plug end of the cord will preventengine coolant heater operation attemperatures above −18°C (0°F).To Use the Engine CoolantHeater1. Turn off the engine.2. Open the hood and unwrap theelectrical cord.3.6L V6 EngineThe electrical cord is located onthe driver side of the enginecompartment, between thefender and the enginecompartment fuse block onvehicles with a six cylinderengine.2.4L L4 EngineThe electrical cord is located onthe passenger side of the enginecompartment, between thefender and the air cleaner onvehicles with a four cylinderengine.3. Plug it into a normal, grounded110-volt AC outlet.
Black plate (25,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Driving and Operating 9-25{WARNINGPlugging the cord into anungrounded outlet could cause anelectrical shock. Also, the wrongkind of extension cord couldoverheat and cause a fire. Youcould be seriously injured. Plugthe cord into a properly groundedthree-prong 110-volt AC outlet.If the cord will not reach, use aheavy-duty three-prong extensioncord rated for at least 15 amps.4. Before starting the engine, besure to unplug and store thecord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engine parts.The length of time the heater shouldremain plugged in depends onseveral factors. Ask a dealer in thearea where you will be parking thevehicle for the best advice on this.Retained AccessoryPower (RAP)These vehicle accessories can beused for up to 10 minutes after theengine is turned off:.Audio System.Power Windows.Sunroof (If Equipped).Auxiliary Power OutletPower to the audio system willcontinue to operate for up to10 minutes or until the driver door isopened.Power to the power windows andsunroof will continue to operate forup to 10 minutes or until any dooris opened.All of these features will workwhen the ignition is in ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY.Shifting Into Park{WARNINGIt can be dangerous to get out ofthe vehicle if the shift lever is notfully in P (Park) with the parkingbrake firmly set. The vehicle canroll. If you have left the enginerunning, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure the vehicle willnot move, even when you are onfairly level ground, use the stepsthat follow.1. Hold the brake pedal down andset the parking brake.See Parking Brake on page 9‑34for more information.2. Move the shift lever into P (Park)by pushing the lever all the waytoward the front of the vehicle.3. Turn the ignition off.
Black plate (26,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20129-26 Driving and OperatingLeaving the Vehicle with theEngine Running{WARNINGIt can be dangerous to leave thevehicle with the engine running.The vehicle could move suddenlyif the shift lever is not fully inP (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. And, if you leave thevehicle with the engine running, itcould overheat and even catchfire. You or others could beinjured. Do not leave the vehiclewith the engine running.If you have to leave the vehicle withthe engine running, be sure thevehicle is in P (Park) and theparking brake is firmly set beforeyou leave it. After you have movedthe shift lever into P (Park), holddown the regular brake pedal. See ifyou can move the shift lever awayfrom P (Park) without first pulling ittoward you. If you can, it means thatthe shift lever was not fully lockedinto P (Park).Torque LockTorque lock is when the weightof the vehicle puts too muchforce on the parking pawl in thetransmission. This happens whenparking on a hill and shifting thetransmission into P (Park) is notdone properly and then it is difficultto shift out of P (Park). To preventtorque lock, set the parking brakeand then shift into P (Park). To findout how, see "Shifting Into P (Park)"listed previously.If torque lock does occur, yourvehicle may need to be pusheduphill by another vehicle to relievethe parking pawl pressure, so youcan shift out of P (Park).If you are towing a trailer andparking on a hill, see DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tips onpage 9‑54.Shifting out of ParkAutomatic TransmissionShift LockThe vehicle has an automatictransmission shift lock controlsystem. The shift lock controlsystem is designed to:.Prevent ignition key removalunless the shift lever is inP (Park)..Prevent movement of the shiftlever out of P (Park), unless theignition is in ON/RUN and thebrake pedal is applied.The shift lock is always functionalexcept in the case of an unchargedor low voltage (less than 9‐volt)battery.
Black plate (27,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Driving and Operating 9-27If the vehicle has an unchargedbattery or a battery with low voltage,try charging or jump starting thebattery. See Jump Starting (with orwithout eAssist) on page 10‑90 orJump Starting (On-board witheAssist Only) on page 10‑93.If the shift lever cannot be movedout of P (Park):1. Apply and maintain the regularbrakes.2. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUNposition. See Ignition Positions(Key Access) on page 9‑16 orIgnition Positions (KeylessAccess) on page 9‑18 for moreinformation.3. Let up on the shift lever andmake sure the shift lever ispushed all the way into P (Park).4. Press the shift lever button.5. Move the shift lever into thedesired gear.If you still cannot move the shiftlever from P (Park), consult yourdealer or a professional towingservice.Parking over ThingsThat Burn{WARNINGThings that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under thevehicle and ignite. Do not parkover papers, leaves, dry grass,or other things that can burn.
Black plate (28,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20129-28 Driving and OperatingEngine Exhaust{WARNINGEngine exhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness andeven death.Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:.The vehicle idles in areaswith poor ventilation (parkinggarages, tunnels, deep snowthat may block underbodyairflow or tail pipes)..The exhaust smells orsounds strange or different..The exhaust system leaksdue to corrosion or damage..The vehicle exhaust systemhas been modified, damagedor improperly repaired.(Continued)WARNING (Continued).There are holes or openingsin the vehicle body fromdamage or aftermarketmodifications that are notcompletely sealed.If unusual fumes are detected orif it is suspected that exhaust iscoming into the vehicle:.Drive it only with the windowscompletely down..Have the vehicle repairedimmediately.Never park the vehicle with theengine running in an enclosedarea such as a garage or abuilding that has no fresh airventilation.Running the VehicleWhile ParkedIt is better not to park with theengine running. But if you ever haveto, here are some things to know.{WARNINGIdling a vehicle in an enclosedarea with poor ventilation isdangerous. Engine exhaust mayenter the vehicle. Engine exhaustcontains Carbon Monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousnessand even death. Never run theengine in an enclosed area thathas no fresh air ventilation. Formore information, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑28.
Black plate (29,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Driving and Operating 9-29{WARNINGIt can be dangerous to get out ofthe vehicle if the automatictransmission shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running unless youhave to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).Follow the proper steps to be surethe vehicle will not move. SeeShifting Into Park on page 9‑25.If parking on a hill and pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9‑54.AutomaticTransmissionThe automatic transmission has ashift lever located on the consolebetween the seats.P (Park): This position locks thefront wheels. It is the best positionto use when starting the enginebecause the vehicle cannot moveeasily.{WARNINGIt is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.Do not leave the vehicle whenthe engine is running unless youhave to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park onpage 9‑25. If you are pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9‑54.
Black plate (30,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20129-30 Driving and OperatingMake sure the shift lever is fully inP (Park) before starting the engine.The vehicle has an automatictransmission shift lock controlsystem. The regular brake must befully applied first and then the shiftlever button pressed before shiftingfrom P (Park) when the ignition keyis in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift outof P (Park), ease pressure on theshift lever, then push the shift leverall the way into P (Park) as youmaintain brake application. Thenpress the shift lever button andmove the shift lever into anothergear. See Shifting out of Park onpage 9‑26.R (Reverse): Use this gear toback up.Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)while the vehicle is movingforward could damage thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Shift to R (Reverse) onlyafter the vehicle is stopped.To rock the vehicle back and forth toget out of snow, ice, or sand withoutdamaging the transmission, see Ifthe Vehicle Is Stuck on page 9‑10.N (Neutral): In this position, theengine does not connect with thewheels. To restart the engine whenthe vehicle is already moving, useN (Neutral) only. Also, useN (Neutral) when the vehicle isbeing towed.{WARNINGShifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could move very rapidly.You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shiftinto a drive gear while the engineis running at high speed.Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) orN (Neutral) with the enginerunning at high speed maydamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Be sure theengine is not running at highspeed when shifting the vehicle.D (Drive): This position is fornormal driving. It provides the bestfuel economy. If more power isneeded for passing, and thevehicle is:.Going less than 56 km/h(35 mph), push the acceleratorpedal about halfway down..Going about 56 km/h (35 mph) ormore, push the accelerator allthe way down.Notice: If the vehicle seemsto accelerate slowly ornot shift gears when you gofaster, and you continue to drivethe vehicle that way, you coulddamage the transmission. Havethe vehicle serviced right away.You can drive in L (Low) whenyou are driving less than56 km/h (35 mph) and D (Drive)for higher speeds until then.
Black plate (31,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Driving and Operating 9-31Manual Mode: This position isshown on the shift lever as a +/−.It allows the driver to select thegears appropriate for current drivingconditions. See Manual Mode onpage 9‑31 for more information.Manual ModeDriver Shift Control (DSC)Notice: If you drive the vehicle ata high rpm without upshiftingwhile using Driver Shift Control(DSC), you could damage thevehicle. Always upshift whennecessary while using DSC.DSC allows you to shift anautomatic transmission similar to amanual transmission. To use theDSC feature:With Selective Ride Control1. Move the shift lever to the leftfrom D (Drive).The vehicle will be in SportMode. The gear indicator in theDIC will still display a D forDrive, and the SPORT MODEON message will be displayedmomentarily. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑25. When you are inSport Mode, the vehicle will stillshift automatically, but chassistuning is modified. See SelectiveRide Control on page 9‑39.If you move the shift leverforward or rearward, thetransmission will enter ManualMode, and the DIC gearindicator will change toan M followed by a numberrepresenting the gear thevehicle is currently in.2. In Manual Mode, press the shiftlever forward to upshift orrearward to downshift.Without Selective Ride Control1. Move the shift lever to the leftfrom D (Drive).The transmission will enterManual Mode. The DIC gearindicator will change toan M followed by a numberrepresenting the gear thevehicle is currently in.2. In Manual Mode, press the shiftlever forward to upshift orrearward to downshift.
Black plate (32,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20129-32 Driving and OperatingUplevel Display Shown, BaseModel SimilarThe display on the instrument panelcluster will show which gear thevehicle is in. The number indicatesthe requested gear range whenmoving the shift lever forward orrearward.The transmission will only allowyou to shift into gears appropriatefor the vehicle speed and enginerevolutions per minute (rpm). Thetransmission will not automaticallyshift to the next lower gear if theengine rpm is too high, nor tothe next higher gear when themaximum engine rpm is reached.While in the DSC mode, thetransmission will automaticallydownshift when the vehicle comesto a stop. This will allow for morepower during take-off.When accelerating the vehicle froma stop in snowy and icy conditions,you may want to shift into secondgear. A higher gear allows you togain more traction on slipperysurfaces.Drive SystemsAll-Wheel DriveVehicles with this feature alwayssend engine power to all fourwheels. It is fully automatic, andadjusts itself as needed for roadconditions.When using a compact spare tireon an AWD vehicle, the systemautomatically detects the compactspare and disables AWD. To restoreAWD operation and preventexcessive wear on the system,replace the compact spare with afull-size tire as soon as possible.See Compact Spare Tire onpage 10‑89 for more information.
Black plate (33,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 2012Driving and Operating 9-33BrakesAntilock BrakeSystem (ABS)This vehicle has the Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), an advancedelectronic braking system that helpsprevent a braking skid.When the engine is started and thevehicle begins to drive away, ABSchecks itself. A momentary motor orclicking noise might be heard whilethis test is going on, and it mighteven be noticed that the brakepedal moves a little. This is normal.If there is a problem with ABS, thiswarning light stays on. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) Warning Lighton page 5‑20.If driving safely on a wet road and itbecomes necessary to slam on thebrakes and continue braking toavoid a sudden obstacle, acomputer senses that the wheelsare slowing down. If one of thewheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work thebrakes at each wheel.ABS can change the brake pressureto each wheel, as required, fasterthan any driver could. This can helpthe driver steer around the obstaclewhile braking hard.As the brakes are applied, thecomputer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controlsbraking pressure accordingly.Remember: ABS does not changethe time needed to get a foot up tothe brake pedal or always decreasestopping distance. If you get tooclose to the vehicle in front of you,there will not be enough time toapply the brakes if that vehiclesuddenly slows or stops. Alwaysleave enough room up ahead tostop, even with ABS.Using ABSDo not pump the brakes. Just holdthe brake pedal down firmly and letABS work. You might hear the ABSpump or motor operating and feelthe brake pedal pulsate, but this isnormal.Braking in EmergenciesABS allows the driver to steer andbrake at the same time. In manyemergencies, steering can helpmore than even the very bestbraking.
Black plate (34,1)Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual - 20129-34 Driving and OperatingParking BrakeThe vehicle has an Electric ParkingBrake (EPB). The switch for theEPB is in the center console. TheEPB can always be activated, evenif the ignition is off. To preventdraining the battery, avoid repeatedcycles of the EPB system when theengine is not running.The system has a parking brakestatus light and a parking brakewarning light. See Electric ParkingBrake Light on page 5‑19. There arealso three Driver Information Center(DIC) messages. See Brake SystemMessages on page 5‑33 for moreinformation. In case of insufficientelectrical power, the EPB cannot beapplied or released.Before leaving the vehicle, checkthe parking brake status light toensure that the parking brake isapplied.EPB ApplyThe EPB can be applied any timethe vehicle is stopped. The EPB isapplied by momentarily lifting up onthe EPB switch. Once fully applied,the parking brake status light will beon. While the brake is being applied,the status light will flash until fullapply is reached. If the light doesnot come on, or remains flashing,have the vehicle serviced. Do notdrive the vehicle if the parking brakestatus light is flashing. See yourdealer. See Electric Parking BrakeLight on page 5‑19 for moreinformation.If the EPB is applied while thevehicle is in motion, a chime willsound, and the DIC messageRELEASE PARKING BRAKE willbe displayed. The vehicle willdecelerate as long as the switch isheld in the up position. Releasingthe EPB switch during decelerationwill release the parking brake. If theswitch is held in the up position untilthe vehicle comes to a stop, theEPB will remain applied.If the parking brake status lightflashes continuously, the EPB isonly partially applied or released,or there is a problem with the EPB.The DIC message SERVICE PARKBRAKE will be displayed. If this lightflashes continuously, release theEPB, and attempt to apply it again.If this light continues to flash, do notdrive the vehicle. See your dealer.

Navigation menu